materials engineering and nanotechnology - ingegneria dei materiali e delle nanotecnologie

Review fundamental chemistry (and physics) and organic chemistry concepts: bonding, molecular structure and reactivity.
Complement the study of some areas of chemistry such as main groups, inorganic and transition metal chemistry.
Highlight the basic concepts necessary to correlate structure and properties of materials.
Outline the relevance of these topics to materials science and engineering.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:
know and understand fundamentals in chemistry (including inorganic and organic chemistry main concepts) (DdD1)
know, understand and apply chemical bonding models and concepts (DdD1 - DdD2)
know and understand molecular symmetry concepts including the applications to molecular material properties (DdD1)
know and understand the structure and symmetry of crystalline materials (DdD1)
know and understand intermolecular forces and the structure of molecular materials (DdD1)
know and understand coordination complexes structure and properties (DdD1)
know and understand basic concepts to correlate structure and properties of materials (DdD1)

The course has the following program:
1) Review of fundamentals in Chemistry. Knowledge of these topics represents a prerequisite for successfully attending the course.
2) Summary of atomic structure and periodic properties of the elements. Chemical bonding: revision of Lewis structures, VSEPR model and valence bond theory. Elements of molecular orbital theory.
3) Fundamentals in Organic Chemistry: introduction to main functional groups and reactivity; introduction to principle of the main instrumental measurements (partially flipped classes).
4) Molecular symmetry: point groups, irreducible representations and character tables. Applications of symmetry concepts to molecular orbitals.
5) Introduction to structure and symmetry of crystalline solids. Description and rationalization of representative inorganic crystal structures (metals, ionic and covalent solids).
6) Intermolecular forces and the structure of molecular materials.
7) Introduction to the chemistry of transition metals. Structure and thermodynamics of coordination complexes. Crystal field and ligand field theories.
Computer practicals
Classroom exercises illustrating the use of scientific software for: (a) Molecular Orbital calculations and properties (including molecules and solid crystalline materials; (b) Visualization of crystal structures (including an introduction to crystal structure determination by the analisys of experimental X-ray scattering data).
Course slides and material
Slides and additional material for the course will be available through the BEEP web site: https://beep.metid.polimi.it/

The final score of the Chemistry of Materials course (5 CFU) will be obtained by an oral exam. The students will be asked to prepare a presentation concerning one of the arguments of the course or an aspect of the chemistry of materials they want to analyse in details (as an examole: a research article) or a project study correlated to the usage of the software presented in the "Laboratorio progettuale" sections. During the presentation (15 minutes) the discussion will be expanded to the other arguments touched during the course. Several example of the arguments of the presentation will be suggested during the course.

Weller, Overon, Rourke, Armstrong, Inorganic Chemistry, 6th edition, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 019964182X
Note: Also ealier editions (named Shriver and Atkins' Inganic Chemistry) are okay
Wikipedia https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Portal:Chemistry

Obiettivo dell’insegnamento è fornire agli studenti i fondamenti della Fisica dello Stato Solido, al livello della laurea magistrale.
La prima parte ha come obiettivo lo studio dei solidi che possiedono un ordine a lungo raggio (cristalli), le loro proprietà strutturali (simmetria) e la loro struttura elettronica statica. Dopo un'introduzione alla cristallografia, i principali metodi sperimentali utilizzati per determinare la struttura geometrica dei cristalli vengono discussi, unitamente alla relativa teoria. La meccanica quantistica viene quindi utilizzata per determinare la struttura elettronica a bande, sia introducendo le proprietà generali degli stati elettronici in un potenziale periodico, sia presentando i principali metodi approssimati per il calcolo dei livelli energetici. Successivamente, l'effetto di un campo esterno statico viene studiato mediante alcuni concetti cruciali come: densità degli stati, Hamiltoniano equivalente, massa efficace, dinamica semiclassica e rappresentazione elettrone-buca.
Nella seconda parte si vogliono fornire agli studenti i principi basilari per la soluzione approssimata dell'equazione di Schroedinger a molti corpi per un cristallo a temperatura finita, includendo le vibrazioni reticolari: le approssimazioni di Born-Oppenheimer e di campo medio. La dinamica reticolare classica viene introdotta (costanti di forza interatomica e matrice dinamica, onde reticolari con le loro frequenze e polarizzazioni), e quindi quantizzata presentando i nuovi concetti di fononi acustici e ottici. Su questa base proprietà termodinamiche come il calore specifico e la dilatazione termica sono interpretabili a livello microscopico. Sono introdotte le proprietà ottiche macroscopiche dei solidi e, sempre utilizzando la meccanica quantistica, le proprietà ottiche dei cristalli vengono poi derivate dal trattamento microscopico delle transizioni elettroniche. Infine, le proprietà di trasporto (conducibilità termica ed elettrica e le loro dipendenze dalla temperatura) sono introdotte e spiegate in termini di cinetica fisica.
Tutti gli argomenti vengono illustrati anche mediante esempi.

Dopo aver seguito l’insegnamento e superato l’esame lo studente:

• descrive i principi matematici e fisici necessari per comprendere cosa sia un corpo solido, in particolare un cristallo, e conosce la struttura geometrica dei cristalli più importanti (DdD1);
• descrive le principali quantità che definiscono lo stato cristallino, così come i modelli teorici e i metodi sperimentali adatti a descriverlo e a determinarne la struttura, con particolare riferimento ai reticoli periodici perfetti 'congelati', con una base di atomi (DdD1);
• è in grado di argomentare sulle principali proprietà elettroniche statiche (struttura a bande) di specifici cristalli, comprendendo i fondamenti della descrizione quantistica di un elettrone in un potenziale periodico, e i principali metodi approssimati per il calcolo della struttura a bande (DdD1);
• è in grado di utilizzare i modelli teorici di cui sopra per sviluppare la descrizione del moto accelerato di un elettrone in un cristallo specifico, soggetto a un campo esterno statico, utilizzando la rappresentazione elettrone-buca (DdD2);
• descrive i modelli teorici necessari per risolvere in modo approssimato l'equazione di Schrodinger a molti corpi per un cristallo, includendo le vibrazioni dei nuclei (DdD1);
• descrive i fondamenti della dinamica reticolare, sia classica sia quantistica (onde reticolari e fononi) (DdD1);
• è in grado di applicare la meccanica quantistica per comprendere e prevedere le proprietà macroscopiche, termodinamiche e ottiche, di cristalli specifici (DdD2);
• è in grado di applicare la meccanica quantistica e la cinetica fisica per comprendere e prevedere le proprietà macroscopiche di trasporto (conducibilità elettrica e termica) di cristalli specifici (DdD2);
• possiede una conoscenza dei valori delle grandezze fisiche principali della Fisica dello Stato Solido, anche con riferimento ad esempi di cristalli specifici (DdD1).

• Proprietà fenomenologiche e definizione di materiali solidi
• Corpi solidi: ordine e simmetria; cristalli semplici: reticoli e ordine traslazionale; reticolo reciproco; cristalli complessi: reticolo e base; legame cristallino; osservabili tensoriali
• Teoria dello scattering: ampiezza di scattering di particelle quantistiche: approssimazione di Born; scattering elastico - legge di Bragg, diffrazione di raggi X
• L'equazione di Schrodinger per un cristallo: approssimazioni di Born-Oppenheimer e di campo medio
• Stati elettronici: teorema di Bloch, riduzione alla prima zona di Brillouin e condizioni periodiche al contorno; modello a elettroni liberi (energia di Fermi e densità di stati); struttura a bande: approssimazione di elettroni quasi liberi; struttura a bande: approssimazioni di legame forte e LCAO; metodo generale per il calcolo della densità di stati
• Dinamica dell'elettrone in campi esterni: Hamiltoniano equivalente; teorema della massa efficace; livelli di impurezza; dinamica semiclassica in un cristallo ideale; corrente elettrica e oscillazioni di Bloch; elettroni e buche (lacune); eccitoni
• Teorema adiabatico e moti vibrazionali
• Dinamica reticolare: Calore specifico reticolare: modello di Einstein; cristalli semplici 1-D: onde reticolari e fononi acustici; catene lineari con due atomi per cella: modi acustici e modi ottici; dinamica reticolare 3-D in generale: tensore delle costanti di forza interatomiche e matrice dinamica; fononi in un cristallo complesso 3-D; modello di Debye del calore specifico; dilatazione termica e processi anarmonici; polaritoni
• Proprietà ottiche: Descrizione macroscopica della dispersione e dell'assorbimento dei fotoni; relazioni di Kramers e Kronig per la suscettività dielettrica dipendente dalla frequenza; modello di Drude-Lorentz, proprietà ottiche dei metalli; trattazione quantistica dell'assorbimento di fotoni; proprietà ottiche dei semiconduttori a gap diretto; il caso del gap indiretto; proprietà ottiche dei polaritoni
• Fenomeni di trasporto: Leggi di Ohm e di Fourier locali; andamento sperimentale della conducibilità elettrica e termica in funzione della temperatura; cinetica fisica e equazione di Boltzmann; teoria microscopica della conducibilità elettrica e termica dei metalli; teoria microscopica della conducibilità termica degli isolanti (scattering fonone-fonone)

Prova orale obbligatoria
La valutazione consiste in un esame orale. Suo obiettivo è la verifica della conoscenza e della comprensione degli argomenti del corso, ed anche della capacità di applicare criticamente questa conoscenza generale per sviluppare la descrizione di: principali quantità che descrivono cristalli specifici; modelli teorici della struttura a bande per cristalli specifici; risposta ideale degli elettroni di un cristallo a campi esterni statici; disaccoppiamento approssimato elettroni-fononi; proprietà vibrazionali (fononi); proprietà termodinamiche e ottiche di cristalli specifici; proprietà di trasporto di cristalli specifici.
Lo studente deve essere in grado di descrivere chiaramente e discutere criticamente gli argomenti, con le relative ipotesi, le criticità, il significato fisico e l'approccio matematico (non sono strettamente richieste derivazioni complete, ma ovviamente la loro conoscenza può contribuire al voto finale; tuttavia la comprensione della fisica alla base dell'approccio matematico è considerata l'aspetto fondamentale).
Viene anche valutata la conoscenza di: sistemi di unità di misura, valori delle grandezze fisiche principali della Fisica dello Stato Solido, struttura dei cristalli più importanti e loro principali proprietà.

Carlo E. Bottani, Lecture Notes, Anno edizione: 2020
Note: disponibile sul sito BEEP del corso
C.Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th Edition, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2004
N.W. Ashcroft and N.D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, Editore: HRW International, Anno edizione: 1981
J.M. Ziman, Principles of the theory of solids (2-nd edition), Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1995
F. Bassani, U.M. Grassano, Fisica dello Stato Solido, Editore: Bollati Boringhieri, Anno edizione: 2000
H. Ibach. H. Luth, Solid-State Physics, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009

The course aims at introducing the students to the fundamental aspects characterizing the discipline of Electronics for microsystems. In particular, the course deals with the fundamental concepts of electronic processing of information, both analog and digital, focusing also on the examination of the physical behavior of analog and digital components and circuits, so that the student can evaluate their influence on real system performance (amplification, frequency response, speed, power dissipation…). For this reason, during the course the basic concepts on the working principles of elementary electronic devices (e.g., diodes, transistors) will be reviewed.
The course is divided into two modules ("Module 1: Fundamentals of Electronics - Analog" and "Module 2: Fundamentals of Electronics - Digital"), the first module is a prerequisite for the second one.

At the end of the course, the student:
Will have a solid understanding of the operating principles of basic analog and digital circuits using amplifying stages made of transistor, operational amplifiers and logic gates (DD1).
Will be capable to select the correct analysis techniques and to perform the useful approximation required to analyze the behavior of elementary analog and digital circuits. (DD1 and DD2).
Will be able to analyze an amplifier circuit, an elementary or complex CMOS logic gate, or simple acquisition chains using analog/digital converters (DD2).

Program of the theoretical and exercise lessons:
The main topics discussed during the course are:
1. Electronic Systems (Module 1)
1.1. Signals: real generators and sensors. Representation in the time domain and frequency components. Analog and digital systems.
1.2. Review of the first-order analysis of linear networks in the time and frequency domain.
2. Electronic Devices (Module 1)
2.1. Basics of semiconductors: dopants, carriers.
2.2. Diode: ideal characteristics in static conditions, use as a rectifier
2.3. MOS transistor: ideal characteristics in static conditions, use as switch and amplifier.
2.4. Amplifier stages based on single transistors
3. Analog Electronics (Module 1)
3.1. Operational amplifiers (OA): ideal characteristics, linear operation; comparator.
3.2. Negative reaction: concept of virtual ground, inverting and non-inverting configurations.
3.3. Circuits with real OA for addition, difference, integration, derivation and filtering of waveforms.
4. Positive Feedback Circuits (Module 2)
4.1. OA with positive reaction: Schmitt trigger and oscillators.
5. Analog/Digital Conversion (Module 2)
5.1. General concepts on sampling process: reconstruction criteria, spectrum and equivocation.
5.2. Sample&Hold: circuit made of discrete components, parameters and errors.
5.3. Analog to digital converters (ADCs): examples of internal structure, quantization, resolution, precision and accuracy.
5.4. Digital to analog converters (DACs): examples of internal structure, errors and non-linearities.
6. Digital Electronics (Module 2)
6.1. General concepts on CMOS logic: static and dynamic performance.
6.2. Combinatorial (decoder, multiplexer) and sequential (flip-flop) components.
7. Electronic noise (Module 2)
7.1. Stochastic VS deterministic quantities
7.2. Possible sources of electronic noise
Exercise classes on circuit simulation software (Modules 1 & 2)
The circuit simulaton activity aims to introduce students to the use of simulation software for circuit analysis (SPICE). During these classes, the basic functioning of the program will be explained, which will then be used to analyze simple circuits and compare the simulated results with the results obtainable with a "pen and paper" analysis. After these classes, the students will be able to self-assess the results obtained in all the other exercises of the course.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The exam consists of a written test on the entire program of the course. The written test verifies that the student:
understands the operating principles of basic amplifying circuits, CMOS logic gates and analog/digital conversion chains. (DD1)
is able to apply the acquired knowledge and to select the most useful techniques to analyze the behavior of the aforementioned circuits. (DD2)
is able to choose and apply simplified models for the solution of the proposed problem and to verify their reliability. (DD1 and DD2)

Franco Zappa, Elettronica, Editore: EdiSES, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-8879598972
Note: Italiano
R. Jaeger, T. Blalock, B. Blalock, Microelettronic Circuit Design (VI edition), Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 978-1260597851
Note: (English)

Instrumental methods of chemical analysis have become the principal means of obtaining information in diverse areas of science and technology. The speed, high sensitivity, low limits of detection, simultaneous detection capabilities, and automated operation of modern instruments, when compared to classical methods of analysis, have created this predominance. In this framework, the course aims at providing the fundamental understanding of instruments and their specific applications on organic materials.

After successfully completing the course, students will have acquired knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1) of:
The fundamental principles of mass spectrometry, NMR, FT-IR and Raman spectroscopies, as well as other analytical techniques used to investigate chemical structure (e.g., elemental analysis).
The basic principles of electron microscopy techniques, including imaging, diffraction, and chemical microanalysis.
The relationships between analytical data and chemical structure through the continuous application of characterization techniques to real case studies and molecular systems.
After successfully completing the course, students will be able to apply knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 2) to:
Elucidate molecular structures based on spectroscopic and analytical data.
Combine information obtained from different characterization techniques to solve structural problems.
Approach real case studies using an analytical and scientifically rigorous methodology.
Interpret experimental data and obtain reliable, accurate, and meaningful information for the identification and characterization of unknown substances.
Students will also develop the ability to make informed judgments (Dublin Descriptor 3) by:
Critically evaluating the consistency and reliability of analytical results.
Selecting the most appropriate characterization techniques to address a specific analytical problem.
Formulating scientifically sound conclusions on the basis of experimental evidence.

• Fundamentals of chemistry towards the analytical methods
• Principles of Instrumental measurements: handling and reliability of the analytical process
• Molecular mass spectrometry
• NMR spectroscopy
• IR and Raman spectroscopies

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The assessment consists of a written examination aimed at evaluating the achievement of the intended learning outcomes according to the Dublin Descriptors. The exam is composed of:
An open-ended question addressing one of the main topics covered during the course;
Exercises consisting in the characterization and/or the identification of a material or substance based on a set of analytical data and experimental results;
A set of multiple-choice questions covering the main contents of the course.
The open-ended question is designed to assess the student's knowledge and understanding of the scientific principles, methods, and characterization techniques discussed during the course (Dublin Descriptor 1). Students are required to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topic using appropriate scientific terminology and a coherent scientific language. The question also contributes to assessing the student's ability to formulate scientifically sound interpretations and evaluations (Dublin Descriptor 3).
The exercise aims at assessing the student's ability to apply knowledge and understanding to practical and realistic cases (Dublin Descriptor 2). Students are required to interpret experimental and analytical data, identify unknown materials or substances, and formulate conclusions based on the available evidence. This part of the examination also evaluates the student's ability to critically analyze data and make informed judgments (Dublin Descriptor 3).
The multiple-choice questions are intended to verify the overall acquisition of fundamental concepts, methods, and terminology presented during the course, contributing mainly to the assessment of knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1).
The final evaluation is based on the level of achievement of the following learning outcomes:
Knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 1): understanding of materials characterization techniques, analytical methods, and structure-property relationships discussed during the course;
Applying knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor 2): ability to use analytical and characterization data to identify materials and solve practical problems;
Making judgements (Dublin Descriptor 3): ability to critically interpret experimental results, assess the reliability of the available information, and formulate scientifically justified conclusions.

The aim of the course is to provide the basic tools of Fourier analysis, and their appliactions to the theory of signals and partial differential equations. An emphasis will be put on the operational approach, but within a precise and modern mathematical formalism; the aim is to build the mathematical framework that allows to study cutting-edge problems in engineering, allowing to both make theoretical predictions, and setup efficient and optimized numerical simulations and data analysis.

DD1: Knowledge and understanding - DD3: Making judgments
At the end of the lectures the students will be able to use the main tools of Fourier analysis, understand the concept of distribution, and how to study quantitatively and qualitatively partial differential equations.
DD2: Applying knowledge and understanding - DD3: Making judgments
The students will be able to apply the aforementioned mathematical tools to the study of concrete problems in engineering, such as the analysis and sampling of signals, the modeling of physical processes and materials.

1. Fourier Analysis
A. Discrete Fourier Analysis
i. Periodic signals: trigonometric polynomials and the Fourier Series
ii. Discrete Fourier Transform
iii. Cooley and Tuckey Algorithm and Fast Fourier Transform
B. Fourier Analysis
i. Convolution and Fourier transform on smooth functions
ii. Distributions
iii. Convolution and Fourier Transform on distributions
2. Signals and Filters
A. Analogic Filters
i. Filters and differential equations
ii. Examples
B. Filters and Distributions
i. Causal filters
ii. Tempered solutions of linear PDEs
C. Sampling
i. Periodic distributions
ii. Sampling and Poisson Formula
iii. Shannon sampling theorem
D. Time-Frequency Analysis
i. Gabor formulas
ii. Wavelets
3. Linear Partial Differential Equations
i. Fundamental solutions
ii. Qualitative properties of the transport, heat, and wave equations

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The open book written exam alone is going to account for a maximum mark of 24/30.
Students that obtain a high enough mark in the written exam (this will be communicated by the teacher upon grading) are admitted to the optional oral exam, in which all marks between 18 and 30L can be obtained.
Students shall keep in mind that a bad or insufficient oral exam might lead to a mark that is lower than the one obtained in the written exam alone, and in some cases to failure.

C. Gasquet, P. Witomski, Fourier Analysis and Applications: Filtering, Numerical Computations, and Wavelets, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2013
R. Brigola, Fourier Analysis and Distributions: a First Course with Applications, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2025
F. Golse - Distributions, analyse de Fourier, EDP https://www.cmls.polytechnique.fr/perso/golse/MAT431-10/POLY431.pdf
Note: Lecture notes (in french)
T.W. Körner, iFourier Analysis, Editore: Cambridge University Press

The course is aimed at developing a full understanding on the main failure mechanisms encountered in metals and on the environmental and loading conditions that can induce anticipated failure of structural parts.
Methods for the nondestructive measurement of the integrity of materials will also be covered in the second part of the course to give a comprehensive frame of information about the testing of metal structures against unexpected failures in service.

After attending the course and final examination, the students will:
a) know the fundamental mechanisms about failure of metals under different service conditions (DdD1);
b) know the different methods to perform non-destructive tests on structural parts (DdD1);
c) be able to apply the above knowledge for the evaluation of expected damage to be found in structural metallic parts as a function of manufacturing routes and service conditions (DdD2);
d) be able to select the best method (or combination of methods) for the non-destructive detection of defects in structural parts (DdD2).

The topics covered during the course are:
1) Failure mechanisms in metals: Principles of linear elastic fracture mechanics / Ductile fracture mechanism (microvoid formation) / Brittle fracture by cleavage and intergranular mechanisms / Strain and damage by fatigue / Strain and damage by creep.
2) Embrittlement mechanisms: Hydrogen embrittement / Liquid metal embrittlement (LME) / Loss of ductility at high temperature in steels / Temper embrittlement.
3) Residual stresses in metals: Micro and macro stress fields / Measurement of residual stresses / X-ray diffraction / Hole-drilling strain-gage method / other mechanical methods / Failures and distortion due to residual stresses.
4) Defects in metals related to manufacturing: Casting / Welding / Hot deformation / Cold forming / Thermal treatments and coatings.
5) Non destructive testing: X-ray radioscopy / Die penetrants testing / Ultrasound testing / Eddy current testing / Magnetoscopic testing.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The integrated course of "Mechanical Behaviour and Failure of Metals" is made up of the two modules of "Mechanical Behaviour of Metals" and of "Failure and control of Metals".
The exam of the module "Failure and control of Metals" consists of a written test only consisting of a short number of open questions (typically 3 or 4 questions) where the student will be asked to summarize the main concepts learnt about selected general topics.
The final mark of the integrated course will be registered as the average of the two modules once both have been passed. The positive evaluation of each single module will expire at end of the exam sessions of the running academic year.

C.R. Brooks, A. Choudhury, Failure analysis of engineering materials, Editore: Mc Graw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2002
R.W. Cahn, P. Haasen, E.J. Kramer, Materials science and technology, Vol. 6 Plastic deformation and fracture of metals, Editore: VCH Weinheim publisher, Anno edizione: 1996
R.W. Hertzberg, Deformation and fracture mechanics of engineering materials, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 1989
M.A. Meyers, R.W. Armstrong, H.O.K. Kirchner, Mechanics and Materials - Fundamentals and linkages, Editore: Wiley-Interscience publisher, Anno edizione: 1999
R.W. Messler, Principles of welding - Processes, physics, chemistry and metallurgy, Editore: Wiley-Interscience publisher, Anno edizione: 1999
J. Campbell, Casting - second Edition,, Editore: Butterworth Heinemann publisher, Anno edizione: 1991

Il primo obiettivo del corso è di fornire agli studenti gli strumenti per la descrizione e classificazione delle principali classi di monomeri e processi di polimerizzazione di interesse industriale.
Un secondo obiettivo del corso è di fornire agli studenti gli strumenti per una descrizione quantitativa dei principi generali di polimerizzazione, compresa un'analisi statistica e cinetica dettagliata dei meccanismi di formazione della catena polimerica, crescita e gelificazione, vulcanizzazione e reticolazione.
Il terzo obiettivo è di fornire agli studenti gli strumenti per l'interpretazione termodinamica e la derivazione della teoria molecolare dell'elasticità entropica delle gomme, evidenziando i limiti del modello rispetto al comportamento reale dell'elastomero.

Dopo aver frequentato il corso e a seguito del superamento dell'esame finale, lo studente:

• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere i principali tipi di monomeri e polimeri industriali disponibili e di classificarli in base alla loro struttura (DdD1; DdD2);
• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere gli aspetti cinetici e statistici relativi alla formazione e alla crescita di catena nei processi di polimerizzazione a stadi e a catena (DdD1; DdD2);
• possiederà le conoscenze base utili al fine di controllare la composizione e la sequenza di catena in processi di copolimerizzazione (DdD1);
• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere il meccanismo di formazione del reticolo polimerico in processi di polimerizzazione polifunzionali (DdD1; DdD2);
• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere il ruolo della catalisi nei processi di polimerizzazione (DdD1; DdD2);
• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere le caratteristiche principali dei processi di polimerizzazione omogenei ed eterogenei, con particolare riferimento a casi industriali di maggior rilevanza (DdD1; DdD2);
• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere le basi molecolari del modello di elasticità entropica delle gomme (DdD1; DdD2);
• conoscerà e sarà in grado di descrivere le principali tecnologie chimiche per la vulcanizzazione della gomma e il comportamento di elastomeri reali (DdD1; DdD2);
• sarà in grado di applicare le conoscenze sopra descritte al controllo quantitativo delle variabili di processo nei processi di polimerizzazione, risolvendo problemi numerici finalizzati al controllo della velocità di reazione, conversione e peso molecolare (DdD2);
• sarà in grado di applicare le conoscenze sopra descritte al fine di predire il tempo e le condizioni di gelazione in processi polifunzionali (DdD2);
• sarà in grado di applicare il modello dell'elasticità entropica delle gomme alla modellizzazione del comportamento meccanico degli elastomeri (DdD2).
  Si prevede che questi risultati di apprendimento attesi forniscano allo studente gli strumenti di conoscenza necessari per svolgere con successo le proprie attività future in un ambiente industriale, con particolare riferimento all'industria dei polimeri.

Il corso è diviso in due parti, secondo il seguente programma.
Parte 1: Polimerizzazione

• Classificazione di monomeri e polireazioni, correlazione con microstruttura polimerica.
• Polireazioni a stadi, aspetti cinetici e termodinamici delle policondensazioni, distribuzione più probabile dei pesi molecolari, controllo della polimerizzazione.
• Polireazioni a catena, fasi delle poliaddizioni radicaliche, aspetti cinetici e termodinamici di poliaddizioni radicaliche, distribuzione dei pesi molecolari, trasferimento di catena e controllo del peso molecolare, effetto della temperatura. Cenni sulle polimerizzazioni radicaliche controllate.
• Polireazioni a catena, processi ionici, fasi delle polimerizzazioni cationiche e anioniche, polimerizzazioni anioniche viventi e copolimeri a blocchi. Catalisi di Ziegler-Natta e polimerizzazione stereospecifica. Controllo della microstruttura polimerica.
• Copolimerizzazione, derivazione del modello cinetico, rapporti di reattività ed equazione di Lewis-Mayo, diagrammi F1-f1, parametri di Alfrey-Price, resa e controllo della deriva composizionale nella copolimerizzazione. Determinazione della composizione in copolimeri.
• Polimeri termoindurenti e reticolazione. I modelli statistici di Carothers e Flory per la stima del punto di gelazione nei processi di reticolazione. Monitoraggio sperimentale del tempo di gelazione.
• Produzione industriale di polimeri: processi discontinui e continui, processi omogenei ed eterogenei. Polimerizzazione in massa, polimerizzazione in sospensione, polimerizzazione in emulsione. Produzione di PET, PA6, PVC, SBR.
  Parte 2: Scienza e tecnologia delle gomme
• Requisiti strutturali di materiali elastomerici, correlazione con parametri intra ed intermolecolari. Definizione di elasticità entropica.
• Termodinamica classica dell'elasticità della gomma, derivazione dell'equazione di stato dell'elasticità a pressione costante e volume costante; inversione termoelastica (in modalità flipped classroom ).
• Teoria molecolare (statistica) dell'elasticità della gomma; catena gaussiana e forza di ritrazione elastica, modello di Kuhn e gomma ideale, deformazione affine e derivazione della legge costitutiva per gomma ideale (in modalità flipped classroom ).
• Comportamento di elastomeri reali; isteresi e dissipazione, cristallizzazione indotta dalla deformazione di gomme stereoregolari, grafico di Mooney-Rivlin.
• Vulcanizzazione di gomme; processi di vulcanizzazione con zolfo, perossidi e processi ionici. Monitoraggio del processo mediante metodi reologici e termici. Modellizzazione cinetica isotermica del processo di vulcanizzazione della gomma.
• Rinforzo meccanico di elastomeri reali; cariche di rinforzo, comportamento meccanico a piccole deformazioni ed effetto Payne; comportamento meccanico a grandi deformazioni.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
L'esame consisterà in una prova scritta sull'intero programma del corso. La prova scritta consisterà tipicamente in 5-6 domande relative alle tematiche trattate nel corso, delle quali 2-3 riguardanti aspetti teorici, derivazione di modelli matematici, rappresentazione grafica di dati e interpretazione fisica dei risultati, e 2-3 in forma di problemi numerici da risolvere.
Lo studente dovrà essere in grado di scrivere in modo chiaro e di discutere gli argomenti proposti in maniera critica, evidenziandone ipotesi, assunzioni, punti critici, significato fisico e relative conseguenze, e includendo laddove necessario un rigoroso e corretto approccio matematico.
Le esercitazioni numeriche del corso verranno svolte in aula in presenza a piccoli gruppi con modalità interattiva. La frequenza a tali esercitazioni, pur non obbligatoria, è fortemente raccomandata e potrà dare accesso a un incremento fino a +1 su una valutazione almeno sufficiente (maggiore o uguale a 18) ottenuta nella prova scritta in sede di esame.
L’esame verrà considerato superato con una valutazione maggiore o uguale a 18 nella prova scritta, quest'ultima sostenuta durante uno degli appelli di gennaio/febbraio, giugno/luglio o settembre. La valutazione della prova scritta terrà conto della correttezza formale delle risposte ai quesiti proposti, oltre che della chiarezza e della proprietà di linguaggio utilizzate.
In caso di valutazione maggiore o uguale a 18 nella prova scritta, lo studente avrà la possibilità di richiedere un esame orale integrativo, che darà accesso a una variazione positiva o negativa di massimo 3 punti del voto dello scritto (+3 o -3).

G. Griffini, Principles of Polymer Chemistry - lecture's notes
G. Odian, Principles of Polymerization, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2004
J.E. Mark, Rubber Science and Technology, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2013

The first objective of the course is the description and classification of the main classes of monomers and polymerization processes of industrial interest.
A second objective of the course is a quantitative description of the general principles of polymerization, including a detailed statistical and kinetic analysis of the mechanisms of polymer chain formation, growth and gelation, vulcanization and crosslinking.
The third objective is the thermodynamic interpretation and the derivation of molecular theory for the entropic elasticity of rubbers, highlighting the limitations of the model by comparison with the real elastomer behaviour.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:
know the main types of available industrial monomers and polymers, and understand how to classify them according to their structure (DD1, DD2)
know and understand the kinetics and statistics of chain formation and growth in both step and chain polymerization processes (DD1, DD2)
know and understand how to control composition and sequence in copolymerization (DD1)
know and understand the mechanism of network formation in polyfunctional polymerization processes (DD1, DD2)
know and understand the role of catalysis in polymerization (DD1, DD2)
know the features of homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization processes, with application to the most relevant industrial cases (DD1, DD2)
know and understand the molecular basis of the entropic elasticity model (DD1, DD2)
know the main chemical technologies for rubber vulcanization, and the behaviour of real elastomers (DD1, DD2)
be able to apply the above described knowledge to the quantitative control of process variables in polymerization, solving numerical problems aimed at the control of rate of reaction, conversion, and molecular weight (DD2)
be able to apply the above described knowledge to the prediction of the gel point / gel time in polyfunctionl process (DD2)
be able to apply the entropic elasticity model to the modeling of the mechanical behavior of elastomers (DD2)
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the student with the needed knowledge tools necessary for successfully performing their future activities in an industrial environment, with particular reference to the polymer industry

The course is divided in two parts, with the following programme
Part 1: Polymerization
Classification of monomers and polyreactions, correlation with polymer microstructure.
Step polyreactions, kinetic and thermodynamic aspects of polycondensations, most probable distribution of molecular weights, control of polymerization.
Chain polyreactions, phases of free-radical poyadditions, kinetic and thermodynamic aspects of free radical polyadditions, distribution of molecular weights, chain transfer and control of molecular weight, effect of temperature. Some hints on controlled radical polymerizations.
Chain polyreactions, ionic processes, phases of cationic and anionic polymerizations, living anionic polymerizations and block copolymers. Ziegler-Natta catalysis and stereospecific polymerization. Control of the polymer microstructure.
Copolymerization, derivation of the kinetic model, reactivity ratios and Lewis-Mayo equation, F1-f1 diagrams, Alfrey-Price parameters, yield and control of compositional drift in copolymerization. Determination of composition in copolymers.
Crosslinking ad thermoset polymers. Carothers and Flory's statistical models for the estimation of the gel point in crosslinking processes. Experimental monitoring of the gel time.
Industrial production of polymers: batch and continuous processes, homogeneous and heterogeneous processes. Bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, emulsion polymerization. Production of PET, PA6, PVC, SBR.
Part 2: Rubber science and technology
Structural requirements of elastomeric materials, correlation with intra and intermolecular parameters. Definition of entropic elasticity.
Classical thermodynamics of rubber elasticity, derivation of the equation of state of elasticity at constant pressure and constant volume; thermoelastic inversion ( flipped classroom ).
Molecular (statistical) theory of rubber elasticity; gaussian chain and elastic retraction force, Kuhn model and ideal rubber, affine deformation and derivation of the constitutive law for ideal rubber (flipped classroom).
Behavior of real elastomers; hysteresis and dissipation, strain-induced crystallization of stereoregular rubbers, Mooney-Rivlin plot.
Vulcanization of rubbers; sulfur, peroxy and ionic vulcanization processes. Process monitoring by rheological and thermal methods. Isothermal kinetic modelling of rubber vulcanization.
Mechanical reinforcement of real elastomers; reinforcing fillers, small deformation behavior and Payne effect; large deformation behavior.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The final examination will be a written test about all the course topics, chosen by the examiner. The test will consist in 5 or 6 questions, typically some 2-3 questions concerning theoretical aspects, derivation of mathematical models, graphical representation of data and physical interpretation of results, and 2-3 questions in form of numerical problems to be solved.
The student is required to be able to write clearly and critically discuss the proposed topics, highlighting hypotheses, assumptions, critical points, the physical meaning and its consequences, including a correct mathematical approach where needed.
Students who obtain a passing mark in the written examination are eligible to request an additional oral assessment. This oral component may result in a variation of plus or minus 3 points relative to the initial written score.
Numerical exercizes will be carried out during the course organizing the classroom in small groups and in an interactive way. Attendance in presence at these sessions, although not mandatory, is highly recommended and it can lead to an increment in the final evaluation mark up to +1 (in case of evaluation at least 18/30 in the written test)

S. Turri, Principles of Polymer Chemistry - lecture's notes
G. Odian, Principles of Polymerization, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2004
J.E. Mark, Rubber Science and Technology, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2013

The course is offered in a 10-ECTS version (Solid State Physics), to which two 5-ECTS courses (Solid State Physics A and Solid State Physics B) are associated and offered jointly. The present detailed program defines aims, educational outcomes and syllabus for every joint course.
Solid State Physics (10 ECTS)
The course goals are the union of those of part A and part B as follows:
Solid State Physics A (5 ECTS)
The course aims at giving students the fundamentals of solid state physics at a graduate level. Long range order solids (crystals), their structural properties (symmetry) and static electronic structure are of main concern. After an introduction to crystallography, the main experimental tools used to determine the geometric structure of crystals are discussed together with the related theory. Then quantum mechanics is used to find the electronic band structure both introducing the general properties of electronic states in a periodic potential and presenting the main approximate methods to calculate the energy levels. Finally, the effect of an external static field on electrons is studied by means of crucial concepts like: density of states, equivalent Hamiltonian, effective mass, semiclassical dynamics and electron-hole representation. All arguments are illustrated by examples.
Solid State Physics B (5 ECTS)
The course aims at giving students the basic principles for the approximate solution of the many body Schrodinger equation for a crystal at a finite temperature including lattice vibrations: Born-Oppenheimer and mean-field approximations. Classical lattice dynamics is then introduced (interatomic force constants and dynamic matrix, lattice waves with their frequencies and polarization) and eventually quantized presenting the new concepts of acoustic and optic phonons. On this basis, thermodynamic properties like specific heat and thermal dilation are made microscopically understandable. Always using quantum mechanics, the macroscopic optical properties of crystals are derived from a microscopic treatment of electronic transitions. At the end transport properties (electrical and thermal conductivities and their temperature dependence) are introduced and explained in terms of physical kinetics. All arguments are illustrated by examples.

Solid State Physics (10 ECTS)
The expected learning outcomes are both those of part A and of part B, as detailed in the following.
Solid State Physics A (5 ECTS)
After the exam, the student:

• knows the mathematics and the physical principles required to understand what is a solid body and in particular a crystal, together with the geometric structure of the most important crystals (DdD1)
• knows the main quantities defining the crystalline state, together with the theoretical models and experimental methods suitable to describe it and to ascertain its structure, with particular reference to perfect “frozen” periodic lattices with a basis of atoms (DdD1)
• is able to forecast the main static electronic properties (band structure) of specific crystals knowing the fundamentals of the quantum mechanics of one electron in a periodic potential and the main approximate methods to compute the band structure itself, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way (DdD2 - DdD4)
• is able to exploit the above theoretical models to develop the description of the accelerated motion of an electron in a specific crystal subjected also to a static external field using the electron-hole representation (DdD2).
  Solid State Physics B (5 ECTS)
  After the exam, the student:
• knows the theoretical models required to approximately solve the many body Schroedinger equation for a crystal including nuclear vibrations (DdD1)
• knows the fundamentals of both classical and quantum lattice dynamics (lattice waves and phonons) (DdD1)
• is able to apply quantum mechanics to understand and forecast the macroscopic thermodynamic and optical properties of specific crystals, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way (DdD2)
• is able to apply quantum mechanics and physical kinetics to understand and forecast the macroscopic transport properties (electrical and thermal conductivities) of specific crystals, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way (DdD2 - DdD4).
  In addition, the student knows the values or the order of magnitude of the main physical quantities and properties of solid state materials discussed in the course, also with reference to examples of specific crystals.

Solid State Physics (10 ECTS)
The topics of this course are both those of part A and part B as listed in the following.
Solid State Physics A (5 ECTS)

• Introduction: phenomenological properties and definition of solid materials
• Solid bodies: order and symmetry; simple crystals: lattices and translational order; reciprocal lattice; complex crystals: lattice and basis; crystal binding; tensorial observables
• Scattering theory: quantum particle scattering amplitude: Born approximation; elastic scattering; Bragg law; X-Ray Diffraction
  Schrodinger equation of a crystal: Born-Oppenheimer and mean field approximations
• Electronic states: Bloch theorem, reduction to the first Brillouin zone and periodic boundary conditions; free electron model (Fermi energy and density of states); band structure: nearly free electron approximation; band structure: tight binding and LCAO approximations; general method for the computation of the density of states
• Electron dynamics in external fields: equivalent Hamiltonian; effective mass theorem; impurity levels; semiclassical dynamics in an ideal crystal; electrical current and Bloch oscillations, electrons and holes, excitons.
  Solid State Physics B (5 ECTS)
• Adiabatic theorem and vibrational motions
• Lattice dynamics: lattice specific heat: Einstein model; simple 1D crystal: lattice waves and acoustic phonons, linear chain with two atoms per cell: acoustic modes and optical modes; general 3D lattice dynamics: interatomic force constant tensor and dynamic matrix; phonons in a 3D complex crystal; Debye model of specific heat; thermal dilation and anharmonic processes;polaritons
• Optical properties: macroscopic description of dispersion and absorption of photons; Kramers-Kronig relations for the frequency dependent dielectric susceptibility; Drude-Lorentz model; optical properties of metals; quantum treatment of photon absorption; optical properties of direct band gap semiconductors; the case of indirect band gap; optical properties of polaritons
• Transport phenomena: local Ohm law and Fourier law; experimental temperature dependence of electrical and thermal conductivities; physical kinetics and Boltzmann equation; microscopic theories of electrical conductivity and of thermal conductivity of metals; microscopic theory of thermal conductivity of insulators (phonon-phonon scattering).
  Some reminders to required preliminary knowledge and theoretical tools, necessary to address the teaching topics and related to quantum mechanics, analytical mechanics and electromagnetism, will be provided through recorded video lectures; these topics will then be resumed and discussed in the classroom in specific sessions devoted to verifying the students' understanding.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in an oral examination. It aims at verifying both the knowledge and the understanding of the course topics (typically one topic from part A and one from part B) and also the ability to apply critically this general knowledge to develop the description of: (Solid State Physics A) main quantities defining specific crystals, electronic band structure models for specific crystals, response of crystal electrons to external static fields; (Solid State Physics B) vibrational properties, thermodynamic and optical properties of specific crystals, transport properties of specific crystals. The student must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hypotheses, the physical meaning, the mathematical approach (complete derivations are not strictly required, but of course their knowledge may contribute to the final mark). The knowledge of the systems of units, the value of the fundamentals physical quantities in Solid State Physics, the structure of the most important crystals and their main properties are addressed as well for both part A and B.

C.Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, 8th Edition, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2004
N.W. Ashcroft, N.D. Mermin, Solid State Physics, Editore: HRW International, Anno edizione: 1981
H. Ibach, H. Luth, Solid-State Physics, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009
F. Bassani, U.M. Grassano, Fisica dello Stato Solido, Editore: Bollati Boringhieri, Anno edizione: 2000
J.M. Ziman, Principles of the theory of solids (2-nd edition), Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1995
E. Kaxiras, J.D. Joannopoulos, Quantum Theory of Materials, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2019
Carlo E. Bottani, Lecture Notes, Anno edizione: 2020
Note: available on the BeeP website of the course

The course is aimed at providing the fundamental concepts of surface science (e.g. surface morphology, surface energy, and surface forces), adhesion phenomena, wear mechanisms, friction and lubrication systems. The course is then aimed at describing and explaining important surface treatment processes used in the industrial practice based on wet and dry techniques. For each process, the basic principles, the operating parameters, the industrial equipment, the monitoring methods, the quality control and the industrial applications are discussed, together with the evaluation of imparted surface properties to the bulk material. Surface modification processes at the microscale will be presented in the field of MEMS technology.

Upon completion of the course, the student will
know the main components of a wet metallization process and its major working parameters and industrial setup (DdD1);
know the physical principles, the operating conditions and the control methods of the main industrial processes in the field of Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) (DdD1);
know the structure and properties of advanced coatings produced by CVD techniques (DdD1);
know the main components of a surface treatment process at the microscale for microelectromechanical systems (DdD1);
know and understand the relationship between coating properties and service performance of the coated parts according to friction and wear phenomena (DdD1);
be able to apply the above described knowledge for the purpose of selecting a suitable surface treatment to attain the desired properties in industrial applications (DdD2).
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the students with adequate knowledge tools and critical approach for their future activity related to surface treatment processes based on wet and dry techniques.

· Fundamentals of surfaces: roughness and spatial parameters, correlations with surface machining, surface forces, mechanisms of adhesion, testing
· Friction and wear: friction laws, mechanisms of wear, degradation of materials, testing
· Lubrication: solid and liquid lubricants, types of lubrication, surface adsorption of boundary lubricants
· Decorative and functional coatings: electrodeposition, electroless deposition, immersion plating, conversion coatings and top coats, CVD techniques, thermal spraying, galvanizing and zinc flakes
· Anodization of light alloys: hard and soft aluminium anodization, coloring and electrocoloring
· MEMS and surface micromachining: silicon micromachining, stiction and adhesion phenomena, self-assembled monolayer

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will be an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner so that different parts of the course syllabus are involved.
The student must be also able to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topics, highlighting the assumptions, critical points, physical meaning and following consequences, including the mathematical approach where needed. The student should also be able to apply the theoretical knowledge to solving specific problems typically encountered in the industrial practice.

Edited by M. Chaudhury and A.V. Pocius, Adhesion Science and Engineering, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2002
Bharat Bhushan, Modern Tribology Handbook, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2000
Edited by B.G. Mellor, Surface coatings for protection against wear, Editore: Woodhead Publishing and Maney Publishing on behalf of The Institute of Materials, Minerals & Mining - CRC Press Boca Raton Boston New York Washington, DC, Anno edizione: 2006

The course is aimed at describing and explaining important surface-modification techniques used in the industrial practice. All the features of the single technique are examined, including the basic principles, operating parameters, industrial equipment, monitoring methods, quality control and industrial applications.
The course is also aimed at describing the variety of coating structures that can be produced by many of these techniques and the outstanding properties that can be achieved. The relationship between surface properties imparted by the specific treatment and the service performance of the component is also considered.

Upon completion of the course, students will (DdD1)
know the main components of a vacuum production system and how to combine them for achieving the required vacuum range;
know the physical principles, the operating conditions and the control methods of the main industrial processes in the field of Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD);
know the structure and properties of advanced coatings produced by PVD techniques;
know and understand the main chemical processes aimed at producing surface modifications, including the plasma-assisted techniques.
In addition, students will be able to (DdD2)
measure properties of coatings and layers for optimizing surface treatments;
select proper treatments for improving the lifetime of engineering components;
apply the acquired knowledge to designing surface treatments aimed at achieving the desired properties in industrial applications.
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the students with adequate knowledge tools and critical approach for their future activity related to surface-modification processes based on active gas species.

The main topics of the course are
Vacuum technology: mean free path, collision cross section, vacuum ranges; molecular flow, throughput and conductance; pumping speed, outgassing and evacuation time; preliminary pumps and high-vacuum pumps; vacuum gauges.
Microstructure of coatings and films; structure zone models; effect of energetic particles and causes of residual stresses.
Physical vapour deposition (PVD). Vacuum evaporation: vaporization rate and space distribution of evaporated atoms; thickness uniformity and coating purity; evaporation of compounds and alloys; resistively-heated sources and electron beam sources; coating structure; industrial equipment and process control; industrial applications and case studies. Sputter deposition: introduction to plasma discharges; sputter yield, direct-current and radio-frequency sputtering; magnetic confinement; reactive sputtering; process control and industrial applications. Cathodic arc deposition: arc discharge and distribution of emitted particles; steered arc and filtered cathodic arc; reactive processes; industrial applications; comparison with traditional and emerging PVD techniques.
Plasma enhanced chemical vapour deposition: process fundamentals and applications; types of reactors, direct and remote processes, electron resonance sources. Plasma etching: processes and reactors.
Advanced ceramic coatings: coating properties and composition; failure modes; load-carrying capacity; graded layers, multilayers, superlattices, nanocomposites, duplex treatments; self-lubricating layers, diamond-like carbon; hardness measurement and indentation.
Performance of the treated components: sources of residual stress in coatings and measurement methods; wear and fatigue resistance of coated parts.
Cold plasma treatments at atmospheric pressure: fundamentals, devices and applications.
Thermochemical treatments: carburizing techniques; gas carburizing atmospheres; main carbon-transfer reactions; carbon potential control; low-pressure carburizing. Gas nitriding and structure of the nitrided layers; nitriding potential and process control; post-oxidation treatments; plasma nitriding, comparison of different techniques.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will be an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner so that different parts of the course syllabus are involved.
The student must be also able to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topics, highlighting the assumptions, critical points, physical meaning and following consequences, including the mathematical approach where needed. The student should also be able to apply the theoretical knowledge to solving specific problems typically encountered in the industrial practice.

M. Ohring, Materials Science of Thin Films, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2002
B. Bhushan Ed., Modern Tribology Handbook, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2000
G.E. Totten Ed., The Materials Steel heat treatments: metallurgy and technologies, Editore: Taylor & Francis, Anno edizione: 2007

Il corso si propone di fornire agli studenti i concetti di base della corrosione ad umido dei materiali metallici.
Saranno affrontati i seguenti argomenti: meccanismo elettrochimico di corrosione a umido; reazioni di
corrosione e Legge di Faraday; aspetti termodinamici, aspetti cinetici e legge di Tafel, corrosione uniforme,
forme di corrosione localizzata, forme di corrosione in presenza di sforzi esterni. Infine saranno illustrati i
metodi di prevenzione e protezione dalla corrosione: la scelta dei materiali, l'uso di rivestimenti, la protezione
catodica e l'impiego di inibitori. Ogni tema sarà affrontato con lezioni frontali in aula, esercitazione numeriche e
illustrazione di casi pratici. Durante il corso si volgerà un laboratorio pratico per la misura del potenziale e della
velocità di corrosione.

The course aims at conveying the understanding of the main problems of degradation of cementitious and ceramic materials as a function of the working environment. The students will gain knowledge of the main degradation issues and their causes, and will be invited to apply the knowledge acquired to make a durability assessment, understanding the degradation mechanisms expected, evaluating the material service life and selecting suitable preventative/repair techniques both in the design phase, and in real structures already subject to degradation.
An insight into advanced ceramic and special glass materials industrial applications will be given, to gather understanding of critical aspects determining materials durability. The students will understand how to increase ceramic materials toughness and extend their service life in high temperature applications, and to apply this knowledge to a correct material selection in the given working environment.

Lectures, numerical exercises and practical examples will allow the student to (DdD1 - DdD2 - DdD3):

• obtain knowledge and understanding of the possible risks of concrete degradation and of the mechanisms of rebars corrosion in concrete, as a function of the environment characteristics
• apply such knowledge to estimate the service life of a concrete structure in a given environment, and to define the correct mixture proportion to meet the expected service life in the specific environment
• gather and interpret information on the causes of concrete degradation, in order to select a proper prevention and/or repair technique for already existing structures
• obtain knowledge and understanding of the main industrial applications of advanced ceramic materials, and correlate them to the specifically relevant materials properties
• understand the toughening mechanisms of advanced ceramics, as well as the mechanisms of ceramics degradation in high temperature applications, and apply such knowledge to make a correct material selection for a specific application
• obtain knowledge of special glass characteristics for advanced applications (solar control, optical fibers)

The course is taught in the second half of the semester and deals with the following topics.
Concrete and reinforced concrete degradation. Chemical and physical degradation of concrete based on transport mechanisms inside the material. Rebars corrosion mechanisms in concrete: carbonation and chloride induced corrosion. Effect of the environment (relative humidity, presence of salts). Hydrogen embrittlement of high strength steels. Evaluation of concrete service life by a deterministic approach (the probabilistic approach will be briefly addressed as well). Preventative techniques for concrete degradation. Real structure monitoring and repair.
Advanced ceramics degradation. Brief description of advanced ceramics and their applications, described with reference to the properties required in each specific application field. Focus on ceramic matrix composites as method for reducing mechanical failure by improving material toughness. Mechanisms of degradation of both refractory and structural advanced ceramics: role of environment temperature and composition, strategies to extend service life.
Glass. Composition and properties of special glass for solar control and other applications in the built environment: photochromic, electrochromic, thermochromic, liquid crystal glass. Production and working principles of optical fibers. Glass degradation (outline).
NOTE ON BOOKS SUGGESTED: Given the number of different topics presented, the whole program cannot be covered with one single textbook: for this reason, several books are suggested, each of them covering part of the program. For topics related to concrete, Bertolini (in Italian) and Bertolini et al. (in English) are indicated as alternatives the student can choose among. Moreover, students will be provided with slides of all lectures, and notes for selected topics (mainly for ceramic materials engineering).

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The evaluation will be carried out with a written exam (max 32 pt), carried out in the official exam days. The written exam consists of open questions (1 or 2), numerical exercises (1 or 2) and multiple choice questions. Aim of the written exam is to verify the student understanding of the corrosion and degradation issues of concrete and ceramics in real working conditions. The ability to apply such knowledge to perform a material selection based on the real application requirements will be verified. At the same time, the written exam will verify the capability to perform a proper assessment, evaluating the residual service life or applying any repair techniques to restore safe working conditions.
FOR STUDENTS ENROLLED IN THIS COURSE: Only if the score of the written exam is >16/30, the student can improve the final score with an oral exam (optional). The oral exam will be meant to assess the capability of the student to apply the theoretical and practical concepts learned to real cases of evaluation of possible degradation mechanisms and prevention or repair strategies. With the oral, a maximum increase of 3 points can be obtained. If the oral is not satisfactory, the score can be reduced.
FOR STUDENTS ENROLLED TO THE CORROSION ENGINEERING OF METALS AND CERAMICS INTEGRATED COURSE: Please read instructions given on the integrated course page.

L. Bertolini, Materiali da costruzione. Vol. 2: Degrado, prevenzione, diagnosi, restauro, 2a edizione, Editore: Città studi, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 8825172788
L. Bertolini, B. Elsener, P. Pedeferri, E. Redaelli, R. Polder, Corrosion of steel in concrete: Prevention, Diagnosis, Repair, Second Edition, Editore: Wiley-VCH, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 9783527331468 https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/3527603379
Note: 1st edition 2004 is fully available in the Politecnico di Milano library website
P. Pedeferri, Corrosion science and engineering, Editore: Springer Nature, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-3-319-97624-2 https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007%2F978-3-319-97625-9
Note: Available in the Politecnico di Milano library website
M. Collepardi, The new concrete, Editore: Grafiche Tintoretto, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 889014694X
R.A. McCauley, Corrosion of ceramic and composite materials, Second Edition, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2004, ISBN: 9780824753665
S. Somiya, Handbook of advanced ceramics, 2nd Edition, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 9780123854698

The course aims at providing knowledge about organic materials for electronics, optoelectronics and optics and related devices. The course deals with conducting materials, photochromic materials, liquid crystals, as distinct topics. For each class of materials, molecular structure-properties relationships are studied also considering the possible technological applications. Attention is focused on the design of devices such as LEDs, transistors, photovoltaic cells, LCDs, sensors and smart windows. Finally, techniques for the deposition of the organic materials into films are considered.

The expected learning outcomes are:
aquiring knowledge of the principles of molecular engineering of electronic materials, i.e. organic semiconductors, and optically-active materials (DdD1);
aquiring knowledge of the structure to property relationship, with specific focus on optical and electrical properties (DdD1);
aquiring ability to apply the principles of molecular engineering to design functional materials for specific applications (DdD2);
aquiring the ability to predict the properties of a functional material, given the molecular structure (DdD2);
aquiring knowledge of the working principles of the main electronic devices, their characteristics, components and architecture (DdD1);
aquiring ability to apply the above knowledge to a critical description and discussion of the devices and related materials properties, limitations and developments (DdD2).
Overall, these learning outcomes are expected to provide the student basic knowledge tools necessary to i) understand the technology trends and i) perform future activities aimed at the development of materials for electronics optoelectronics and smart optics.

Functional materials:
Basic principles.
Fundamentals on organic functional materials: molecular skeleton, side groups; the electronic effect of side groups.
Conjugated materials
Molecular design: from localized chemical bonding to delocalized chemical bonding (LCAO, the frontier energy levels)
Structure to properties relationship: the UV-vis spectroscopy
Polyacetylene: structure, synthesis, electrical properties; Shirakawa films
Doping: chemical and electrochemical processes; charge carriers in organic materials; fundamentals of charge transport
The deactivation from the excited state: the emissive properties (photoluminescence)
Applications of conducting polymers: OLED, photovoltaic cells, thin film transistors, smart windows, sensors
Liquid crystals
Fundamentals, mesogens, main LC phases; polymer liquid crystals; LC embedded in polymer matrix (preparation methods, drop configuration, smart windows).
Optical thermometers. Smart windows. Liquid crystal displays.
Photochromic and thermochromic materials
Fundamentals, main families
Applications: ophthalmic lenses, inks
See bibliography for suggested books (covering more than the programme of the course). Additional material or lecture notes are given by the lecturer.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
A written examination, which consists in:
A numerical exercise on a device: OFETs, photovoltaic cells, OLEDs or smart windows and filters.
The exercise aims at applying knowledge to calculate the efficiency or the main characteristics of a device starting from given experimental data. Regarding this part, not only the correct calculation is assessed but also the proper use of significant decimals and units of measurement. Then, student is required to give a critical assessment of the performance with regards to the materials amployed as well as the manufacturing process. Similarly, student is required to assign specific devices to the corresponding materials on the basis of the materials structure and processing. The assignment has to be properly supported.
An open question of one of the main topics of the course
In the open question, the student is required to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topic. Not only the knowledge about the topic is assessed, but also the correct use of a proper scientific language and clarity in the description.
An exercise on the structure-to-property relationship
It aims at evaluating the ability of the student to apply the acquired knowledge on molecular design to a case study, finding the right key to solve the problem.
A series of multiple choice questions
It allows to assess the knowledge and comprehension throughout the subjets.

Functional Organic and Polymeric Materials, Editore: Ed. by T.H. Richardson - Wiley, ISBN: 0471987247
Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Editore: Ed. by T.A. Skotheim - Marcel Dekker inc., Anno edizione: 1986, ISBN: 0-8247-7395-0
Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Editore: Ed. by T.A. Skotheim, R.L. Elsenbaumer, J.R. Reynolds - Marcel Dekker, Anno edizione: 1998, ISBN: 0-8247-0050-3
S.O. Kasap, Optoelectronics and Photonics: Principles and Practices, Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0-201-61087-6
Organic Photochromic and Thermochromic Compounds, Editore: Ed. by J.C. Crano and R.J. Guglielmetti - Plenum Press - New York, Anno edizione: 1999, ISBN: 0-306-45882-9

The course aims to introduce basic and advanced concepts necessary for understanding the structure-property correlations of polymeric materials and composites for engineering applications. The analysis is carried out starting from the linear behavior (liquid and solid state) and time dependent (viscoelasticity) and then passing to the durability examination intended as the beginning of irreversible phenomena that lead to the degradation of the structure and performance of materials. They include the yield, fracture and phenomena of change of the chemical structure (eg degradation by exposure to sunlight) and physics of materials.

The student:

• knows and understands the structure-property correlations of polymers and composites and their appropriate use in the design of processes and products for Materials Engineering and Nanotechnologies (DdD1);
• knows how to make choices related to the dimensioning of components and the use of materials in relation to the specific use of the product (DdD1-DdD2);
• autonomously carries out insights on topics related to the course to solve simple design problems (DdD2).
  The project-work also has the objective of stimulating the student's ability to develop autonomous knowledge of the subject, to address and critically discuss problems and situations also other than those faced during the lessons, and to make design choices. These abilities will be taken into account in the final evaluation.

INTRODUCTION
The engineering use of polymeric materials: processing and applications.
Rheological properties and solid state properties.
Limitations of the traditional concept of property (‘single point data’) and advanced (‘integral’) concept.
Constitutive relations and their role in engineering problems.
Intrinsic material properties
Examples of constitutive relations used in polymer rheology and mechanics.
RECALL of basic concepts and definitions in SOLID and FLUID MECHANICS
POLYMER RHEOLOGY
Rheological constitutive equations for polymers: classification. Non-Newtonian shear behaviour of polymeric fluids. Dynamic viscosity. Fluodynamics and the role of rheological costitutive equations in fluodynamical problems. Example: analysis of the flow in a pipe.
PROPERTY-to-STRUCTURE RELATIONSHIPS in POLYMER RHEOLOGY
Shear viscosity-to-structure relationships in polymers. Shear viscosity dependence on temperature and pressure.
POLYMER VISCOELASTICITY
Material's fading memory: ‘functional’ dependence of material's response on stimulus' past history. Behaviour of polymers under ‘simple’ histories of the mechanical stimulus: Energetical consequences of the viscoelastic behaviour.
The theory of linear viscoelasticity. I. Boltzmann’s superposition postulate. The theory of linear viscoelasticity. II. Analogue models.
THERMO- and PIEZO-VISCOELASTICITY
General temperature dependence of viscoelasticity. Linear theory of thermo-viscoelasticity: time-temperature ‘equivalence’. Master curves and shift factor. Arrhenius’ and Williams-Landel-Ferry’s shift factors.Piezo-viscoelasticity: time-pressure ‘equivalence’.
PROPERTY-to-STRUCTURE RELATIONSHIPS in POLYMER VISCOELASTICITY
Thermo-mechanical Spectrometry (time/rate/frequency or temperature scans)
VOLUMETRIC BEHAVIOUR OF POLYMERS
Equation of state (PVT) and deviation from equilibrium: time-dependence of volumetric transformations. Kinetical nature of the glass transition. Doolittle’s experiment and the the concept of ‘free volume’. Derivation of WLF’s shift factor from Doolittle’s equation. Volumetric or ‘dilatational’ viscoelasticity (PVT-t). Effect of ‘dilatational’ viscoelasticity on ‘distorsional’ viscoelasticity.- POLYMER AND COMPOSITES AGEING AND DEGRADATION: chemical and physical mechanisms and their consequences on structure and properties
YIELD AND FRACTURE OF POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES: mechanisms, theories and effects of time-dependent behaviour
PREDICTION OF LIFETIME: accelerated testing, theoretical modeling and case histories
PREVENTIVE MEASURES: additives, coatings, etc.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The evaluation of the student is based on the following methods:

• participation in blended learning activities and learning verification tests
• final written test consisting of both open-ended questions and the resolution of design problems
  The final mark is established on the basis of passing the written test, while the assessment of the learning tests constitutes an increase of that grade in the range from 0 to +2. An elective design activity is also avauilable which can allow for an additional increment of the grade up to +4.

Course notes and other reading material https://beep.metid.polimi.it
H.A.Barnes, Handbook of Elementary Rheology, Editore: Wales Univ. Press, Anno edizione: 2000, ISBN: 0-9538032-0-1
S.Middleman, The Flow of High Polymers, Editore: Interscience, Anno edizione: 1968
D.J.William, Polymer Science and Engineering, Editore: Prentice-Hall, Anno edizione: 1971
N.G. McCrum, C.P. Buckley and C.B. Bucknall, Principles of Polymer Engineering, Editore: Oxford Univ Press, Anno edizione: 1997
H.F.Brinson and L.C.Brinson, Polymer Engineering Science and Viscoelasticity. An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2008
C.W.Macosko, Rheology. Principles, Measurements and Applications, Editore: N.Y. VCH Publ., Anno edizione: 1994
J.D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers (2nd Edition), Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1969

The development of new classes of materials, such as smart materials and metamaterials, offers nowadays completely new possibilities in design and control of components, structures and infrastructures. The objective of this course is to provide an up-to-date basic knowledge about mechanical metamaterials and some smart materials including piezoelectric materials and shape memory alloys. The main contents are as follows.
1. Introduction to mechanical metamaterials and smart materials
2. Wave propagation in homogeneous and periodic materials (Bloch theorem, dispersion diagrams and bandgaps)
3. Equivalent properties and homogenization of phononic crystals and locally resonant materials
4. Metamaterials for vibration insulation: basic principles and applications for earthquake protection of structures and infrastructures and application in industrial engineering
5. Metamaterials with enhanced shock absorption properties: basics and applications to crashworthiness of small cars
6. Modeling and properties of smart materials with particular focus on piezoelectric materials and shape memory alloys
7. Active and reconfigurable meta-structures: applications to wave guides
8. Some notes on quasi-periodic structures and graded metamaterials.
The course will be organized with lessons ex-cathedra on the topics listed above, associated with practical guided activities based on significative examples (Leonardo Campus). Experimental activities will be also scheduled in the laboratory of the Mechanical Engineering Department (Bovisa Campus). Some seminars on specific topics will be also included.
The evaluation will be based on the presentation of a case-study to be developed by the students during the course.

The course aims to introduce basic and advanced concepts necessary for understanding the structure-property correlations of polymeric materials and composites for engineering applications. The analysis is carried out starting from the linear behavior (liquid and solid state) and time dependent (viscoelasticity) and then passing to the durability examination intended as the beginning of irreversible phenomena that lead to the degradation of the structure and performance of materials. They include the yield, fracture and phenomena of change of the chemical structure (eg degradation by exposure to sunlight) and physics of materials.

The student:

• knows and understands the structure-property correlations of polymers and composites and their appropriate use in the design of processes and products for Materials Engineering and Nanotechnologies (DdD1);
• knows how to make choices related to the dimensioning of components and the use of materials in relation to the specific use of the product (DdD1-DdD2);
• autonomously carries out insights on topics related to the course to solve simple design problems (DdD2).
  The project-work also has the objective of stimulating the student's ability to develop autonomous knowledge of the subject, to address and critically discuss problems and situations also other than those faced during the lessons, and to make design choices. These abilities will be taken into account in the final evaluation.

INTRODUCTION
The engineering use of polymeric materials: processing and applications.
Rheological properties and solid state properties.
Limitations of the traditional concept of property (‘single point data’) and advanced (‘integral’) concept.
Constitutive relations and their role in engineering problems.
Intrinsic material properties
Examples of constitutive relations used in polymer rheology and mechanics.
RECALL of basic concepts and definitions in SOLID and FLUID MECHANICS
POLYMER RHEOLOGY
Rheological constitutive equations for polymers: classification. Non-Newtonian shear behaviour of polymeric fluids. Dynamic viscosity. Fluodynamics and the role of rheological costitutive equations in fluodynamical problems. Example: analysis of the flow in a pipe.
PROPERTY-to-STRUCTURE RELATIONSHIPS in POLYMER RHEOLOGY
Shear viscosity-to-structure relationships in polymers. Shear viscosity dependence on temperature and pressure.
POLYMER VISCOELASTICITY
Material's fading memory: ‘functional’ dependence of material's response on stimulus' past history. Behaviour of polymers under ‘simple’ histories of the mechanical stimulus: Energetical consequences of the viscoelastic behaviour.
The theory of linear viscoelasticity. I. Boltzmann’s superposition postulate. The theory of linear viscoelasticity. II. Analogue models.
THERMO- and PIEZO-VISCOELASTICITY
General temperature dependence of viscoelasticity. Linear theory of thermo-viscoelasticity: time-temperature ‘equivalence’. Master curves and shift factor. Arrhenius’ and Williams-Landel-Ferry’s shift factors.Piezo-viscoelasticity: time-pressure ‘equivalence’.
PROPERTY-to-STRUCTURE RELATIONSHIPS in POLYMER VISCOELASTICITY
Thermo-mechanical Spectrometry (time/rate/frequency or temperature scans)
VOLUMETRIC BEHAVIOUR OF POLYMERS
Equation of state (PVT) and deviation from equilibrium: time-dependence of volumetric transformations. Kinetical nature of the glass transition. Doolittle’s experiment and the the concept of ‘free volume’. Derivation of WLF’s shift factor from Doolittle’s equation. Volumetric or ‘dilatational’ viscoelasticity (PVT-t). Effect of ‘dilatational’ viscoelasticity on ‘distorsional’ viscoelasticity.- POLYMER AND COMPOSITES AGEING AND DEGRADATION: chemical and physical mechanisms and their consequences on structure and properties
YIELD AND FRACTURE OF POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES: mechanisms, theories and effects of time-dependent behaviour
PREDICTION OF LIFETIME: accelerated testing, theoretical modeling and case histories
PREVENTIVE MEASURES: additives, coatings, etc.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The evaluation of the student is based on the following methods:

• participation in blended learning activities and learning verification tests
• final written test consisting of both open-ended questions and the resolution of design problems
  The final mark is established on the basis of passing the written test, while the assessment of the learning tests constitutes an increase of that grade in the range from 0 to +2. An elective design activity is also avauilable which can allow for an additional increment of the grade up to +4.

Course notes and other reading material https://beep.metid.polimi.it
H.A.Barnes, Handbook of Elementary Rheology, Editore: Wales Univ. Press, Anno edizione: 2000, ISBN: 0-9538032-0-1
S.Middleman, The Flow of High Polymers, Editore: Interscience, Anno edizione: 1968
D.J.William, Polymer Science and Engineering, Editore: Prentice-Hall, Anno edizione: 1971
N.G. McCrum, C.P. Buckley and C.B. Bucknall, Principles of Polymer Engineering, Editore: Oxford Univ Press, Anno edizione: 1997
H.F.Brinson and L.C.Brinson, Polymer Engineering Science and Viscoelasticity. An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2008
C.W.Macosko, Rheology. Principles, Measurements and Applications, Editore: N.Y. VCH Publ., Anno edizione: 1994
J.D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers (2nd Edition), Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1969

Il corso affronta i fondamentali della teoria della stima, l'elaborazione statistica dei segnali e l'analisi di serie temporali di dati usando un approccio application-driven con esempi pratici da diversi campi dell'ingegneria come sistemi GPS e di navigazione, comunicazioni audio/video e digitali, analisi vibrazionale, e tele-rilevamento. L'obiettivo è quello di acquisire conoscenza sui seguenti-argomenti chiave: l'algebra per l'elaborazione del segnale e teoria della stima, fondamenti della teoria della stima (BLU, MLE, CRB, MMSE, MAP), parameter tracking e filtraggio Kalman, filtraggio adattativo LMS/RLS, analisi spettrale (AR/MA/ ARMA) e metodi ad alta risoluzione per elaborazione di array, detection theory, pattern e feature detection/classification, e metodi di classificazione supervisionati / non supervisionati. Gli esercizi sono su aspetti teorici e casi pratici con l'uso del software Matlab e la simulazione di Montecarlo. Durante il semestre ci sono 3 esercizi interattivi su casi pratici di studenti organizzati in gruppi di lavoro.

Il corso affronta i fondamentali della teoria della stima, l'elaborazione statistica dei segnali e l'analisi di serie temporali di dati usando un approccio application-driven con esempi pratici da diversi campi dell'ingegneria come sistemi GPS e di navigazione, comunicazioni audio/video e digitali, analisi vibrazionale, e tele-rilevamento. L'obiettivo è quello di acquisire conoscenza sui seguenti-argomenti chiave: l'algebra per l'elaborazione del segnale e teoria della stima, fondamenti della teoria della stima (BLU, MLE, CRB, MMSE, MAP), parameter tracking e filtraggio Kalman, filtraggio adattativo LMS/RLS, analisi spettrale (AR/MA/ ARMA) e metodi ad alta risoluzione per elaborazione di array, detection theory, pattern e feature detection/classification, e metodi di classificazione supervisionati / non supervisionati. Gli esercizi sono su aspetti teorici e casi pratici con l'uso del software Matlab e la simulazione di Montecarlo. Durante il semestre ci sono 3 esercizi interattivi su casi pratici di studenti organizzati in gruppi di lavoro.

The goal of the course is to provide students with the ability to design and implement a conventional process flow for the fabrication of simple electronic and spintronic devices. The course covers the fabrication of films and heterostructures using different deposition techniques, as well as device fabrication by conventional and advanced lithography, with reference to examples of scientific or industrial relevance. The lectures are supported by an experimental activity session carried out at the Polifab laboratory of Politecnico di Milano.

DdD1 - Knowledge and understanding
Upon passing the exam, the student will have a basic knowledge of surface thermodynamics and the epitaxy of films and heterostructures. The student will know the physical and technological principles of physical vapor deposition (PVD), chemical vapor deposition (CVD), lithographic and etching techniques, as well as the principles of vacuum technologies. The student will understand the differences among the main deposition, lithography, and etching techniques.
DdD2 - Applying knowledge and understanding
Upon passing the exam, the student will be able to predict the chemical and morphological properties and growth dynamics of a film or heterostructure. They will be able to design a simple vacuum system and a simple lithographic process flow. They will be able to select the most appropriate deposition, lithography, and etching techniques depending on the application.
DdD3 - Making judgements
Upon passing the exam, the student will be able to design and implement the process flow for fabricating simple electronic or spintronic devices.

Part I - Deposition
Introduction: objectives, examples.
Vacuum technology: pressure, gas transport, vacuum systems.
Surface thermodynamics: surface properties, nucleation, and film growth modes.
Film epitaxy: mechanisms and the effect of strain.
Thermal evaporation: vapour pressure, deposition rate, and uniformity; electrical and e-beam evaporation, molecular beam epitaxy, pulsed laser deposition.
Sputtering deposition: plasma physics and basic processes, including DC, RF, reactive and magnetron sputtering.
Chemical Vapor Deposition: physical and technological aspects, with examples of processes
Part II - Lithography
Introduction to lithography: device scaling and Moore’s law.
Optical lithography: process flow and technology.
Physics of optical exposure and resolution enhancement technologies: diffraction, numerical aperture, illuminations, masks, lenses, and resists.
Advanced photolithographic techniques: maskless optical lithography, extreme ultraviolet lithography, and X-ray lithography.
Electron beam lithography: physical principles, process flow, and technology.
Other advanced lithographic techniques: soft and nanoimprint lithography, focused ion beam and scanning probe lithography.
Pattern transfer: dry and wet etching
Examples of lithographic process flows.
Laboratory activities
An experimental activity will be carried out at Polifab, the micro- and nanotechnology centre of Politecnico di Milano. This activity will introduce the student to the design and implementation of a conventional process flow for the fabrication of a simple spintronic device, such as a Hall bar or a GMR sensor, involving some of the deposition and patterning techniques discussed in the course.
Schedule
The course will be held in the second half of the first semester, from November to December.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The final examination will consist of a written test, in English, with exercises and open-ended questions. To pass the exam, students are required to demonstrate knowledge and a deep understanding of the physical and technological topics covered in the course, as well as the ability to think critically and connect the various topics of the course. The final assessment allows the student to demonstrate their ability to:

• design a simple vacuum system
• understand and predict the growth dynamics and the structural/morphological properties of simple films and heterostructures;
• design and discuss a conventional process flow for the fabrication of simple electronic and spin-electronic devices, from heterostructure/film deposition to patterning of the final device
• understand, select, and determine the most common parameters used in standard photolithographic processes;
• understand, select, and determine the most appropriate deposition, lithographic, and etching techniques for device fabrication.

Milton Ohring, Materials Science of Thin Films 2nd Edition, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 978-0125249751
Note: (Part I of the course)
Marc J. Madou, Fundamentals of Microfabrication and Nanotechnology - vol. 2, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-0849331800
Note: (Part II of the course)

Il corso si propone di fornire allo studente la conoscenza di programmazione avanzata in C++ per il calcolo scientifico. Si considereranno: tecniche di programmazione ad oggetti e generica, metaprogrammazione ed expression template, la Standard Library, tecniche di design (design pattern). Si prendono a riferimento tipiche applicazioni al calcolo scientifico. Il corso fornisce inoltre elementi di calcolo parallelo basato su MPI e OpenMP, tecniche di profiling e debugging, librerie statiche e dinamiche. Si illustreranno anche le principali librerie open source per il calcolo scientifico. Durante la lezione si stimolerà la partecipazione degli studenti e si erogheranno dei test "on-the-fly" per verificare il livello di comprensione. Il materiale delle lezioni viene fornito in anticipo.

Il corso si propone di fornire allo studente la conoscenza di programmazione avanzata in C++ per il calcolo scientifico. Si considereranno: tecniche di programmazione ad oggetti e generica, metaprogrammazione ed expression template, la Standard Library, tecniche di design (design pattern). Si prendono a riferimento tipiche applicazioni al calcolo scientifico. Il corso fornisce inoltre elementi di calcolo parallelo basato su MPI e OpenMP, tecniche di profiling e debugging, librerie statiche e dinamiche. Si illustreranno anche le principali librerie open source per il calcolo scientifico. Durante la lezione si stimolerà la partecipazione degli studenti e si erogheranno dei test "on-the-fly" per verificare il livello di comprensione. Il materiale delle lezioni viene fornito in anticipo.

Materials Engineering, Bio-materials, and Nanotechnology products and services, in all their forms, have an enormous impact on both company and country productivity and profitability. Start-up companies try to develop “disruptive” solutions. Large tech companies are consistently seeking “internal incremental” solutions (and acquisitions of start-ups), to improve “top” & “bottom” lines directly, and contribute to the overall economic and social health of G20 countries.
The course is designed to provide any material and biomedical engineer with the context for the business of their science, in which Ideas > Intellectual Property-IP > start-ups > Small- & Medium-sized Entities (SME) > Multi-National Entities (MNE) and established real companies. Or disappear. It will also explain the very different ways in which industrial markets and global markets are “valued” and delivered, and why the best technology doesn’t necessarily win market dominance.
Course Expectations
You’ll have watched the assigned videos, completed the assigned readings, and will be ready to discuss that topic in depth.

The students are expected to develop and acquire abilities to meet all the Descriptors, namely applied to:

• knowledge of the main concepts about the business context, including macro-economic contextual drivers and constraints, and regional and regulatory differences, and how they apply to the business of materials engineering and nanotechnology;
• knowledge and understanding of the main Business, Regulatory, Technological, Economic and Political considerations (DD1);
• knowledge to comprehend materials engineering and nanotechnology’s central role in the advanced materials and technology products value chain to deliver superior healthcare, covering: researchers, material suppliers, manufacturers, OEMs, regulators, certification bodies, investors and end-users, in the appropriate performance of devices (DD1);
• ability to develop, judge and apply business-specific approaches to the conceptualization and development of devices and systems, and know how to evaluate the pros and cons of performance relative to the product, price, place, differentiation (DD2,DD3)
• development of skills to face and communicate/promote innovation in this field of materials engineering and nanotechnology (DD4).

Week 1
An overview of the course, syllabus, outline, grading, expectations and administration.
Intellectual Property Management: Patents, Copyright, Trademarks
Context: SWOT & PESTLE Exercises
Week 2
Idea generation. Osterwalder & Ries
Disruptive vs Incremental Innovation. Christensen & Keeley
Discussion: Chapter 1, Crossing the Chasm
Week 3
Diffusion of Innovation. Rogers
Guest Speaker –Bio-materials start-up Entrepreneur
Discussion: Chapter 2, Crossing the Chasm
Week 4
Guest Speaker -Regulatory Expert
Regulation (REACH, RoHS, Critical Raw Materials Act and CE-related regulations)
Digital vs Real
Discussion: Chapter 3, Crossing the Chasm
Week 5
Funding Innovation. Timmons & Spinelli & Ensign
Govt, Angel, Venture Capital. NEVCA, CVCA
Guest Speaker -Bio-materials MNE Executive
Discussion: Chapter 4, Crossing the Chasm
Week 6
Technology qualification, industrial validation and scale-up.
Discussion: Chapter 5, Crossing the Chasm
Week 7
Project Management.
Discussion: Chapter 6, Crossing the Chasm
Week 8 (May 19 & 20)
Marketing Management. Kotler
Negotiation Prep
Guest Speaker -Marketing Management Discussion: Chapter 7, Crossing the Chasm
Week 9
Product Management. Rogers
Negotiation Exercise
Discussion: Chapter 8, Crossing the Chasm

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The final exam will consist in a written test which, in specific cases, can be followed by an oral exam.
The students will be evaluated based on their ability to answer theoretical questions about the subjects taught during the course and to situate them within a broader context. More specifically, skills in knowledge, understanding, and communication will be evaluated.
An indicative list of assignments, with their percentage in the final score, is provided here.
Assignment - Type - Grade %
Entrepreneurial Self-Assessment - Individual-1 - 10%
Incremental Biomaterials Business Improvements - Individual-2 - 10%
Bio-materials Strategy Case Study Individual-3 - 15%
Negotiations - Team - 10%
Exam - Individual-4 - 55%

Materials will be sourced from, and properly referenced and attributed to the authors for the following materials used in the slides
Eric Ries, The Lean Startup, ISBN: 978-0670921607
Clayton M. Christensen, The Innovator's Dilemma, ISBN: 978-1633691780
Larry Keeley, Ten Types of Innovation, ISBN: 978-1118504246
Everett M. Rogers, Diffusion of Innovations, ISBN: 978-0743222099
Kotler, Marketing management, ISBN: 978-8871927879
Geoffrey A. Moore, Crossing the Chasm, ISBN: 978-0062353948

TECNOLOGIE E MATERIALI AEROSPAZIALI 2 (C)

The course aims at providing students with the critical and conceptual tools to reflect upon
some of the main ethical and social issues raised by the development of Artificial Intelligence
(AI). The course will be articulated in three modules, deeply interconnected to provide students
with a coherent narrative. The course will start with the analysis of the problems related to the
definition of "AI", starting from the first characterizations of AI dating back to the 1950s and
comparing them with the way AI is typically discussed nowadays. In the second module, the
topic of AI-related risk will be expanded so as to include aspects of uncertainty. In the last
module, the ethical framework of Trustworthy AI will be presented as a way to deal with AIrelated uncertainty. After a general presentation of the Trustworthy AI framework, specific
issues in AI ethics will be discussed, also depending on the students' interests.

The aim of the course is to allow the students to gain necessary basic knowledge in order to understand, analyze and solve problems related to electrochemical processes. The participants should also acquire knowledge about the applications of electrochemistry in the fields of electrolytic processes, electrochemical generators, sensors, electrocatalysis, bio-electrochemistry and industrial electrochemistry. Further, the students should gain basic abilities in calculations on electrochemical systems and in experimental methods in electrochemistry. The course is intended for engineering students.

Upon completion of the course, the student will
know the main components of an electrochemical system and how to analyze its performances;
know and understand the relationship between operating parameters and applications of electrochemical systems;
be able to apply the above described knowledge for the purpose of discussing selected electrochemical devices.
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the students with adequate knowledge tools and critical approach for their future activity related to electrochemical processes and devices.

Fundamental concepts: electron transfer and mass transport, property of electrolyte solutions, assessment of cell voltage;
Electrochemical engineering: performances and figures of merit of electrochemical processes, electrolysis parameters and cell design.
Selected aspects of modern applied electrochemistry: electrowinning and refining; chlorine and organic electrosynthesis; water remediation; metal finishing: electroplating and electrophoretic deposition; energy storage devices: batteries and supercapacitors; electrochemical sensors and biosensors; photoelectrochemistry of semiconductors; corrosion of coated systems.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will be an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner so that different parts of the course syllabus are involved.
The student must be also able to clearly describe and critically discuss selected electrochemical devices, highlighting the assumptions, critical points and industrial processing.

V. S. Bagotsky, Fundamentals of Electrochemistry, Second Edition, Editore: ohn Wiley & Sons, Inc., Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 9780471700586
Pletcher, D., Walsh, F.C., Industrial Electrochemistry, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 1993, ISBN: 978-0-7514-0148-6

Goals
The objective of the course is to present to the students, approaching the end of their M.Sc. educational carrier, an overview of the field of biochips and analytical lab-on-chip microsystems (whose recent advances are relevant both from the scientific and industrial point of view) with specific insights on the technological aspects of the interface between (micro)electronics and electrochemistry and biology, both at cellular and molecular levels. The content of the course reflects the multidisciplinarity of the nano-bio-tech field and is mainly focused on the different manipulation and detection approaches of biochemical target analytes on chip. The main goal is to provide the students with the fundamental theoretical tools for the design of active microfluidic systems (basics of fluid dynamics at the microscale), and of the engineering of the detection systems (optical and electrochemical transducers). At the same time, several practical examples are discussed in order to illustrate design choices and trade-offs. Starting from 2020, a part of the course will be taught by means of innovative learning techniques. The topics of microfabrication (hard and soft-lithography) will be addressed by means of MOOC videos recorded in actual clean-rooms and fabrication facilities. Finally, a "blended" and "flipped-classroom" approach will be adopted in the last part of the course including a project-based and a laboratory activities where student will fabricate real devices and boards: at first they will be grouped into small teams (3-4 persons max.), will design at home the layout of the microchannels and electrodes on a PCB including a transimpedance amplifiers, according to some design challenges posed by the teacher, and then will fabricate them in the lab with 3D printing and soft-lithography (PDMS elastomer by means of replica molding). A characterization with fluids, electrolytes. digital microscopes, pumps and virtual instrumentation (oscilloscope, network analyzer used for impedance measurements) will conclude this experimental activity. Prior to fabrication of the PCB, each team will present their design in the class and feedback from a general discussion will be collected.

Expected Learning Outcomes
Knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor #1)
At the end of the course the students are expected to:
· possess a good understanding of lab-on-chip systems (needs, applications, advantages and limits) and bio-electronics convergence
· possess a basic knowledge of hard and soft lithographic microfabrication approaches
· possess a basic knowledge of the laws describing the flow of liquid in microchannels and the forces to actuate particles in liquid
· presses a good knowledge of the electrochemical interface and instrumentation for biosensing
· possess a good knowledge of the DNA macromolecule and the instrumentation for its analysis
· understand the potentials and challenges of CMOS/biochips integration
Applying knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor #2)
At the end of the course the students are expected to:
· be able to analyze and design a microfluidic system in laminar regime (fluidic sizing, choice of components such as pumps/valves), starting from the sample preparation and manipulation
· be able to design an analytical assay (for instance for molecular recognition or DNA analysis)
· be able to design integrated detectors (both optical and electrochemical)
· be able to design current and impedance sensing circuits for biochips
Making judgements (Dublin Descriptor #3)
Students will be able to:
· evaluate the most appropriate approach (materials, fabrication) to address an analytical need
· apply the knowledge to different application areas
· apply the knowledge to design a novel micro-device
Communication (Dublin Descriptor #4)
During the work in teams for the experimental laboratory, students will be able to communicate among each other (in the first phase at home, when the microfluidic channels are designed upon technological specifications set in the classroom). Then, during the lab. and the oral exam their communication skills are deployed to motivate their design choices and comment the experimental results.

Topics
The course is articulated in theoretical lessons, combined with quantitative exercises and with case studies oriented to the analysis and design of microsystems. An experimental laboratory consisting of: a design phase at home in teams with a propor design software and two days of experimental activity in the lab. (fabrication and characterization of a PDMS microfluidic device). Experts in the biochip field are also invited during the course to lecture seminars on specific topics, such as micromagnetism and DNA analysis, or to present the point of view of companies carrying on R&D in the biochip field (STMicroelectronics, Flextronics, Dianax etc…). A visit to the renewed clean-room and microfabrication facility of Politecnico di Milano (PoliFab) concludes the course.
1. Introduction to biochips: architecture of lab-a-chip micro-analytical systems, motivations and impact, design paradigms, market projections, basic biological macromolecules used for as receptors in affinity biosensors.
2. Introduction to microfluidics: fluid dynamics, Reynolds number, electrical equivalent of hydraulic circuits (fluidic capacitance) and electro-osmotic flow. Actuation forces for particle manipulation within biochips: diffusion, electrophoresis, dielectrophoresis, electrowetting and droplet-based digital microfluidics. Active and passive microfluidic components: valves, mixers and pumps.
3. Introduction to microfabrication: review of Silicon CMOS-MEMS processes, lithography, thin film deposition and patterning, as compared to elastomer (PDMS) and plastic based soft lithography (replica molding).
4. Optical detection: fluorescence (strengths and limitations, Atomic Force Microscopy ), source-filter-detector architectures, integrated photonics for biosensing based on evanescent field (waveguides, Mach-Zehnder interferometers, ring resonators and contactless light monitors). Electrochemical detection: the electrochemical interface with physiological ionic solutions (charge transfer and induction).
5. Electrochemical instrumentation: analytical techniques (cyclic voltammetry, amperometry and impedance spectroscopy) and the potentiostatic workstations. Micro and nano-scale electrochemistry: effects of electrode scaling.
6. Low-noise current measurements: review of noise in electronic devices, the transimpedance amplifier (working principle, properties and limitations) and advanced circuit topologies (integrator-differentiator schemes with different CMOS-compatible bias resetting solutions).
7. Impedance measurements and instrumentation, comparison of sensing configurations: bridge, ratiometric, current sensing, lock-in detection, resonant circuits, FFT-based and time-domain approaches.
8. Detection of DNA: structure and properties, microarrays (spotting and probe synthesis), electrophoresis, amplification with Polymerase Chain Reaction and quantitative detection with real-time PCR and approaches for sequencing.
9. Biochips for molecular detection: resonating cantilevers for molecular weighing, amperometric detection of neurotransmitters, redox cycling, glucose sensors based on enzymatic mediators, and nanopores. Biochips for cellular detection: interface with electrogenic cells, equivalent model of passive cells, label-free impedance monitoring a cell colony dynamics and single cell counting and sizing with microfluidic impedance flow cytometry (design case study).
10. Sample preparation (cell lysis, sample mixing, concentration and purification). Microelectronics CMOS biochips: state of the art performance in CMOS detection, design criteria, advantages and limits, the critical role of the substrate, packaging and interfacing issues.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente) o condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Assessment
Exams are held at the end of the course (no intermediate tests). The exam consists of a written test (of a duration of 2 hours) followed by an oral exam. The written test (assessing Dublin Descriptors 1 and 2) encompasses the solution of numerical exercises focusing on 2 types. The first type concerns the microfabrication and the fluidics (and components) of micro-channels and devices. The second type mostly focuses on electrochemical detection. The students will be asked to analyze circuits and systems, as well as to design them. The maximum evaluation of the written test is 30. Two bonus points are added for those who attended the laboratory activity.
The outcome of the written tests is communicated to the students by email. Then, a meeting in the classroom is scheduled for the students to vision and discuss the correction of the written test. They can accept or refuse the evaluation, either by email or in-person communication. They can undertake the oral test in the following days, by agreeing a calendar with the teacher.
The oral discussion (assessing Dublin Descriptors 1,2,3,4) is mandatory for students achieving top marks in the ranking (> 27/30) in the written test and it is optional and open for all students with a mark above 17/30 in the written test. In the oral test (lasting 15 to 40 minutes) students will be asked discuss the ultimate limits of the different technologies, pros and cons, compare them, and to design complete systems to address novel design cases proposed during the oral exam. The maximum evaluation is 30 cum laude.

Patrick Tabeling, Introduction to Microfluidics, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 9780199588169
Eugenio Iannone, Labs on Chip: Principles, Design and Technology, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-1466560727
Albert Folch, Hidden in Plain Sight: The History, Science, and Engineering of Microfluidic Technology, Anno edizione: 2022

Obiettivi dell'insegnamento
L’insegnamento integrato di Biomateriali ha l’obiettivo di fornire agli studenti gli strumenti per analizzare criticamente la selezione, il comportamento e la progettazione dei biomateriali impiegati nella realizzazione di dispositivi medici per applicazioni a contatto con tessuti duri e molli. Partendo da casi clinici e applicativi, l’insegnamento guida gli studenti nel collegare i requisiti funzionali e biologici dei dispositivi alle proprietà dei materiali, alla loro struttura e storia di processo, ai fenomeni di degradazione nell’ambiente fisiologico e alle interazioni tra materiale e organismo. Il percorso didattico è organizzato secondo una struttura comune ai due moduli, articolata in quattro blocchi tematici: i) relazione tra struttura e proprietà dei materiali, ii) effetti dell’ambiente fisiologico sui materiali, iii) risposta biologica e integrazione, iv) strategie ingegneristiche e tecnologie di fabbricazione per controllare proprietà, degradazione e risposta dell’organismo. Il modulo modulo Biomateriali [2] è dedicato prevalentemente ai biomateriali polimerici e ai dispositivi per applicazioni a contatto con tessuti molli, con particolare riferimento agli ambiti cardiovascolare, oftalmologico, della chirurgia ricostruttiva e del wound healing. L’insegnamento mira a sviluppare la capacità di interpretare criticamente dati sperimentali e letteratura scientifica del settore, confrontare soluzioni alternative e formulare scelte motivate di materiali, processi, trattamenti e metodi di caratterizzazione in relazione a specifici problemi applicativi.
Learning Objectives
The integrated Biomaterials course aims to provide students with the knowledge and analytical tools required to critically evaluate the selection, performance, and design of biomaterials used in the development of medical devices intended for applications involving contact with hard and soft tissues. Drawing on application-oriented case studies, the course guides students in establishing connections between the functional and biological requirements of medical devices and the properties of biomaterials, their structure and processing history, degradation phenomena occurring in the physiological environment, and the interactions between materials and the host. The course is organized around a common framework shared by both modules and structured into four thematic blocks: i) the relationship between material structure and properties ii) the effects of the physiological environment on materials iii)biological response and tissue integration iv) engineering strategies and manufacturing technologies for controlling material properties, degradation, and the biological response. Biomaterials [2] is primarily devoted to biomaterials and medical devices for applications involving soft tissues, with particular emphasis on the cardiovascular, ophthalmic, reconstructive surgery, and wound care fields. The course aims to develop students ability to critically interpret experimental data and relevant scientific literature, compare alternative solutions, and make well-reasoned decisions regarding the selection of materials, manufacturing processes, surface treatments, and characterization methods in relation to specific biomedical applications.

Risultati di apprendimento attesi
A seguito del superamento dell’esame, lo studente:
conosce e comprende le principali classi di biomateriali impiegate in dispositivi per applicazioni a contatto con tessuti molli ed è in grado di spiegare come composizione, struttura, processo produttivo e ambiente fisiologico ne determinino proprietà, degradazione, risposta biologica e prestazioni; (DD1)
è in grado di analizzare specifici problemi applicativi, individuando i requisiti clinici, meccanici e biologici rilevanti e correlando tali requisiti alla selezione dei materiali, ai processi di fabbricazione, ai metodi di caratterizzazione e alle strategie utilizzate per controllare degradazione e interazione con l’organismo; (DD2)
è in grado di interpretare criticamente dati sperimentali e letteratura scientifica, formulare conclusioni proporzionate alle evidenze disponibili e sviluppare, individualmente o in gruppo, proposte motivate per problemi applicativi nel settore dei biomateriali, selezionando le informazioni rilevanti, organizzando risorse e tempi e comunicando in modo chiaro ed efficace il razionale, i vantaggi e i limiti delle soluzioni considerate. (DD2–DD3–DD4–DD5)
Expected learning outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will:
know and understand the main classes of biomaterials used in devices for soft-tissue applications and explain how composition, structure, manufacturing processes and the physiological environment determine their properties, degradation, biological response and performance; (DD1)
be able to analyse specific application problems by identifying the relevant clinical, mechanical and biological requirements and relating them to material selection, manufacturing processes, characterization methods and the strategies used to control degradation and host interaction; (DD2)
be able to critically interpret experimental data and scientific literature, draw conclusions proportionate to the available evidence, and develop, individually or in groups, justified proposals for application problems in the biomaterials field, selecting relevant information, organizing resources and time, and clearly and effectively communicating the rationale, advantages and limitations of the considered solutions. (DD2–DD3–DD4–DD5)

Argomenti trattati
Progettazione di polimeri stabili nell' ambiente biologico: evoluzione, composizione, caratterizzazione. Polimeri biodegradabili di sintesi: composizione, lavorazione, sterilizzazione e meccanismi di degradazione. Caratterizzazione della degradazione in vitro e in vivo. Studio delle proprietà dinamico-meccaniche dei biomateriali polimerici. Caratterizzazione reologica. Tecniche di caratterizzazione di superficie. Soluzioni bioispirate e applicazione di smart materials per dispositivi impiantabili.
Le nozioni teoriche saranno sempre applicate a diversi casi studio e casi applicativi relativi a materiali impiantabili a contatto con tessuti molli (in particolare in chirurgia cardiovascolare, oftalmologica, ricostruttiva e wound healing) che consentano di apprezzare vantaggi e limiti delle diverse strategie progettuali, nonchè delle potenzialità e delle limitazioni delle tecniche di caratterizzazione dei materiali e dell'interazione con l'ospite.
Sono anche previsti alcuni seminari per approfondire, grazie al contributo di ospiti esperti, alcune delle tematiche affrontate durante le lezioni.
Course Content
Design of polymers stable in the biological environment: evolution, composition, and characterization. Synthetic biodegradable polymers: composition, processing, sterilization, and degradation mechanisms. Techniques for the characterization of in vitro and in vivo degradation. Dynamic mechanical properties of polymeric biomaterials. Rheological characterization. Surface characterization techniques. Bioinspired approaches and application of smart materials for implantable medical devices.
The theoretical concepts will be applied to a range of case studies and practical applications involving implantable materials in contact with soft tissues, particularly in cardiovascular, ophthalmic, and reconstructive surgery, as well as wound healing. These case studies are intended to illustrate the advantages and limitations of different design strategies, as well as the strengths and constraints of material characterization techniques and the assessment of host–material interactions.
The course also includes a number of seminars delivered by invited experts, providing students with the opportunity to explore selected topics covered during the lectures in greater depth.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Modalità di valutazione
La valutazione dell’insegnamento prevede il superamento di una prova scritta obbligatoria per ciascuno dei due moduli, secondo le modalità illustrate all’inizio del corso. Di norma, non è prevista una prova orale.
Le prove scritte comprendono quesiti a risposta multipla e domande aperte, finalizzati ad accertare la conoscenza e la comprensione degli argomenti trattati, nonché la capacità di applicare le conoscenze acquisite alla risoluzione di problemi specifici, interpretare criticamente dati sperimentali e formulare conclusioni motivate.
Gli studenti possono inoltre partecipare ad attività di gruppo facoltative, comuni ai due moduli, dedicate all’analisi critica della letteratura scientifica e di casi studio. Tali attività richiedono di reperire e selezionare informazioni da fonti scientifiche pertinenti, organizzare il lavoro di gruppo e le risorse disponibili, rispettare le scadenze previste, predisporre una presentazione ed esporla nella data concordata, comunicando in modo chiaro, efficace e rigoroso gli aspetti più rilevanti. Le presentazioni sono seguite da una discussione e da un commento da parte del docente. La valutazione di queste attività facoltative può concorrere alla determinazione del voto finale, secondo i criteri illustrati all’inizio del corso e indicate nel materiale didattico fornito.
Assessment Methods
Assessment for this course consists of a compulsory written examination for each module, according to the procedures communicated at the beginning of the course. An oral examination is not normally required.
Each written examination includes multiple-choice questions and open-ended questions designed to assess student knowledge and understanding of the course contents, as well as their ability to apply acquired knowledge to specific problems, critically interpret experimental data, and draw well-supported conclusions.
Students may also participate in optional group activities shared by both modules, focusing on the critical analysis of scientific literature and case studies. These activities require students to identify and select relevant information from appropriate scientific sources, organize group work and available resources, meet assigned deadlines, and deliver an oral presentation on an agreed date while communicating the key findings clearly, effectively, and rigorously.
Each presentation is followed by a discussion and a feedback from teachers. The assessment of these complementary activities may contribute to the final course grade, according to the criteria communicated at the beginning of the course and described in the uploaded materials.

Understand the property-composition relationships of functional ceramic materials.
Select and apply scientific and technological production tools to manufacture final ceramic products.
Design ceramic materials and processing routes for specialized applications.

CORE LECTURES (General Topics): Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
Market Awareness: Gain awareness of the global market for functional ceramics.
Synthesis Technologies: Understand and discuss the various production technologies for ceramic powder synthesis.
Thermal Treatments: Analyse and evaluate different thermal treatment technologies.
Forming Processes: Examine and compare various forming processes.
Property Selection: Analyse final properties and select the appropriate technology to achieve them.
Equipment Identification: Identify and select the equipment used in the different unit operations of the production process.
INTERACTIVE LECTURES (Material Case Studies): Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2) & Making judgements (DdD3)
Critical Application: Critically discuss, select, and apply the fundamentals learned during core lectures to real-world case studies.
PRACTICAL LABORATORY ACTIVITY: Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
Hands-on Application: Directly apply the fundamental principles acquired during lectures.
STUDENT TEAMWORK & SEMINAR FORMAT: Making judgements (DdD3) & Communication skills (DdD4):
Information Synthesis: Critically research and synthesize concepts and information from sources beyond the course materials.
Logical Presentation: Logically structure, communicate, and present their findings.
AUTONOMUS STUDY & CONTINUOUS LEARNING: Learning skills (DdD5)
Self-Directed Learning: Develop autonomous learning habits necessary to keep up with future advancements in ceramic production technologies.
Literature Navigation: Build the capacity to locate, digest, and utilize technical literature, patents, and standards independently.

This course explores the fundamentals, unit operations, processing routes, and equipment used in the industrial-scale production of ceramic powders and materials. In detail, following a brief introduction to ceramic materials (history, global market, and future perspectives), the course will cover the following products and processes:
PART 1: Production Routes, Unit Operations, and Equipment
Solid-State Reactions: fundamental principles and related unit operations.
Precipitation and Co-Precipitation: fundamental principles and related unit operations.
Colloids and Sol-Gel Methods: fundamental principles and related unit operations.
PART 2: Forming Process and Characterization Techniques for Ceramics
Fundamentals of Key Characterization Techniques: XRD, FTIR, TG-DTG, and morphological analysis.
Laboratory and Practical Sessions (MANDATORY attendance): Hands-on laboratory activity focusing on the synthesis and characterization of a selected ceramic material.
Examples of advanced ceramic materials

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The final assessment for this course consists of two MANDATORY components: a Written Exam (70%) and a Group Presentation (30%).
WRITTEN EXAM OPTIONS (70% of Final Grade)
Students can choose one of the following two pathways to complete the written requirement:
OPTION A: Continuous Evaluation
Structure: Two partial written tests held at the end of Part 1 and Part 2.
Format: Open-ended questions verifying knowledge acquired during lectures.
Grading: The final score of the written exam is the arithmetic average of both tests.
Requirement: Students must complete both partial tests to pass via this route.
OPTION B: Full Exam
Structure: A single, comprehensive written test covering all course topics.
Timeline: Available during the standard exam sessions at the end of the course.
GRUP PRESENTATION (30% of Final Grade)
At the end of the course, students must deliver a MANDATORY group presentation in a seminar format.
Content: Discussion of experimental results from the mandatory laboratory activity, including the characterization of the synthesized material.
Preparation: Developed independently by the students under the continuous guidance and review of the professors.
EVALUATION CRITERIA - The exam is structured to assess the following student competencies:
Problem-solving: Ability to correctly frame ceramic production problems and identify the most suitable solution.
Argumentation: Ability to justify one's choices with a well-articulated, structured discourse supported by acquired knowledge.
Technical language: Mastery of specific terminology and the proper use of language typical of ceramic production.

Slides of the lectures, lecture recordings, supporting materials WeBeeP
C. B. Carter and M. G. Norton, Ceramic Materials: Science and Engineering, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007
P. Boch and J.C. Nièpce, Ceramic Materials: Process Properties and Applications, Editore: ISTE, Anno edizione: 2007

The course will focus on the relations between the physical-chemical properties of materials involved in alternative energy systems and their macroscopic behaviour. In particular, electrochemical devices for the storage and electricity generation with low environmental impacts will be illustrated. Materials and devices for harnessing solar energy and for clean fuels production will be also described.

When the student has successfully passed the exam, he/she has a good knowledge of and is able to discuss the following topics (DdD1):

• alternative systems of energy generation and storage (i.e. fuel cells, rechargeable batteries and capacitors);
• common and innovative materials for energy applications;
• fundamentals properties of the main classes of materials involved in energy systems;
• relations existing between microscopic physical-chemical features of a material and its macroscopic properties and functions;
• dielectric materials for energy harvesting;
• renewable and sustainable ways to produce energy.
  A consistent part of the course will be devoted to solve numerical and practical problems related to materials properties and devices which they are assembled in; then the student will be able to solve specific problems, and to select the optimal materials for any case (DdD2,3).
  A project on a specific case study will be discussed with the teacher (DdD4,5).

The course deals with properties of materials for energy; it will concern different technologies for alternative energy production, for transportation and storage, as well as related kinetic and thermodynamic aspects. In detail, the following topics will be considered:

• materials for electrochemical devices for energy production and storage;
• hydrogen economy: production, storage and use;
• alternative electrochemical energy generators: low- and high-temperature fuel cells;
• materials for storage devices: rechargeable batteries and capacacitors;
• photovoltaic devices: inorganic semiconductors and photo-electrochemistry;
• piezoelectricity and ferroelectricity: application in energy harvesting.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Written exam (2 h) with questions about theory and numerical exercises.

Frano Barbir, PEM fuel cells: theory and practice, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-0-12-387710-9
Ginley D. S. and Cahen D., Fundamentals of Materials for Energy and Environmental Sustainability, Editore: Ginley D. S. and Cahen D., Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-1-107-00023-0

L’insegnamento contribuisce alla comprensione dei principi scientifici e ingegneristici della chimica del fluoro e dei materiali fluorurati e della loro applicazione nelle principali tecnologie industriali. In particolare, fornisce gli strumenti per comprendere le relazioni tra struttura molecolare, proprietà e prestazioni dei composti fluorurati, nonché i principali processi utilizzati per la loro sintesi e trasformazione. Il corso adotta inoltre metodologie didattiche e di valutazione innovative.
This course contributes to the understanding of the scientific and engineering principles of fluorine chemistry and fluorinated materials and their application in the main industrial technologies. In particular, it provides the tools required to understand the relationships between molecular structure, properties and performance of fluorinated compounds, as well as the main processes used for their synthesis and transformation. The course also adopts innovative teaching and assessment methods.

A seguito del superamento dell’esame, lo studente:
conosce i principi fondamentali della chimica del fluoro, le relazioni tra struttura e proprietà dei composti e dei materiali fluorurati, nonché i principali processi industriali impiegati per la loro sintesi, trasformazione e applicazione;
è in grado di analizzare le proprietà e le applicazioni tecnologiche di molecole e materiali fluorurati, interpretare criticamente informazioni tecnico-scientifiche del settore e applicare le conoscenze acquisite alla risoluzione di problemi specifici, formulando valutazioni tecnicamente motivate e comunicandole in modo chiaro ed efficace.
After successfully completing the course, the student:
understands the fundamental principles of fluorine chemistry, the relationships between structure and properties of fluorinated compounds and materials, and the main industrial processes used for their synthesis, transformation and application;
is able to analyze the properties and technological applications of fluorinated molecules and materials, critically evaluate scientific and technical information in the field, and apply the acquired knowledge to the solution of specific problems, formulating technically sound judgments and communicating them clearly and effectively.

Argomenti trattati
Introduzione alla chimica del fluoro. Proprietà atomiche e chimico-fisiche del fluoro e confronto con gli altri alogeni. Effetti della fluorurazione sulle proprietà di molecole e materiali.
Chimica industriale del fluoro. Produzione industriale dell’acido fluoridrico (HF) e del fluoro elementare (F2). Principali processi di fluorurazione e sintesi di composti organofluorurati.
Relazioni struttura–proprietà nei composti fluorurati. Effetti elettronici e sterici del fluoro, stabilità dei legami, interazioni intermolecolari e proprietà chimico-fisiche dei composti fluorurati.
Monomeri fluorurati e fluoropolimeri. Sintesi e proprietà dei principali monomeri fluorurati e dei fluoropolimeri industriali, tra cui PTFE, PCTFE, ETFE, ECTFE, PFPE e ionomeri fluorurati.
Tecnologia e applicazioni dei materiali fluorurati. Proprietà termiche, chimiche, meccaniche e superficiali dei fluoropolimeri. Tecnologie di trasformazione e principali applicazioni industriali nei settori dei materiali avanzati, dell’energia, dell’elettronica e dell’ingegneria chimica.
Attività progettuale. Analisi della letteratura scientifica e tecnologica, individuazione di un tema di ricerca nel settore della chimica del fluoro o dei materiali fluorurati e sviluppo di un progetto.
Subjects
Introduction to fluorine chemistry. Atomic, chemical and physical properties of fluorine and comparison with the other halogens. Effects of fluorination on the properties of molecules and materials.
Industrial fluorine chemistry. Industrial production of hydrofluoric acid (HF) and elemental fluorine (F2). Main fluorination processes and synthesis routes for organofluorine compounds.
Structure–property relationships in fluorinated compounds. Electronic and steric effects of fluorine, bond stability, intermolecular interactions, and physicochemical properties of fluorinated compounds.
Fluorinated monomers and fluoropolymers. Synthesis and properties of the main fluorinated monomers and industrial fluoropolymers, including PTFE, PCTFE, ETFE, ECTFE, PFPEs and fluorinated ionomers.
Technology and applications of fluorinated materials. Thermal, chemical, mechanical and surface properties of fluoropolymers. Processing technologies and major industrial applications in advanced materials, energy, electronics and chemical engineering.
Project activity. Analysis of scientific and technological literature, identification of a research topic in fluorine chemistry or fluorinated materials, and development of a project proposal.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Modalità di valutazione
La valutazione si articola in quattro fasi:
1) Lo studente individua, in accordo con il docente, uno specifico tema applicativo nell’ambito della chimica del fluoro o dei materiali fluorurati.
2) Lo studente svolge un’attività di ricerca bibliografica utilizzando la letteratura scientifica e tecnica di riferimento, integrando le informazioni raccolte con i contenuti sviluppati durante il corso e predisponendo una presentazione sul tema scelto.
3) Lo studente presenta il lavoro al docente, che fornisce indicazioni per eventuali correzioni, approfondimenti e miglioramenti.
4) Lo studente espone il lavoro finale alla classe. Gli altri studenti sono tenuti a partecipare attivamente alla discussione formulando domande e osservazioni. Il docente valuta la qualità della presentazione, la capacità di analisi critica della letteratura, la padronanza degli argomenti trattati e la conoscenza dei concetti collegati all’intero programma del corso.
Le migliori presentazioni potranno essere rese disponibili agli studenti attraverso la piattaforma didattica del corso e utilizzate come materiale di approfondimento per le future edizioni dell’insegnamento.
Evaluation Method
Assessment is organized into four stages:
1) Each student selects, in agreement with the instructor, a specific application topic related to fluorine chemistry or fluorinated materials.
2) The student performs a literature review based on scientific and technical sources, integrates the collected information with the concepts presented during the course, and prepares a presentation on the selected topic.
3) The student presents the preliminary work to the instructor, who provides feedback and recommendations for improvements, corrections and further development.
4) The student delivers the final presentation to the class. All students are expected to actively participate in the discussion by asking questions and providing comments. The instructor evaluates the quality of the presentation, the ability to critically analyze scientific literature, the understanding of the selected topic, and the knowledge of the broader concepts covered by the course.
The best presentations may be made available through the course teaching platform and used as supporting material for future editions of the course.

[2016-17] - REACTIVITY, STRUCTURE AND FUNCTIONS OF FLUORINATED MATERIALS corso attivo in Beep con materiale didattico disponibile.
Richard D. Chambers, Fluorite in Organic Chemistry, Editore: Blackwell publishing, Anno edizione: 2004
Peer Kirsch Copyright c 2004 WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co. KGaA, Weinheim, Modern Fluoroorganic Chemistry., Anno edizione: 2004
Fluoro Polymer 2 Properties, Editore: Kluwer Academic Publishers New York, Boston, Dordrecht, London, Moscow, Anno edizione: 2002 http://www.kluweronline.com
Note: Material Properties of Fluoropolymers and Perfluoroalkyl-Based Polymers
RICHARD R. THOMAS in Fluoro Polymer 2 Properties (Chapter 4)
Jiri George Drobny, Technology of Fluoropolymers Second Edition, Anno edizione: 2008

The course aims at guiding the learner on the theme of Circular Economy through a deliberate alternation of practical cases and application examples to a more theoretical view of the phenomenon. The core of the course is the design and evaluation of business models, either of established companies willing to embrace the new paradigm or of start-ups and new ventures born on a Circular Economy idea.
Particular attention will be paid to the pervasiveness of the paradigm, with examples and good practices relating to several business sectors.

Students will learn: (i) the core meaning of Circular Economy in business environment, being able to properly recognize and distinguishing circular business models from "green", "esg" or "sustainable" business models; (ii) the tools and frameworks to design and evaluate a circular business model, in different industries; (iii) the tools and frameworks to analyse the context and the ecosystem around a circular business model, with particular reference to the role of regulations and of digital technologies in enabling circularity.
Morevoer, students will be engaged in lively debates with entrepreneurs and managers in the field of Circular Economy, thus allowing also a deeper understanding of the enablers and barriers to the diffusion of the new paradigm.

The top 12 core topics of the course can be summarized as follows:
1. The Genesis of the Circular Economy concept, the main differences between Circular Economy and Linear Economy. Circular Economy and Sustainability
2. The basic frameworks for understanding Circular Economy: the butterfly model and the RESOLVE model
3. The CE Matrix (Upstream-Downstream-Full Circular) and the classification of Circular Economy business models.
4. Cases of adoption of Circular Economy in established companies and in start-ups
5. The “Circular” Business Model Canvas: designing a successful transition towards Circular Economy
6. Circular Business Models and Circular Supply Chain: Connecting Eco-Systems for Circular Economy
7. Measuring Circular Economy: methods and tools for assessing circularity
8. The enabling role of IT & IoT in the transition towards Circular Economy
9. The "platform" business models in the Circular Economy
10. Financing Circular Economy
11. The role of Policies in Circular Economy
12. Circular Cities: adopting a broader perspective for the diffusion of the Circular Economy paradigm
The course is intented to be based on lively discussions and participated classes. In-course team works will be required.
Teaching material consists in slides (ppt format) and case studies. Further references to complementary material (books, articles extracted from scientific journals, reports by research centers, other readings) will be provided during the classes.
Additional materials can be found at the Ellen Macarthur Foundation Learning Hub ( https://www.ellenmacarthurfoundation.org/explore )

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The course will be assessed with: (i) a written exam with open-ended questions and case-based questions, covering all the topics of the course; (ii) an oral exam, evaluating the understanding of the concepts and the ability to sustain a business discussion on Circular Economy.
The written exam will count for 50% of the total grade. It will be assessed on a scale up to 30/30. In order to be ammitted to the oral exam, students will have to pass the written exam with a minimum grade of 18/30.
The oral exam will count for 50% of the total grade. It will be assessed on a scale up to 30/30. It has to be sustained in the same call of the written exam. Students who fail the oral exam (grade below 18/30) or refuse the grade will have to retake the entire exam.
Cum Laude grade is assigned to those students who show a brilliant and well above average ability to sustain a discussion on the core topics of Circular Economy.

Davide Chiaroni, L'Impresa Circolare, Editore: EGEA, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 978-88-238-3763-8

The course provides the theoretical tools and practical methods that are needed for the basic design of structural elements made of composites materials, both from the structural and manufacturing point of view. The course will discuss the peculiar mechanical properties of composite materials and how these are influenced by the microscopic material structure. It will provide insight on how the strengths and weaknesses of composite materials should be exploited or dealt with during the design of structural elements. In addition, the students will be able to manage theoretical and pratical design tools to strengthen existing structural elements with composite materials.
Case studies dealing with the design and strengthening of simple structural elements will be also presented.

The course will allow students to:
Understand the mechanical and physical properties of composite materials (DdD1);
Define the layout of the composite material to meet specific performance demands (DdD2);
Understand the stress-transfer mechanism within the composite material and between a structural element and the composite material bonded to it (DdD1).
Manage different design guidelines to strengthen existing structural elements (DdD2).
The project laboratory will allow students to:
Exploit the advantages of composite materials and provide proper solution to manage their weaknesses (DdD1 - DdD2);
Design simple structural elements using composite materials (DdD2);
Design strengthening solutions of existing structural elements using composite materials (DdD2).

Composition, microstructure and properties of the main types of fibers and matrices used for the manufacture of composite materials
Manufacturing techniques for composite materials and structures
Experimental characterization of the properties of composite materials with reference to current standards
Elastic properties of composite materials
Composites plate mechanics (Classical Lamination Theory) and its applications
Failure criteria for composite materials and laminates
Examples of applications of composite materials in the various fields of structural engineering
Applications of the finite element method to composite structures: outlines
Bond behavior of composite material applied to existing structures
Bending and shear strengthening of existing structural elements with composite materials
Confinement of existing structural elements with composite materials

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Evaluation is based on the homeworks assigned during the course and on a final project. The final project will involve either the design of a simple composite structure decided by the students or the design of a strengthening solution of an existing structural element using composite materials.
The students will be required to produce a report of the homeworks and of the final project to show that they are able to design a lamination sequence optimal with respect to the stated design goals.
The project will be presented during an oral examination; the project should demonstrate that the student understands and is able to manage the course topics. The oral examintaion will be based on a discussion of the final project; however, questions on all the course topics may be asked.

Barbero, E.J., Introduction to Composite Materials Design, Editore: Taylor & Francis Group, ISBN: 9781420079159
V.V. Vasilev, E. V. Morozov, Mechanics and Analysis of composite materials, Editore: Elsevier, ISBN: 978-0-08-098231-1
J.N. Reddy, Mechanics of Laminated Composite Plates and Shells: Theory and Analysis, Editore: Taylor & Francis, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 9780849315923

The aim of the course is to provide the basic concepts of nonlinear mechanics to approach the modeling of materials at small length scales, even in multi-physics environments.
The main topics that will be illustrated in the lectures are:
Numerical methods, with particular reference to the finite element method for nonlinear problems.
Constitutive modeling of materials with examples for metals and metal alloys, polymers, ceramics, and composite materials. Constitutive formulation for elastic-plastic material response, brittle and ductile damaging, cohesive laws for fracture phenomena.
Nonlocal approaches to plasticity and damage mechanics.
Part of the lectures will be devoted to explaining how deep learning can be exploited, e.g. to understand the links between the microstructure and the material behavior.

Lectures and hands-on sessions will allow students to:
Analyze and understand the role of nonlinearities in a continuum mechanics frame. (DdD1)
Understand the assumptions and requirements associated with the development of a finite element code. (DdD1)
Define the proper strategy to solve the problem, either in statics or dynamics. (DdD2)
Set the proper identification and validation activities/benchmarks, needed to ascertain the correctness of the mathematical frame and of its implementation. (DdD2)
Workshops will allow the students to understand how artificial intelligence tools like machine learning and deep learning can be used in order to learn the overall effects of the microstructure on the statistics of the response of the materials.

In details, the following topics will be introduced:
Nonlinear continuum mechanics: analysis of motion, deformation gradient; measures of deformation (Green-Lagrange and rate of deformation tensors); relationship between Green-Lagrange and rate of deformation tensors; pull-back and push-forward operations; measures of stress (Cauchy, nominal, first and second Piola-Kirchhoff tensors); conservation laws.
Updated and Total Lagrangian approaches: governing equations, strong/weak forms.
Total Lagrangian approach: finite element formulation.
Time integration procedures.
X-FEM: the eXtended Finite Element Method
Linear and nonlinear elasticity and visco-elasticity; elasto-plasticity.
Thermo-elasticity and continuum thermodynamics.
Deep learning for materials mechanics.
During the workshops, illustrative examples on micro- and nano-structures (MEMS and NEMS, carbon nanotubes, graphene sheets) will be illustrated, dealing e.g. with:
Nonlocal continuum damage mechanics; coupled space-time multi-scale analysis of composite delamination.
Multi-scale analysis of quasi-brittle fracture in polycrystalline materials.
Coupled thermo-mechanical analyses.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
A teamwork will be provided based on the lessons learned during the workshops; the relative assignment will be given each year for a specific problem to solve with AI-based methodologies.
A final oral examination will be also possible, about the course topics. The student will be asked to propose on his/her own one specific topic to work on; upon agreement with the examiner, the student will have to critically organize the discussion into a presentation, to be publicly delivered.
The student has to critically discuss the proposed topic, highlighting the relevant hypotheses and assumptions, and their physical meaning.

Ted Belytschko, Wing Kam Liu, Brian Moran and Khalil Elkhodary, Nonlinear Finite Elements for Continua and Structures, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2013
Ellad B. Tadmor, Ronald E. Miller and Ryan S. Elliott., Continuum Mechanics and Thermodynamics, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 9781107008267
Iddo Drori, The Science of Deep Learning, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 1108835082
Shaofan Li and Gang Wang, Introduction to Micromechanics and Nanomechanics, Editore: World Scientific Pub., Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 109812814132
Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, Deep Learning, Editore: MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2016 https://www.deeplearningbook.org/

This is a course about exploring random systems using computer simulations. Indeed, almost every mathematical model describing systems or phenomena of interest is hampered by uncertainties, although very often uncertain features or inputs are not accounted for.
The goal of the course is to introduce computational tools aiming at: (i) describing uncertainty sources in general systems, with special emphasis on differential models, and (ii) analyzing the impact of uncertainty on systems ’ outcomes, in terms of both uncertainty propagation from inputs to outputs, and input parameter estimation from noisy observations. A wide range of additional techniques enabling uncertainty quantification for complex problems will also be considered such as, e.g., surrogate models, reduced-order models for differential problems, multi-fidelity and neural network-based strategies, data-driven dynamical systems, thus providing also a general introduction to recent paradigms in scientific machine learning.

Both versions of the course have the following common learning goals:

• At the end of the course students are expected to be able to simulate statistical models - and run with Python - computational experiments aimed at: describing possible sources of uncertainty, quantifying the impact of uncertainty on numerical models, sampling from distributions of quantities of interest involving the simulation of physics-based models, applying Monte Carlo methods and their extensions, performing parameter estimation, building surrogate or reduced-order models by handling neural network-based or GP regression models.
• Leveraging on their engineering forma mentis and on the skills in computational statistics acquired in the course, students are expected to be able to evaluate the practical and statistical significance of the outcome of their numerical simulations, to quantify its uncertainty, and to propose efficient and reliable strategy to reduce computational complexity.
• Students are expected to be able to communicate and transfer the results and interpretations of their computational experiments using effective graphical or analytical means, suitable for the problem at hand and the findings of the analysis.
  Moreover, the students of the 8 CFU version of the course are expected to have a basic understanding of further topics related with data assimilation, sensitivity analysis, and data-driven dynamical systems.

The course is organized in a series of lectures that also include practical lab sessions. Lectures will provide the theoretical background; practical Lab sessions will provide algorithms' implementation and examples of application of the considered methodologies by using Python codes.
Part 1. Monte Carlo methods & Stochastic Simulation
Generating random samples from simple distributions (inversion method, transformations), acceptance-rejection sampling.
Generating random fields. Karhunen-Loève expansion.
Monte Carlo methods
Variance reduction techniques: antithetic variables, importance sampling, control variates, stratification, latin hypercube sampling.
Quasi Monte Carlo methods
Part 2. Surrogate models & Scientific Machine Learning
Dimensionality reduction: singular value decomposition
Gaussian processes & GP regression
Neural Networks (e.g., autoencoders & variational autoencoders)
Projection-based & deep learning-based Reduced Order Models
Data-driven Dynamical Systems: dynamic mode decomposition, sparse identification of nonlinear dynamics, extensions
Part 3. Sensitivity analysis & forward Uncertainty Quantification
Sensitivity analysis of multiple parameters: one-at-a-time, elementary effect methods, variance-based methods. Nonparametric methods.
Uncertainty propagation through Monte Carlo methods. Application to differential models.
Multi-level Monte Carlo and multi-fidelity Monte Carlo methods
Part 4. Data assimilation & inverse Uncertainty Quantification
Statistical inverse problems: a Bayesian setting for parameter estimation.
Monte Carlo Markov Chain methods. Application to differential models.
Data assimilation: Gaussian Filtering (Kalman filters, extensions, particle filters). Application to differential models.
Dynamic Bayesian Networks. Predictive Digital Twins

Prova orale obbligatoria
The oral exam covers the content of both theoretical lectures and practical Lab sessions, according to the sizing (5CFU/8CFU) of the course.
During the exam, students are required to present the detailed solution of two selected assignments (among a list of assignments proposed during the practical Lab sessions), commenting both the numerical results obtained and the computational procedures employed, and to answer to theoretical questions related with the topics of the course.
Assignments will require students to apply, adapt, or extend some of the methods presented during the course to selected case studies. The assignments will be evaluated during the oral examination and must be submitted to the examiners by the deadline communicated during the classes.
Theoretical questions will assess students' knowledge of the methodologies covered throughout the course. During the examination, students will first be required to sketch written answers to the theoretical questions, before presenting and discussing them with the examiners.
In the 5+3CFU form, a n additional assignment has to be carried out, which might also take the form of a critical analysis of a recent scientific paper related to the course's topics.
The course will be based on a selection of chapters of the following books, class notes, and some selected scientific papers provided:

Ralph C Smith, Uncertainty Quantification: Theory, Implementation, and Applications, Editore: SIAM, Anno edizione: 2013
Steven L. Brunton, J. Nathan Kutz, Data-driven Science and Engineering. Machine Learning, Dynamical Systems, and Control, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2022
Jochen Voss, An Introduction to Statistical Computing. A Simulation-based Approach, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 2014
Andreas Krause, Jonas Hubotter, Probabilistic Artificial Intelligence arXiv:2502.05244
Mark Asch, Marc Bocquet, Maelle Nodet, Data Assimilation. Methods, Algorithms, and Applications, Editore: SIAM, Anno edizione: 2016
Kevin P. Murphy, Probabilistic Machine Learning: An introduction, Editore: MIT Press, Anno edizione: 2022 http://probml.github.io/book1

The course fits into the overall program curriculum pursuing some of the defined general learning goals. In particular, the course contributes to the development of the following capabilities:
Understand context, functions, processes in a circular business and industrial environment and the impact of those factors on business and technical performance measures.
Design solutions applying a scientific and engineering approach (Analysis, Learning, Reasoning, and Modeling capability deriving from a solid and rigorous multidisciplinary background) to face problems and opportunities in a circular business case, focusing on demanufacturing and remanufacturing processes for recoverying and reuse functions and materials from high-value, post-use products in multiple sectors.
Develop new ideas and solutions in circular business cases, grounding on the knowledge of the available technological solutions supporting demanufacturing and remanufacturing and evolving in line with the general technological, business and regulatory framework.

Understand: The students will learn the key definitions of circular economy business cases, the underlying motivations, and the boundary conditions affecting the successful industrial transition to this sustainable production-consumption model. Moreover, they will learn the key role of advanced de-and remanufacturing systems in view of the development and implementation of circular economy business models at industrial scale. Several real-life examples will be discussed in order to support the in-depth understanding of business practices.
Design: The students will learn scientific and engineering methods in support of an efficient design and management of advanced demanufacturing and remanufacturing systems.
Develop: The students will learn the most relevant circular economy problems of the future and will be challenged with the analysis of future technology and business innovations to support these emerging needs.

The economical and environmentally sustainable treatment of end-of-life products and industrial waste by de-manufacturing processes is the core topic of this course. De-manufacturing includes the set of technologies, tools and knowledge-based methods to remanufacture and re-use functions and to recover materials from industrial waste and post-consumer high-tech products, under a circular economy perspective. This course provides competences related to mechanical de-manufacturing processes and systems, with the objective to design and operate these technologies in environmental and economical sustainable way, in different industrial settings.
The course will be structured to cover the following topics:

• De-manufacturing paradigm: definition of de-manufacturing systems and examples of industrial applications; De-manufacturing performance measures; Integrated process and system view of the problem; recent trends in de-manufacturing system and the role of the Digital Product Passport.
• De-manufacturing technologies: description of mechanical de-manufacturing processes, including disassembly, re-manufacturing and recycling technologies; mechanical size-reduction and separation processes; the role of hybrid data-driven and physics-based models in the design and operation of de-manufacturing and remanufacturing processes; advanced de-manufacturing technologies based on automated and semi-automated systems.
• De-manufacturing systems: features of de-manufacturing systems; material mixtures and granular flow models; multi-stage de-manufacturing systems modeling; performance evaluation and design of de-manufacturing systems; flexibility in de-manufacturing systems.
  The students will carry out laboratory activities to develop hands-on knowledge on specific processes and process-chains.
  Detailed Lectures Plan (32h)
  Introduction (6h)
  De-manufacturing paradigm: definitions and context.
  Integrated view of disassembly, remanufacturing, recycling, and recovery.
  Overview of de-manufacturing processes and systems.
  Examples:
  Remanufacturing of mechatronic components in the automotive industry: Electronic Control Units (ECUs), starters, alternators, engines.
  Recycling systems for End of Life Vehicles (ELVs): workflow and ASR (Automotive Shredding Residue) problem.
  Recycling systems for WEEE: focus on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).
  Recovery of key-metals from Lamps, hard drives, and PCBs.
  Performance Measures: grade/recovery trade-off.
  Integrated process and system view of the problem.
  De-manufacturing processes and technologies (13h)
  Mechanical disassembly and remanufacturing processes. Disassembly graphs and disassembly planning.
  Mechanical recycling processes: size-reduction and separation.
  Mechanical size-reduction processes:
  Overview of the cutting mechanisms and shredding machines;
  Population Based Models for size reduction processes;
  Experimental analysis;
  Application and analysis of the results.
  Mechanical Separation processes:
  Separation principles, physics and mechanisms;
  Overview of technologies: eddy current separation, electrostatic separation, magnetic separation, floatation, sieving, jigging, separation by air, optical sorting technologies (NIR, VIS, SWIR). Comparison of technologies and criteria for the selection of the most suitable process/technology.
  Modeling and simulation of separation processes;
  Analysis of the output and use of the models for process parameters optimization.
  Thermal and chemical processes: characteristics and requirements on the upstream processes (hints).
  De-manufacturing systems (13h):
  De-manufacturing systems architectures and material transportation technologies.
  Modeling material mixtures and granular flows.
  Performance Evaluation of de-manufacturing systems:
  Mass Balance Equations;
  Analytical modeling of de-manufacturing systems dynamics.
  Design of de-manufacturing systems;
  Flexibility and modularity in de-manufacturing systems.
  Detailed Classworks and Labs Plan (21h)
  De-manufacturing process planning (4h):
  Exercise: given a set of electronic and mechatronic products, the student will analyze their structure, their materials, their joints and will decide upon the best possible de-manufacturing process sequence, also through practical sessions.
  Exercises: calculation of performance measures.
  De-manufacturing processes and technologies (9h):
  Exercises: disassembly processes optimization.
  Exercises: disassembly line balancing (both deterministic and stochastic).
  Exercises: use of the size reduction simulation model for process parameters’ selection.
  Visit to the CIRC-eV lab.
  De-manufacturing systems (8h):
  Exercises: analytical modeling of de-manufacturing system.
  Exercise: use of the separation models for the analysis of the recovery and grade in different operating conditions.
  Exercises: reconfiguration of recycling systems; impact of different flow control logics.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The course is based on lectures, integrated with exercise sessions, also using laptops, as well as laboratory sessions with hands-on and experimental activities at lab scale. Moreover, optional industrial visits will be organized. The exam includes a written part, focused on exercises, and an oral part, with questions dealing with the whole program. To access the oral part, the written part has to be approved with a sufficient mark. Both parts have to be approved during the same exam session. Optional seminars and small projects will also be offered to deeply analyze specific topics of the course in small teams along with the course development. The results of these optional project works have to be presented before the end of the semester. The quality of this integrative work will be reflected in the final mark.

The course is organized through theoretical lectures, computational and experimental laboratories, and project-based practical sessions. The final goal is providing students with theoretical and practical elements of digital, computational, and AI-driven tools supporting modern Materials Engineering and data-driven materials innovation.
During the theoretical lectures, connections between materials development, digital manufacturing, geometrical design, computational simulation, and product functionality will be treated through simulation-driven and data-centric engineering approaches. Particular emphasis will be placed on the integration between material behavior, process parameters, geometrical variability, simulation outputs, and engineering performance by considering the increasing role of Artificial Intelligence (AI), Machine Learning (ML), and Materials Informatics methodologies within industrial and research environments.
The course introduces tools, techniques, and methodologies linked to Additive Manufacturing as natively digital fabrication technique, Design of Experiments (DOE), parametric CAD, computational simulation (FEA/FEM), dataset generation, and intelligent data analysis. Additive manufacturing is used as the main reference framework because it naturally combines material properties, process parameters, geometrical design freedom, variability, simulation, and final performance within a data-rich engineering environment.
Within this framework, DOE is presented as a rigorous methodology for generating compact and informative experimental and simulation datasets, while CAD and FEA/FEM are treated as tools for generating controlled and traceable engineering data rather than as isolated engineering activities. AI and Machine Learning are introduced as enabling technologies supporting predictive analysis, intelligent optimization, surrogate modeling, and data-driven engineering workflows integrating experiments, simulations, geometries, and manufacturing data.
A central aspect of the course is the development of a concurrent engineering perspective in Materials Engineering. While advanced digital and intelligent methodologies are extensively implemented in product development and manufacturing environments, materials development is still frequently approached through sequential methodologies disconnected from manufacturing constraints and final product requirements. The course addresses this gap by promoting integrated workflows where materials, manufacturing processes, simulations, and product performance are developed simultaneously through AI-driven learning cycles and data-centric engineering approaches.
During the practical sessions, students will implement digital and AI-assisted methodologies for dataset generation, simulation-based analysis, process optimization, and predictive engineering workflows. Project and laboratory activities will expose students to interdisciplinary engineering scenarios where experiments, computational simulation, digital manufacturing, and machine learning models are integrated into coherent workflows for materials and product innovation.

Students will gain:
An overall knowledge and understanding of digital, simulation-driven, and AI-enhanced approaches supporting materials development, digital fabrication, additive manufacturing, and product engineering.
Knowledge of Design of Experiments (DOE), parametric CAD methodologies, computational simulation (FEA/FEM), Artificial Intelligence (AI), Machine Learning (ML), and Materials Informatics approaches applied to materials engineering and process optimization.
Understanding of process–structure–property–performance relationships through integrated experimental, geometrical, manufacturing, and simulation-based engineering approaches.
Abilities in applying knowledge and understanding. Students will be able to implement methods and tools supporting dataset generation, computational simulation, process optimization, and AI-assisted engineering analysis to improve engineering performance and support design decisions.
Ability to generate, organize, and critically evaluate engineering datasets derived from experiments, geometrical models, manufacturing processes, and simulations for predictive and optimization purposes.
Ability to integrate experimental data, simulation outputs, and machine learning methodologies into interdisciplinary engineering workflows connecting materials development, additive (digital) manufacturing, and final product functionality.
Personal skills in making judgement, communication, and learning. Students will be able to autonomously elaborate and develop engineering solutions in multidisciplinary contexts where analytical reasoning, communication abilities, and critical interpretation of engineering and AI-generated results will be fundamental for progressing and debating within industrial and research case studies.
Experimental activities and hands-on practice will help students evaluate advantages, limitations, and risks correlated to digital engineering methodologies, simulation-driven approaches, and AI-assisted solutions. The course activities will positively contribute to the cultural and technical capability of students, necessary to face industrial challenges and opportunities linked to digitalization, intelligent manufacturing, sustainable transitions, and data-driven materials innovation.

The course is organized as follows:
Lectures
Introduction to Digital & AI Technologies for Materials Engineering: Introduction to integrated digital and AI-driven workflows for Materials Engineering. Materials, geometries, simulations, and manufacturing processes as structured data sources supporting predictive and optimization methodologies.
Additive Manufacturing as a Data-Rich Engineering Framework: Additive manufacturing technologies and digital production systems for Materials Engineering. Process–structure–property–performance relationships, geometrical freedom, process variability, and data-driven optimization approaches.
Design of Experiments (DOE) for Materials and Process Optimization: Planning and DOE for materials engineering applications. Factors, responses, interactions, response surfaces, and efficient exploration of engineering design spaces. DOE as a methodology for generating compact and informative datasets for engineering and AI applications.
Artificial Intelligence for Materials Engineering: Introduction to Artificial Intelligence (AI), Machine Learning (ML), and Materials Informatics methodologies for materials engineering. Regression and classification approaches, descriptors and features, training and validation, interpretability, overfitting, dataset limitations, and predictive engineering methodologies.
Parametric CAD and Computational Simulation: Parametric CAD methodologies and computational simulation (FEA/FEM) for generating structured and traceable engineering datasets. Product-performance prediction, parametric studies, synthetic data generation, and limitations of simulation-based datasets.
Data-Centric Engineering and Machine Learning Workflows: Dataset preparation for AI-driven materials engineering. Integration of experimental, geometrical, manufacturing, and simulation-derived data. Data preprocessing, feature selection, scaling, traceability, and engineering interpretation of machine learning datasets.
Predictive Models, Optimization and Materials Informatics: Machine Learning models for prediction, optimization, surrogate modeling, inverse design concepts, and engineering decision support. Materials Informatics, digital materials data infrastructures, FAIR data principles, interoperability, and AI-driven engineering workflows.
Experimental and Computational Laboratory (Theory in Practice)
Parametric CAD for dataset generation
Parametric FEM and simulation-based datasets
Additive Manufacturing and digital fabrication workflows
Experimental data acquisition and digital analysis
AI-assisted interpretation of experimental and simulation data
Machine Learning workflows on CAD/FEM-generated datasets
Project Laboratory (Group Projects)
Project Brief: Definition of product concept, engineering requirements, material specifications, process variables, and performance targets.
From Materials to Data-Driven Engineering: Development of integrated workflows connecting materials, geometrical design, additive manufacturing, computational simulation, and AI-assisted engineering methodologies.
Application and implementation of digital approaches for Materials Engineering: Application of DOE, CAD, FEA/FEM, AI, and Machine Learning methodologies through interdisciplinary project cases focused on:
materials and process optimization,
simulation-driven engineering,
predictive engineering methodologies,
AI-assisted engineering analysis and decision-making,
data-driven materials and product innovation.
The project activities aim to promote a concurrent and integrated engineering vision where materials, manufacturing processes, computational simulation, and intelligent data-driven methodologies are developed together rather than sequentially.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The assessment will be based on the results of the Theory Exam (Class Test) and Project Assignment (Project Report). The contents will be linked to the topics as delivered in the lectures and furtherly elaborated in the laboratories.
In assessing the theory exam and the project report, the following elements will be considered as relevant for the final grade:
Ability to analyze problems;
Formal and substantive correctness of the procedures identified to solve the problems;
Correctness of the obtained results;
Knowledge and understanding of the topics;
Adequacy of the technical scientific language;
Autonomy of judgement.

The objective of the class is to raise awareness about the current changes in terms of energy production and uses due to pollution, raising costs of fossil fuels and other raw materials and their depletion as well as the resulting EU policies. This is inducing rapid societal and economical changes that bring, at the same time, challenges and opportunities for the next generations of engineers. Starting from the current situation in terms of energy use and its recent evolution, to finally reach the ideal of a circular economy, many issues need to be overcome. Green electricity is not easily storable and thus, electrochemical energy storage and conversion is a necessary part of the equation.

DD1: knowledge and understanding
Lectures and tutoring sessions will allow students to:

• learn the problematics of energy consumption vs. production of goods, quality of life and pollution;
• learn the approaches proposed to lower emissions and the challenges that the energy transition brings;
• learn what is the place of electrochemical energy storage in the energy transition and the value chain of batteries from mining to recycling;
• learn the EoL approaches to batteries and accumulators;
• learn the fundamentals of Life Cycle Thinking as applied to the field of energy storage.
  DD2/4: ability to apply knowledge and understanding/communication skills
  Students that successfully pass the exam:
• are able to assess the sustainability of energy production considering the whole value chain;
• are aware of the technical and societal challenges that need to be addressed to significantly lower emissions;
• know the directions in terms of development and investment in the energy sector (production and storage) pursued by EU policies;
• know the different scale of energy storage needed and the position of electrochemical energy storage in the mix;
• are able to prepare a report on the concepts learnt and discuss it critically.

New regulation and sustainability of electrochemical energy storage in the energy transition (2 CFU)

• Introduction to the electrochemical storage options;
• the EU battery and accumulators directive (2006/66/EC): primary and secondary legislation;
• framework of the new EU battery regulation: EU Grean Deal, Circular Economy Action Plan, proposal for a new regulation on batteries and waste batteries;
• End of Life of accumulators;
• recycling and reuse of waste batteries: technologies and market perspectives;
• Life Cycle Thinking;
• Product Environmental Footprint Category Rules for batteries: Carbon Footprint of batteries and their role in the decarbonisation;
• Life Cycle Assessment of batteries and capacitors: state-of-the-art.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Report on a specific topic to be submitted before the exam and presentation with the support of electronic media during the oral examination.

The course is meant to provide a general background in electrochemistry and coverage of some areas of electrochemical processes and technologies.
The main objective is to introduce the students to the fundamentals of electrochemistry and complement the latter with the illustration of some particular applications, with a focus on topics and issues relevant to material engineering. Students are expected to address this latter aspect in preparing the individual oral presentation, which is one the course assignment.
The course is a first step towards a professional career in the area of applied electrochemistry as well as a prerequisite for engaging in research activities in different domains of electrochemistry.

The student is expected to acquire familiarity with the key concepts of electrochemistry and be able to critically analyse practical applications of electrochemistry in the light of the fundamental aspects denoting the peculiar nature of electrochemical systems. (DdD1)
Moreover and in particular, the student shall be able to use electrochemical understanding to discuss aspects of material processing and electrochemical energy storage. (DdD1)
Specifically, the student is expected to acquire the ability to analyse electrochemical processes in terms of the following aspects and fundamental concepts: double layer structure and its phenomenology; ionic transport; kinetics of charge transfer; essential on kinetic mechanisms and electrocatalysis; diffusion kinetics; significance and relevance of the nature, physical state and stability of electrode materials to their electrochemical behaviour. (DdD1 - DdD2)
These learning outcomes will enable the student to follow advanced courses in electrochemical technologies.

Electrochemical systems: definitions, structure and functioning (electrolytic and galvanic cells)
Electrochemical thermodynamics: fundamental relationships, electrochemical potential and the Nernst equation. Calculation of cell potential. Reference electrodes. The electrochemical series. Liquid junction potential. Pourbaix diagrams.
Structure of the electrode-electrolyte interphase. Galvani and Volta potential. Gibbs adsorption isotherm; Lippmann equation. Development of models of the interface structure (metal/aqueous electrolyte) and their significance vis-à-vis experimental evidence from electrocapillarity measurements of the interface capacitance.
Ionic transport. Electrolytes and conductivity. Transport properties of electrolytes: mechanical and electrical mobility; molar and equivalent conductivity; transport number.
Solid electrolytes (outline): defects and conduction mechanisms; oxide conductors for high temperature electrochemical cells and devices; Ag and Cu halide solid electrolytes; sodium ion conductors; polymer electrolytes.
Electrochemical kinetics. Overpotential and kinetic regimes. Butler-Volmer equation: single electron transfer processes. Low and high field approximation of the B.-V. equation; charge transfer resistance; Tafel's law. Multiple step e-transfer reaction. Mass transfer kinetics: the Nernst diffusion layer, steady-state diffusion controlled kinetics and mass transport limited kinetics. Diffusion control and mixed control regime. Mass transfer effects under transient conditions: Cottrell and Sand equations. Summary on transport processes in electrolytic solutions (infinitely dilute solutions)
A brief on electrocatalysis. The hydrogen electrode and the oxygen electrode. Electrocatalysis and electrode materials: traditional electrode materials, mixed oxide electrodes, boron doped diamond.
Electrochemical methods for the experimental study of electrode processes. Steady state and transient techniques. Voltammetry and electrochemical impedance spectroscopy. Application examples.
Electrochemical energy storage and conversion. Primary and secondary batteries. Alkaline batteries; lead-acid battery; secondary lithium batteries. Electrochemical Double layer Capacitors (EDLC): principles and behaviour. Activated carbon: properties and electrochemical behaviour. EDLC energy and power performances; experimental assessment of supercapacitor cell performance. Types of EDLC and hybrid devices.
Fuel cells. Historical outline. Types of fuel cells: low (polymer electrolyte membrane FC) and high temperature systems (Solid oxide FC): performances and material issues.
Electrochemistry and state of the art technology of water electrolysis: polymer electrolyte electrolyzers.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Assessment will be through a writing exam and a final oral presentation.
The exam consists of exercises relating to thermodynamics and kinetics of electrochemical systems through problems requiring the interpretation of data and experimental evidence obtained by electrochemical methods and through theoretical questions. A primary objective is that of assessing basic understanding of electrochemical processes in their experimental representation and of challenging students' ability to attempt an interpretation of the behaviour of electrode materials and/or electrochemical systems.
The project assignment shall be devoted to a specific application or technology, with specific attention to the choice of materials for the electrodes of the relevant system or device, their behaviour and performance. The student is free to propose the topic of his/her interest and acceptance of the topic will be decided together with the instructor.

Presentations and lecture notes
Philip H. Rieger, Electrochemistry, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 1993 https://ebookcentral.proquest.com/lib/polimi/reader.action?docID=3108909
J.O. Bockris, A.K.N. Reddy, Modern Electrochemistry, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 978-0-387-24569-0
Dieter Landolt, CORROSION AND SURFACE CHEMISTRY OF METALS, Editore: EPFL Press, Anno edizione: 207, ISBN: 978-2-940222-11-7

The course aims at providing a picture of the electronic probe microscopy techniques as general as possible, starting from the basics of the major techniques and examples of prototypical applications up to state of the art scientific cases. The main goal is to provide the student with the ability of assessing the feasibility and effectiveness of microscopic measurements to tackle a given problem. The course will focus on the information that can be obtained (morphology, chemical contrast, short-and long-range structure, spectroscopy) and on the choice of the microscopic techniques that can be effectively employed to investigate a system in a given environment. Experimental and numerical modeling tutorials will give hands on experience of selected concepts.

DdD1 - Knowledge and understanding
Upon passing the exam, the student knows the fundamentals of electron and scanning probe microscopies: she/he is able to draw the layout of a microscope and to comment its main assembly in terms of fundamental Physics (main phenomena and their order of magnitude).
DdD2 - Applying knowledge and understanding
Upon passing the exam, the student is able to select the most appropriate microscopical approach, within the range of techniques discussed, to address a standard problem in material microscopy and to discuss its advantages and disadvantages with respect to the other techniques. The student has a basic understanding of the numerical approaches used to model selected microscopic technique and phenomena.
DdD3 - Making judgements, Communication, Lifelong learning skills
Upon passing the exam, the student is able to read critically scientific literature on microscopy: she/he is able to explain and discuss the techniques adopted by researchers and the evidences supporting their conclusions, eventually proposing a different approach to attain the same or and improved result.

Topics

• Probes with high spatial resolution and state of the art in research and applications.
• Interaction of free electrons and bound electrons with matter.
• Information obtained by using electronic probes.
• Numerical modeling of electron transport in beams and electron -matter interaction.
  a) Far field electron microscopy
• Introduction to electron microscopy (EM)
• Diffraction limit and ray optics
• The scanning electron microscope (SEM)
• Interaction between electron and matter
• Secondary electron contrast
• Depth of field
• Charging and other imaging artifacts
• Back-scattered electron contrast
• Basics of the transmission electron microscope (TEM)
• Sample preparation
• Bright and dark field imaging
• The mass-thickness contrast
• Direct and reciprocal space imaging
• The diffraction contrast (basic aspects)
• The phase contrast (basic aspects)
• The scanning transmission electron microscope (STEM)
• Spectroscopic and time resolved microscopy (basic aspects)
  b) Scanning probe microscopies
• Introduction to scanning probe microscopy (SPM)
• Elements of a scanning-probe microscope
• Tip-sample forces
• Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) static operation: constant height and constant force
• Shift in the natural frequency of a harmonic oscillator under a force gradient
• Amplitude-modulation dynamic AFM operation
• Dynamic AFM operation: sensitivity in amplitude modulation, frequency-modulation techniques
• Noise and resolution in AFM
• Image analysis in AFM
• Electrostatic and Magnetic Force Microscopy (EFM and MFM)
• Imaging artifacts in SPM
• Scanning near-field optical microscopy (SNOM)
• Introduction to scanning tunneling microscopy (STM)
• Atomic resolution with STM
  Laboratory visits
  Students will attend hands on numerical modeling tutorials about selected features.
  Students will attend experimental laboratory tutorials in image analysis and practical use of research instrumentation, with possibly support of video tutorials.
  Schedule
  The course will be held in the first half of the first term, from mid-September to the beginning of November.
  Notes
  The range and detail of the course will be adapted to the level of the class during the course and may change significantly.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The exam consists of an oral test in two parts of about half an hour each, one about Electron Microscopy and the other about Scanning Probe microscopy.
In each part:

• The student asked to present selected topics of the course, starting from the fundamentals through increasing level of detail and difficulty.
• The student will be asked to select its microscopic technique of choice to address a scientific case and to comment about the limits of application, advantages, and disadvantages.
• The student will be required to briefly present a scientific paper, chosen in agreement with the teacher, where electron or SPM microscopies is the main investigation techniques. The presentation will be focused on the information attained by the use of microscopy and the technical approach adopted to obtain it. As an alternative to one of the two scientific papers, students may choose to incrementally develop and discuss a numerical model discussed within the numerical modeling tutorial.

R. F. Egerton, Physical Principles of Electron Microscopy: An Introduction to TEM, SEM, AEM, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-0-387-25800-3
Note: textbook for the TEM and SEM section
C. Colliex, La microscopie éléctronique, Editore: Presses universitaires de France, Anno edizione: 1998, ISBN: 978-2-1304-8665-7 http://www.stem.lps.u-psud.fr/la-microscopie-electronique
Note: Introductory reading on TEM, in French.
I. M. Watt, The principles and Practice of Electron Microscopy, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1997, ISBN: 0-521-43591-9
Note: Advanced text on Electron Microscopy
Unknown, A practical guide to Scanning Probe Microscopy, Editore: VEECO, Anno edizione: 2005 http://www.veeco.com/pdfs/library/SPM_Guide_0829_05_166.pdf
Note: Introduction to Scanning Probe Microscopy by a well-known manufacturer
E. Meyer, H. J. Hug, R. Bennewitz, Scanning Probe Microscopy: The Lab on a Tip, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 3-540-43180-2
Note: Examples of applications

The main objective of the course is to study the climate change challenge using quantitative, numerical tools. Specifically, the aim is to learn the basic elements of the global energy and climate problems, evaluate the solutions with a focus on the energy sector, and use optimization and simulation models to evaluate the emission reduction and adaptation strategies.
To do so, a discussion of the fundamentals of the global economy, energy, land and climate systems will be complemented by development and applications of mathematical models integrating these key components. The course will also involve programming languages used in energy-climate planning, such as AMPL and python, among others.
The course uses innovative teaching methods, in particular, it is a flipped classroom course: students will form groups of 4-5 and work on projects to improve one or more numerical models to deal with climate change solutions, either on mitigation or adaptation.
Students based in Leonardo (e.g., Mathematical Engineers) may attend part of the course virtually.

At the end of course, students will be able to:

• Explain the foundations of climate science / climate change and how climate change affects energy and economic systems
• Describe the main historical landmarks of climate- energy policy (IPCC)
• Explain the link between climate change and energy systems
• Discuss advantages and limitations of the different mitigation and adaptation strategies
• Describe the different components of an energy system
• Distinguish between major modeling paradigms (IAMs, bottom-up and top-down energy models, etc.) and choose the appropriate type of model for a given question
• Answer specific questions using optimization models and critically interpret / analyse results
• Translate a real-world problem into an optimization formulation
• Write a mathematical model in a specific programming language
• Identify the main sources of uncertainty and calculate their impact on model outcomes
• Present a project in class, and thus create a presentation and be able to communicate it properly

The specific list of topics is as follows
Topic 1: Introduction to the climate change challenge: physics and causes of climate change, consequences and impacts.
Topic 2: Global energy and climate policies and agreements
Topic 3: The role of technology in climate change mitigation
Topic 4: Fundamentals of continuous and discrete optimization
Topic 5: Mathematical modeling and optimization using AMPL
Topic 6: Fundamentals of climate economics
Topic 7: Introducing the tools of Integrated Assessment Models
Topic 8: The simplest integrated energy-economy-climate model: the DICE model
Topic 9: Introduction to energy systems
Topic 10: Energy models: EnergyScope and PyPSA
Topic 11: Climate risks, adaptation and climate engineering
Topic 12: Accounting for risks and uncertainty: sensitivity and uncertainty analysis methods, stochastic and robust optimization

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Final grade will be based on two main components. A group project which involves model development and presentation during the course lectures. An additional written exam which will be done during the standard exams timeline.
1) Model development and group presentation (2/3): This will be done in class during the course, and we will evaluate both the modeling work as well as the communication skills. In particular, the teacher will assess the relevance of the chosen project, the validity of the software development (also looking at the code) as well as the presentation and oral skills.
2) Written exam (1/3): This will test knowledge of programming and of the theoretical concepts. The theoretical questions will cover the topics examined in class.

Global Energy Assessment - Toward a Sustainable Future, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2012 http://www.globalenergyassessment.org/
IPCC 6th assessment report, Anno edizione: 2023 https://www.ipcc.ch/assessment-report/ar6/
DICE 2013 http://www.econ.yale.edu/~nordhaus/homepage/documents/DICE_Manual_100413r1.pdf
The AMPL Book https://ampl.com/resources/books/ampl-book/

This course deals with the application of ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by technology. This course aims at showing how the decision to develop a technology (meant at large), the processes of its design, development, management, control, and production are inherently moral. It is intended to give students a chance to reflect on the ethical, social, and cultural impact of technological applications (in particular AI).
The course includes lectures by the instructor and invited lecturers; class participation will be expected, and students should apply what they learn through reading, lectures, and class discussions by looking at current events through an ethical lens.

Dublin Descriptors
Expected learning outcomes
Knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Acquire a broad perspective on the ethical and social impacts and implications of science and technology;
Be acquainted with normative ethics and normative argumentation;
Learn how to recognize and analyze ethical and social aspects and issues inherent in some technological applications;
Be able to understand how technical problems are inherently connected to a social dimension within a socio-technical perspective.
Applying knowledge and understanding
Students will:
Be able to use critical skills in clarifying and ethically analyzing case-studies involving technology;
Be able to apply ethical theories to problems created, aggravated or transformed by current technologies;
Be able to explore and assess possibilities for solving or diminishing existing and emerging ethical and social problems.
Making judgements
Students will be able:
To autonomously analyze the ethical issues of a technology and to develop a critical analysis on that;
To evaluate and select the appropriate knowledge in the effort of elaborating and justifying a philosophical argument on a topic autonomously selected.
Communication
Students will learn to:
Exercise and improve their skills in a critical writing;
Present in an effective way the results of their research, being able to justify their choices.
Lifelong learning skills
Students will:
Be better prepared to their future professional life in an ethically and socially responsible way;
Be able to analyze problems through an ethical lens.

The course will cover different topics both from a theoretical and a more practical point of view. We will start with a broad analysis of the concept of responsibility, in particular in an engineering perspective, and of normative ethics and its tools. We will discuss ethical questions in the design of technology with a focus on Design Ethics and its Social Ethics paradigm. Then ethics in IT-configured societies will be discussed and technology as the instrumentation of human action will be presented. Topics will include, for instance, the novel framework of Responsible Research and Innovation, Value-Sensitive design, the ethical aspects of technicolgical risks, the relationship among sustainability, ethics and technology, information flow, privacy, and values and uncertainty
Students will be supervised in class sessions in the development of the individual final essay in order to meet the standards required by scientific publications.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Type of assessment
Description
Dublin descriptor
Collective presentations
Students are encouraged to:
Develop an argument in which the presented claims are justified by the use of ethical argumentation and the relevant literature;
To present this argument in an oral presentation in class in front of the instructor and their student colleagues.
1, 3
4, 5
Individual written essay
The individual final essay must show that the student has the capacity to read and carefully study the suggested bibliography and the ability to apply it to case-studies;
The individual final essay will be about the ethical issues associated to technologies that require to have developed critical skills in analyzing technical problems with the tools provided by ethical theories and argumentation.
1, 2
3, 4, 5

Ibo van de Poel, Lambèr Royakkers, Ethics, Technology, and Engineering: An Introduction (second edition), Editore: Wiley-Blackwell, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 978-1-119-87943-5
Mattia Andreoletti, Daniele Chiffi, Philosophy of Risk, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2027
Note: If not yet published, an advanced draft of the book will be made available to students.
Behnam Taebi, Ethics and Engineering. An Introduction, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9781316628409

The course Ferroic materials explores the scientific principles, material classes, synthesis, characterization, and engineering applications of piezoelectric, ferroelectric, ferromagnetic and multiferroic materials, from bulk to thin and ultrathin films.

Knowledge and understanding (DD1)
Students will understand the properties of ferroic materials and their microscopic physical origin within the existing classical and modern theories. They will be able to comprehend cutting-edge technological and scientific advances in the field.
Applying knowledge and understanding (DD2)
Students can transfer these physical concepts to applications requiring ferroic materials for sensing, mechanical actuation, information storage and electronic processing.
Students will be able to experimentally access the basic properties of known and unknown ferroic materials.
Make judgements (DD3)
Students will be able to identify the suitability of ferroic materials for each specific application/project making reasoned decisions.
Communication Skills (DD4)
Students can communicate information, ideas, problems and solutions regarding the characterization and exploitation of ferroic materials.
Learning skills (DD5)
Students will have developed those learning skills that are necessary for them to continue to undertake further study with a high degree of autonomy.

Introduction to ferroic materials
Definition, classification, and examples
Key properties of piezoelectric, ferroelectric and ferromagnets
Structure-property relationships
Synthesis of bulk material and thin films
Piezoelectric materials
History, basic concepts and principles
Physics of piezoelectricity for the response to mechanical and electrical stimuli
Classes of materials (piezoelectric ceramics, polymers, and lead-free alternatives to standard piezo materials)
Characterization techniques
Examples, applications, and integration
Ferroelectric materials
The classical theory of polarization
Switching and hysteresis loops in ferroelectrics
Material classes (perovskites, LiNbO 3, layered and other families, ferroelectric semiconductors, non-bulk ferroelectrics, ultrathin ferroelectrics, 2D materials)
The role of hafnium-oxide in electronics
Macroscopic characterization techniques (Sawyer-Tower method, displacive currents methods (PUND))
Microscopic characterization (piezo-response force microscopy)
Beyond the classical approach: the theory of polarization as an adiabatic flow of currents
Ferromagnetic materials
Overview of magnetic materials (diamagnetic, paramagnetic, and ferromagnetic)
Magnetic hysteresis, coercivity, and remanence
Characterization of magnetic materials
Soft and hard materials, permanent magnets
Integration in electronics and mechanical systems
Multiferroics
Bulk and layered multiferroics
The physical reasons behind their rareness
Applications, Future Trends and Challenges
Pyroelectric devices
Piezoelectric actuators (e.g. MEMS)
Ferroic memories (e.g. FeRAM, ferroelectric tunnelling junctions) and field-effect devices (e.g. FeFET transistors)
Magneto-electric spin-orbit devices beyond CMOS transistors
Neuromorphic computing with ferroelectrics
Actuators and sensors at the microscale in microelectromechanical systems
Laboratory activities (hands-on)
The course will include a hands-on session/laboratory that will show the students the tools used for the investigation of magnetic (magneto-optical Kerr effect and microscopy, vibrating sample magnetometry) and ferroelectric (Sawyer-Tower versus displacive current methods (PUND)) materials.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam will consist of an oral examination designed to assess the student’s understanding of the course material. Both theoretical and experimental aspects will be given equal weight.
Students may begin the examination with a topic of their choice. They are also encouraged to present an in-depth study of a specific topic, supported by a short written report demonstrating their ability to apply the acquired knowledge to address a problem of interest in the field of ferroic materials (not mandatory, though appreciated).

Ashim Kumar Bain and Prem Chand, Ferroelectrics: Principles and Applications, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-3527342143 https://www.wiley.com/en-ae/Ferroelectrics%3A+Principles+and+Applications-p-9783527342143
K. Rabe, Ch. H. Ahn, J.-M. Triscone, Physics of ferroelectrics: a modern perspective, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 978-3-540-34591-6 https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-540-34591-6
S. Blundell, Magnetism in condensed matter, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 978-0198505914 https://global.oup.com/ukhe/product/magnetism-in-condensed-matter-9780198505914?cc=it&lang=en&

The course aims at providing knowledge about organic materials for electronics, optoelectronics and optics and related devices. The course deals with conducting materials, photochromic materials, liquid crystals, as distinct topics. For each class of materials, molecular structure-properties relationships are studied also considering the possible technological applications. Attention is focused on the design of devices such as LEDs, transistors, photovoltaic cells, LCDs, sensors and smart windows. Finally, techniques for the deposition of the organic materials into films are considered.

The expected learning outcomes are:
aquiring knowledge of the principles of molecular engineering of electronic materials, i.e. organic semiconductors, and optically-active materials (DdD1);
aquiring knowledge of the structure to property relationship, with specific focus on optical and electrical properties (DdD1);
aquiring ability to apply the principles of molecular engineering to design functional materials for specific applications (DdD2);
aquiring the ability to predict the properties of a functional material, given the molecular structure (DdD2);
aquiring knowledge of the working principles of the main electronic devices, their characteristics, components and architecture (DdD1);
aquiring ability to apply the above knowledge to a critical description and discussion of the devices and related materials properties, limitations and developments (DdD2).
Overall, these learning outcomes are expected to provide the student basic knowledge tools necessary to i) understand the technology trends and i) perform future activities aimed at the development of materials for electronics optoelectronics and smart optics.

Functional materials:
Basic principles.
Fundamentals on organic functional materials: molecular skeleton, side groups; the electronic effect of side groups.
Conjugated materials
Molecular design: from localized chemical bonding to delocalized chemical bonding (LCAO, the frontier energy levels)
Structure to properties relationship: the UV-vis spectroscopy
Polyacetylene: structure, synthesis, electrical properties; Shirakawa films
Doping: chemical and electrochemical processes; charge carriers in organic materials; fundamentals of charge transport
The deactivation from the excited state: the emissive properties (photoluminescence)
Applications of conducting polymers: OLED, photovoltaic cells, thin film transistors, smart windows, sensors
Liquid crystals
Fundamentals, mesogens, main LC phases; polymer liquid crystals; LC embedded in polymer matrix (preparation methods, drop configuration, smart windows).
Optical thermometers. Smart windows. Liquid crystal displays.
Photochromic and thermochromic materials
Fundamentals, main families
Applications: ophthalmic lenses, inks
See bibliography for suggested books (covering more than the programme of the course). Additional material or lecture notes are given by the lecturer.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
A written examination, which consists in:
A numerical exercise on a device: OFETs, photovoltaic cells, OLEDs or smart windows and filters.
The exercise aims at applying knowledge to calculate the efficiency or the main characteristics of a device starting from given experimental data. Regarding this part, not only the correct calculation is assessed but also the proper use of significant decimals and units of measurement. Then, student is required to give a critical assessment of the performance with regards to the materials amployed as well as the manufacturing process. Similarly, student is required to assign specific devices to the corresponding materials on the basis of the materials structure and processing. The assignment has to be properly supported.
An open question of one of the main topics of the course
In the open question, the student is required to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topic. Not only the knowledge about the topic is assessed, but also the correct use of a proper scientific language and clarity in the description.
An exercise on the structure-to-property relationship
It aims at evaluating the ability of the student to apply the acquired knowledge on molecular design to a case study, finding the right key to solve the problem.
A series of multiple choice questions
It allows to assess the knowledge and comprehension throughout the subjets.

Functional Organic and Polymeric Materials, Editore: Ed. by T.H. Richardson - Wiley, ISBN: 0471987247
Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Editore: Ed. by T.A. Skotheim - Marcel Dekker inc., Anno edizione: 1986, ISBN: 0-8247-7395-0
Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Editore: Ed. by T.A. Skotheim, R.L. Elsenbaumer, J.R. Reynolds - Marcel Dekker, Anno edizione: 1998, ISBN: 0-8247-0050-3
S.O. Kasap, Optoelectronics and Photonics: Principles and Practices, Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0-201-61087-6
Organic Photochromic and Thermochromic Compounds, Editore: Ed. by J.C. Crano and R.J. Guglielmetti - Plenum Press - New York, Anno edizione: 1999, ISBN: 0-306-45882-9

The course begins with an introduction to atomic and molecular structures, followed by an analysis of the different types of intra- and inter-molecular interactions. These interactions are used to determine the potential energy of materials and to classify them into the following key categories: ionic, covalent, molecular, macromolecular, and metallic.
Model potentials appropriate for describing these interactions and the molecular arrangement at the nanoscale will be examined in detail, considering both crystalline and amorphous domains, as well as short- and long-range order. Particular attention will be given to the correlations between atomic, molecular, and supramolecular structures and the resulting macroscopic properties of materials (structure–property relationships). The course also considers the principal tools for describing crystal structures in the solid state, introducing the mathematical and geometrical concepts required for their analysis.
Building on these foundations, the fundamentals of materials physics will be presented to support the understanding of key structural, electrical, optical, and thermal properties. Selected characterization methods will be introduced, including X-ray diffraction (XRD), vibrational spectroscopy, molecular modeling, and differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).

After attending the course and following a positive evaluation, regarding the Dublin Descriptor 1 (DD1) of knowledge and understanding, the students will be able to:
describe intra- and inter-molecular interactions and evaluate the potential energy of materials using appropriate model potentials;
understand the molecular and crystal structure of materials through the use of suitable geometrical, graphical, and mathematical tools;
demonstrate knowledge of key characterization methods such as X-ray diffraction, vibrational spectroscopy, molecular modeling, differential scanning calorimetry, and dynamic thermo-mechanical analysis, and their practical applications.
Regarding the DD2 of applying knowledge and understanding, the students will be able to:
analyze and interpret the structural features of different classes of materials (ionic, covalent, molecular, macromolecular, and metallic) at various length scales;
compute and correlate macroscopic properties—electrical, optical, thermal, and mechanical—with micro- and nano-scale structure, using appropriate physical and mathematical models.

Introduction: generalities on materials.
Atomic structure and chemical bonding. Intra- and inter-molecular interactions in solid materials. Crystalline, semi-crystalline, and amorphous solids. Classes of materials, their structure, and general properties: ionic and covalent materials, metals, molecular and polymeric materials, and amorphous materials. Structural and functional materials. The importance of structure-properties correlations in materials science and engineering.
Intra and intermolecular forces: model potentials.
The intramolecular potential of a diatomic molecule and the harmonic oscillator. Empirical model potentials for the description of covalent and ionic bonds. Weak intermolecular interactions (Lennard-Jones potential). The torsion potential. The potential energy of polyatomic molecules. Principles of molecular mechanics and molecular dynamics simulations for the description of the structure and properties of molecules. Madelung potential for ionic crystals and the generalization of the Lennard-Jones potential to van der Waals molecular solids. Intramolecular potentials and principles of vibrational spectroscopy techniques for molecules and solids.
Solid state structure.
Classes of crystalline solids, Bravais lattices, crystal structures, unit cells, basis vectors, polymorphism, Miller indices, interstitial sites, and imperfections in crystals. Examples of the crystalline structure of covalent, ionic, metallic, polymeric, and molecular materials. Introduction to X-ray diffraction and its application.
Physical properties of materials.
Thermal and mechanical properties of polymers. Thermoplastic and thermoset polymers. Crystallinity and phase transitions for polymers. Amorphous and semi-crystalline polymers. Tuning of the glass transition temperature and the elastic modulus in polymers.
Structure and properties of ceramic materials. Crystalline ceramics, sintered ceramics, grains, and porosity. Inorganic glasses and clay products. Thermal and mechanical properties of ceramics.
Electrical properties. Ohm’s law and electron transport. Electronic band structure of metals, insulators, and semiconductors. Temperature effects on conductivity. Doping and tuning of the electrical conductivity in semiconductors.
Optical properties. The electromagnetic spectrum, light-matter interaction, optical phenomena: emission, absorption, diffusion, luminescence. Transparent, reflective, and light-absorbent materials. Description of absorption and emission based on the electronic band structure.
Mechanical properties. Tensile tests, stress-strain diagram, and elastic modulus of polymers. Elastic modulus and flexural strength of ceramics. Tensile toughness and ductility. Effect of temperature on mechanical properties.
For some of these topics, e.g. physical properties, students will be able to use videos through a flipped-classroom approach, to focus classroom lessons on the most important theoretical points, on exercises and Q&A sessions, while dedicating the videos to mathematical passages.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The final assessment will consist of a written examination (2 hours) with both numerical exercises and open questions on all the subjects covered by the course. The oral exam (30 min - 1 h) is not required, but it is an additional possibility.
The examination is aimed at verifying that the student:
knows how to describe the molecular, crystalline, and solid-state arrangement of a material based on the different interactions occurring at the nanoscale
can apply the proper mathematical models to describe the energy and the molecular interactions in different classes of materials
can describe and evaluate the macroscopic properties of materials on the basis of atomic, molecular, and microstructural effects, understanding structure/properties correlations.
knows how to apply practical methods and techniques to measure or evaluate the properties of the materials
knows the theoretical fundamentals of materials chemistry and physics.

Classroom presentations and other bibliographic materials will be available on Beep
D.R. Askeland, P.P. Fulay, W.J. Wright, The Science and Engineering of Materials, Editore: Cengage Learning, Inc., Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 0-495-29602-3
C. Kittel, Introduzione alla fisica dello stato solido, Editore: Casa Editrice Ambrosiana, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 9788808183620
C. Castiglioni, A. Milani, M. Tommasini, Introduction to Materials Science - Introduzione alla Scienza dei Materiali B, Editore: McGraw-Hill Education, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-1-3089-9339-3

With increasing quantities of goods moving across the globe, growing environmental regulatory pressures and increasing customers’ expectations, sustainable logistics has now become one of the key business areas for companies to compete, be successful and thrive in nowadays business environment. The course aims to provide students with the capabilities to master advanced managerial issues related to Sustainable Logistics operations. Understanding the environmental impact of complex logistics systems, identifying the practices and actions that can be undertaken by managers to embrace more sustainable logistics strategies and design greener logistics networks, becoming aware of the tools and methods for sustainability quantification, analysing the company’s green logistics performance over a set of relevant KPIs will be among the key topics.
The course fits into the overall program curriculum pursuing some of the defined general learning goals. In particular, the course contributes to the development of the following capabilities:
Understand context, functions, processes in a business and industrial environment and the impact of those factors on business performance
Identify trends, technologies and key methodologies in a specific domain (specialization streams)
Design solutions applying a scientific and engineering approach (Analysis, Learning, Reasoning, and Modelling capability deriving from a solid and rigorous multidisciplinary background) to face problems and opportunities in a business and industrial environment

Understand and describe:
the main green logistics strategies and their consistency with the general company strategy
the main practices and actions that can be undertaken in the arena of green logistics, with reference to key aspects such as network design, transport, warehousing, and logistics innovation
the main methodologies for sustainability quantification and company’s green logistics performance analysis
Apply the theories, models, principles and criteria to understand and address real-world problems related to green logistics
Design and illustrate innovative sustainable logistics solutions in new fields (e.g. sustainable B2c eCommerce and last mile delivery)

Sustainability in Logistics as a strategic priority for companies. Definition of Green Logistics. Evolution of the concept over time. Triple Bottom Line (TBL) and SDG frameworks. Types of environmental impact. Green logistics and corporate strategy.
Assessing Green Logistics: frameworks and quantification methods. Guidelines, metrics and measures. GHG Protocol, ISO standards, GLEC framework. The carbon footprint of logistics activities.
Sustainable logistics network and green transport. Design and management of green logistics networks. The role of transport in greening logistics networks and types of sustainable transport solutions. Cost, service and sustainability performance. Sustainability performance quantification.
Green warehousing. Energy-efficient solutions for warehousing. Best practices and impacts on corporate performance. Assessment of the environmental impact of logistics sites. Systems for monitoring green performances (e.g. ‘Green IT’).
Sustainability strategies for city logistics and last mile deliveries. Innovative last mile delivery solutions. Impacts on efficiency, effectiveness and environmental sustainability. City logistics networks. Crowdsourcing logistics in urban environment. Relationship between service level and sustainability.
New models of collaboration towards sustainability. Collaborative practices. The role of logistics service providers (LSPs) in improving sustainability.
The impact of logistics on social sustainability. Logistics solutions for reducing food waste.
Innovation in logistics and sustainability implications. B2c eCommerce. Sustainable packaging. Reverse Logistics. Logistics 4.0 and sustainability.
The Green Logistics course leverages the following teaching methodologies:
Theoretical lessons, i.e. “traditional” lessons to provide the students with both a deep knowledge on green logistics systems/processes and criteria, methods and tools to design and manage sustainable logistics systems (ILOs 1, 2)
Practical lessons, i.e. lessons going through structured exercises to let the students apply what has learnt been during the theoretical lessons (ILO 2)
Seminars, i.e. lectures given by external guests (top managers from multinational companies and international experts) to provide the students with strong connections with the real applications of what has been learnt during the lessons (ILOs 1, 2, 3)

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
The final exam consists of a written examination (mandatory) and a group assignment (optional/on a voluntary basis).
Written exam
The written exam is individual and structured into:
Theoretical Questions: open questions where the students have to be able to both present/describe green logistics strategies/solutions and apply them to specific contexts/problems (ILOs 1, 2, 3)
Quantitative Exercises: practical exercises with numbers where students are required to apply the methods learnt during the course (ILOs 1, 2)
Group assignment
The group assignment is optional (not mandatory) and can be carried out in small groups. It consists of a real business case to be discussed in terms of as-is process analysis and identification/ proposal of logistics strategies and solutions for improving the overall sustainability performance. The evaluation of the assignment is between 0-3 points to be added to the final mark of the written exam (ILOs 1, 2, 3).
The teaching material consists of: (i) a set of slides supporting the in-class lectures; (ii) practical lessons/exercises; (iii) selected references (e.g. selection of papers and book chapters). All the material will be available before the related lesson on WeBeep.

A. McKinnon, M. Browne, M. Piecyk, A. Whiteing, Green logistics: improving the environmental sustainability of logistics, Editore: Kogan Page, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-0749471859
D.B. Grant, A. Trautrims, C.Y. Wong, Sustainable logistics and supply chain management: principles and practices for sustainable operations and management, Editore: Kogan Page, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-0749468668

LASER AD ALTA INTENSITA' PER APPLICAZIONI NUCLEARI E FISICHE I L'insegnamento si propone di fornire innanzitutto una solida conoscenza sui laser e sulle proprietà dei fasci laser, con particolare attenzione agli aspetti legati al regime ad alta intensità. Argomenti (in sintesi): richiami di elettromagnetismo; risonatori e fasci gaussiani; assorbimento, decadimento spontaneo, emissione stimolata della luce; regime continuo e impulsato dei laser; materiali attivi per alte energie.

The Aim of the course is threefold:
(i) to introduce the student to the theoretical foundations and main applications of integrated optics;
(ii) to provide the student with a set of advanced tools and methods for the design and quantitative description of photonic components and devices;
(iii) to give the student the theoretical basis for the understanding of highly innovative topics in modern photonics.

Knowledge and understanding (DD1)
The student understands the physical basis of guided wave optics and of the optical phenomena taking place at the microscale.
The student knows the guidelines for the modelling and design of integrated photonic devices.
The student is aware of the key functionalities implemented in i ntegrated photonics.
Apply knowledge and understanding (DD2)
The student is capable to retrieve the analytical solution of standard problems in integrated and telecom optics and guided-wave photonics
The st udent is capable to draft a quantitative design of integrated photonic devices (couplers, filters, multiplexers and demultiplexers) that fulfil given target specifications.
The student has basic experimental training to couple light into an optical fibre and to measure fibre dispersion.
Making judgements (DD3)
The student has the ability to understand the operating principles of integrated photonic devices and to discuss the validity limits of the models used for their description.
The student is aware of the key functionalities implemented in integrated photonics.
Given a specific optical functionality readily implemented in the market or under development, the student is able to identify the operating principles and evaluate the potential impact of integrated photonics technologies in the field.
The student is capable to perform comparative analysis of different approaches in Integrated Photonics to the achievement of a given optical functionality.
Lifelong learning skills (DD5)
The student knows the theoretical foundations and masters a set of analytical and numerical tools in advanced photonics, for the quantitative description and design of novel optical components in a variety of configurations.
The student is capable of understanding new trends in the high-tech market dealing with advanced photonic structures.
The student is capable of autonomously learning the operating principles of novel photonic devices based on guided wave optics configurations.

Introduction to guided wave optics. The symmetric dielectric slab waveguide. Analytical derivation of the propagation constants and electromagnetic field distributions of guided modes. The characteristic mode equation: physical interpretation and graphical solution. Orthogonality and completeness properties of guided and radiation modes. Extension of the analysis to channel optical waveguides.
Introduction to optical communication systems. Historical evolution. Introductory concepts: analog and digital transmission, multiplexing techniques, modulation formats. Layout of an optical communication system: topology, design criteria, integrated optical devices. Analysis of the bit-error-rate as a function of the main noise system sources. Communication systems limited by attenuation and dispersion.
Integrated optical devices: couplers and power splitters. Coupled mode theory. Transfer matrix of the directional coupler. Functional analysis of the directional coupler as a 3-dB coupler, as a frequency filter and as an optical switch. Other types of couplers and beam splitters: the bifurcation, the multimode interference coupler, the star coupler.
Optical filters in integrated optics. FIR (Finite Impulse Response) and IIR (Infinite Impulse Response) filters. General spectral properties of filters. Mach-Zehnder interferometer: spectral response and engineering guidelines. The Arrayed Waveguide Grating (AWG): operation principle, transfer function, engineering guidelines. Functional analysis of the AWG as a de/multiplexer, as a router and as a reconfigurable add-drop filter. Ring resonant filter: transfer function and main features.
Electro-optic intensity modulators. The electro-optic effect: basic principles. X-cut and Z-cut lithium niobate modulators. Lumped and travelling electrodes. Bandwidth limitations. Integrated optical intensity modulators: architectures (Mach-Zehnder interferometer, directional coupler, deltabeta-reversed directional coupler) and performance. Comparison with bulk modulators.
Recent advances in the field of optical communications. DPSK modulation formats: signal to noise ratio and architecture of transmitters and receivers. Coherent detection and digital signal processing for multi-level transmission formats and dispersion compensation.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Written examination, optionally followed by an oral examination.
The written exam consists of 2 open questions to be addressed in 1 hour and 30 minutes. At the discretion of the student, the written text is followed by an oral test. The aim is to ascertain:
the understanding of the physical basis of guided optical phenomena (DD1);
the capability to illustrate in a logical, clear and exhaustive fashion the behaviour of the studied phenomena (DD1);
the knowledge of the definitions and general concepts dealing with optical waveguides and integrated optics telecom components (DD1 and DD5);
the capability to design and model a photonic device that fulfils given specifications by quantitative assessment of its main geometrical and optical parameters (DD2);
the capability to discuss, both qualitatively and quantitatively, the performance of prototypal integrated photonics devices as a function of their key parameters (DD3 and DD5).

Notes of the course https://webeep.polimi.it/course/view.php?id=14006
G. P. Agrawal, Fiber-Optic Communication Systems, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, (IV Ed.), Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 987-0-470-50511-3

The goal of the course is to provide students with knowledge to tackle the challenges and to assess the benefits of integrating renewable energy sources with nuclear to effectively support the transition towards a carbon-neutral power grid.
The aim of this module is to provide a general overview of the role of nuclear energy in carbon neutral scenario, highlighting the benefit and challenges of the presence of the nuclear option in the energy mix. The module will focus on the technical aspects of the integration among advanced nuclear plants, renewable energy sources, storage solutions, enhanced grid networks, load-shifting, and flexible backup options.
This module will focus on the use of Modelica code for the modelling and the technical evaluation of the integrated energy systems for the project work.

The students will know and comprehend:
The challenges of the transitions towards a carbon-neutral world and the implications on the power grid
The features of the integration among the different low carbon energy sources
The characteristics of the nuclear reactor concepts for hybrid systems (e.g., Small Modular Reactors and Generation-IV reactors) and the technical challenges from a control and safety point of view
The students will be able to:
Analyze needs and address the challenges of power generation planning and dispatchment in the green energy transition
Use and develop models for the study of low carbon energy sources
Perform a simplified techno-economic analysis of systems characterized by the presence of advanced nuclear reactors, renewables power plant, storage and other components
Exhibit fluency in technical communications with use of accurate scientific terminology.

Introduction to nuclear technology for integrated systems: basic principles of nuclear power plant production with a particular focus to the most promising concepts to be used in the integration with renewables (e.g., Small Modular Reactors and Generation-IV reactors), key plant components involved in the integration with other energy sources and their interface with the electrical grid.
Role of nuclear energy in the energy mix: base load, load-following and frequency control, GHG emissions, environmental footprint and grid stability. Non electrical applications: hydrogen production, district heating, thermal storage, desalination.
Nuclear technical challenges for the integration: principles and goals of nuclear safety, impact of the integration on safety, analysis of the daily regulation on the main power plant parameters, control issues coming from the integration with non-programmable renewable energy sources.
Fundamentals of electricity market: forward/short term market, formation of market price, wholesale market models, zonal vs nodal market, ancillary service & balancing market, capacity market.
Seminar from experts coming from industry, research center and intergovernmental agencies (OECD/NEA, IAEA, …): outlook on the current worldwide situation toward the decarbonization and role of the nuclear/renewable integration.
Techno-economic analysis of a real-world case: use of Modelica language to analyze feasibility and impact of the low-carbon sources integration.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation consists in an oral examination aimed at verifying the knowledge of the course topics. In particular, the ability to explain the current challenges of the transition towards a carbon-neutral power grid, the ability in analyzing the problem with the proper tools – both from the technical and economic point of view - and the capacity to understand and comment the outcomes of the models are tested and evaluated. In addition, the examination requires also the preparation and the discussion of a scientific report regarding the real-world study case analyzed in the project work. The report should be prepared in advance and sent at least one week before the oral examination.

This soft-skills course aims to introduce foreign students to the fundamentals of Italian culture within the broader context of European history and culture. The course is divided in two units.
In Unit 1 (3 credits) students will learn about the main events in the history of Europe and Italy and about their socio-cultural implications, with special attention to contemporary issues. Students will also learn about key artistic and literary movements within this broad historical context.
In Unit 2 (2 credits), the focus will be on Italian contemporary literature, focusing on the potential intersection of literary research with pressing contemporary issues, such as ecology, mental health, and human and civil rights.
The goal of the course is to provide students with a deeper understanding of the social and cultural context in which they are studying and living and in which they might work in the future. Given the variety of topics and subjects, which will span art, literature and cinema, lectures will make considerable use of multimodal resources.

At the end of the course students will have developed an understanding of Europe's and Italy's cultural past and present, and will be able to use these competences to interpret current socio-cultural issues. A special focus on Italian history of the 19th-20th centuries will enable students to understand Italy’s cultural landscape and the basic structure of Italian society. They will also be able to understand and appreciate cultural artefacts in a culturally competent manner.
In Unit 2, the course will explore Italian contemporary literature, using debates and literary objects as a way to face pressing contemporary issues, such as ecology, mental health, and human and civil rights.
During the course, team-work will be frequently used to improve students' communication skills, especially in relation to topics they are not familiar with, from both a disciplinary and cultural viewpoint. Most lectures include an analysis of a specific cultural object: students will learn to apply analytical techniques to a variety of artefacts, and will eventually be able to use them autonomously. At the end of the course, students will be able to discuss in detail a single cultural object, discussing and assessing its main historical and formal features.

Unit 1 (3 credits)
A first series of lectures will focus on European history, from Ancient Grece up to the 19 th century; by learning about the foundations of European civilisation, focusing especially on its early times, international students will gain a better understanding of the contemporary western world. This historical background is a prerequisite for approaching the study of culture: the course will deal with the fundamentals of western literature, religion, art and cultural imaginaries. Moreover, the historical part will provide an overview of contemporary Europe both as an institution and a cultural entity.
The second part of this Unit is mainly dedicated to Modern Italy. Lectures will mainly deal with the history of Italy from unification (1861) to the present day. Students will have an opportunity to discuss crucial cultural problems, spanning politics, literature, cinema and local customs. Special attention will be paid to social imaginaries and narratives, which will be used as an entry point for a critical approach to the investigation of identities and cultural trends.
Unit 2 (2 credits)
In the second part, the course will explore Italian literature—with forays into cinema and the arts—focusing particularly on the thematic aspects of the reflections of major authors: Calvino’s ecological anxieties, Primo Levi’s unique blend of science and literary inquiry, and the distinct ways Ginzburg and Morante retell History. In short, the second part of the course will provide an opportunity to delve deeper into events and themes highlighted in the first part, using different approaches and languages.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The examination for 5-credit students is composed of three parts: a group presentation, a written test about unit 1 and an interview about the contents of the whole syllabus.
3-credit students will give the group presentation and sit the written test about unit 1 or, alternatively, an oral interview about the sylllabus of the same unit.
Attending students will study the content of the lectures based on the power point presentations and other materials uploaded on Beep, as well as on the compulsory references books (see references section). In gr
Non-attending students will study the recordings of the lectures, the power point presentations, the compulsory reference books and the other materials uploaded on Beep. Additionally, they are required to read the book Modern Italy. A Very Short Introduction by Anna Cento Bull (see references section).

Ernst Hans Gombrich, A Little History of the World, Editore: Yale University Press, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-0-300-14332-4
Christopher Duggan, A Coincise History of Italy, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-0-521-74743-1
Note: Second Edition
Anna Cento Bull, Modern Italy. A Very Short Introduction, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-0-19-872651-7
Jeremy Black, A Brief History of Italy, Editore: Robinson, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-1-47214-088-3
John Foot, Modern Italy, Editore: Palgrave Macmillan, Anno edizione: 2003, ISBN: 978-0-333-66905-1
Zygmunt G. Baranski, Rebecca J. West, The Cambridge Companion to Modern Italian Culture, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 9780521559829

L’insegnamento propone agli studenti lezioni laboratoriali su tematiche selezionate inerenti alla corrosione e protezione dei materiali metallici.
Obiettivo dell’insegnamento è fornire un approccio sperimentale-laboratoriale allo studio della corrosione dei metalli e sua prevenzione, affiancandosi e consolidando le conoscenze teoriche e fenomenologiche già in possesso dagli studenti. Particolare importanza sarà data non solo all’esecuzione diretta delle attività esperienziali ma soprattutto all’interpretazione razionale delle misure effettuate e alla capacità di rielaborare l’esperienza. L’attività laboratoriale sarà svolta dagli studenti singolarmente o in piccoli gruppi sotto la guida del docente e sarà accompagnata da lezioni introduttive di didattica frontale.

Le lezioni e le attività sperimentali previste consentiranno allo studente di (DdD 1 e DdD 2):
comprendere il meccanismo della corrosione a umido dei metalli, gli aspetti termodinamici e cinetici con l’ausilio di misure sperimentali
conoscere e utilizzare la strumentazione fondamentale per misure di indagine del comportamento a corrosione dei metalli (potenziale e corrente)
essere in grado di determinare la velocità di corrosione e i parametri cinetici ottenuti da prove elettrochimiche di caratterizzazione del comportamento a corrosione
comprendere gli aspetti chiave delle forme di corrosione attese nei diversi ambienti naturali (es. terreno, acque, atmosfera) e industriali mediante l’esecuzione e l’interpretazione di misure sperimentali
essere in grado di stimare la corrosività di un ambiente nei confronti dei metalli e conseguentemente individuare il corretto sistema di protezione
applicare le conoscenze acquisite sulle tecniche di monitoraggio per l'individuazione di forme di corrosione e valutazione dell'efficacia dei sistemi di protezione

L’insegnamento è organizzato in lezioni di didattica frontale e sperimentale-laboratoriale. Le lezioni frontali hanno lo scopo di richiamare i concetti di corrosione dei materiali metallici e di contestualizzare le esperienze laboratoriali. L'attività sperimentale di laboratorio è finalizzata all'applicazione dei concetti e delle metodologie esposte dal docente.
Gli argomenti trattati sono i seguenti (tra parentesi le attività di laboratorio previste):
meccanismo elettrochimico di corrosione (esperienza di Evans)
misura del potenziale e della corrente, elettrodi di riferimento (funzionamento del voltmetro, misura di corrente con amperometro e indiretta, convenzioni di misura, verifica del potenziale di elettrodi di riferimento e conversione della misura)
potenziale di corrosione (misura del potenziale di corrosione libera di metalli in diversi ambienti e interpretazione delle misure con i diagrammi di Evans)
cinetica di corrosione: curve caratteristiche anodiche e catodiche, legge di Tafel, spettroscopia d'impedenza elettrochimica (potenziostato e cella elettrochimica, metodi di prova sperimentali per l’ottenimento di parametri cinetici di corrosione, resistenza di polarizzazione lineare, curve di polarizzazione su metalli attivi e passivi, calcolo della velocità di corrosione, misura di impedenza elettrochimica)
forme di corrosione (accoppiamento galvanico: effetto del lavoro motore e della resistività dell’ambiente, rapporto tra le aree, misura delle cadute ohmiche; corrosione per vaiolatura e in fessura: misura del potenziale di pitting, prove standard di valutazione del comportamento degli acciai inossidabili in presenza di fessure; cenni a prove per la valutazione della resistenza a corrosione intergranulare e tensocorrosione)
valutazione e analisi dello stato di corrosione mediante tecniche di indagine di microscopica ottica e elettronica, analisi dei prodotti di corrosione (prove da eseguire su provini utilizzati durante il corso, esempi tratti da failure analysis)
corrosione in diversi ambienti (corrosione nei terreni: misura della resistività di un terreno, corrosione per aerazione differenziale, corrosione da interferenza elettrica e suo monitoraggio; corrosione in atmosfera: approcci numerici e prove di esposizione; corrosione nelle acque: prove di esposizione di materiali metallici in soluzioni acquose a diverso pH e salinità; corrosione del calcestruzzo: mappatura del potenziale e individuazione aree corrose, corrosione da carbonatazione e test alla fenolftaleina)
protezione catodica nel terreno (sistema a corrente impressa: il generatore, misura del potenziale, efficienza di un rivestimento, interferenze elettriche, verifica di un giunto isolante, tecnica on-off e sonde di potenziale)
protezione catodica in acqua di mare (sistema ad anodo galvanico, funzionamento e reazioni in un sistema a corrente impressa)
prove specifiche su altri metodi di protezione dalla corrosione (es. rivestimenti e anodizzazione, protezione anodica degli acciai inossidabili)
durante la durata dell’insegnamento, gli studenti prepareranno e monitoreranno periodicamente prove di esposizione a lungo termine di leghe ferrose e non ferrose in ambienti naturali e industriali riprodotti (acque a diversa salinità e pH, atmosfera, terreno).

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
La preparazione conseguita dallo studente sarà valutata mediante prova scritta. Con la prova scritta lo studente può ottenere un voto massimo di 32/30 (30 più lode). La prova orale è facoltativa, può essere sostenuta solo dopo una prova scritta con esito positivo (minimo 18/30) e dovrà essere svolta prima del successivo appello ufficiale. Con la prova orale si può ottenere un incremento massimo di 3 punti del voto dello scritto. Se l'orale non è soddisfacente il voto finale potrà subire un decremento.
La prova scritta è organizzata in tre sezioni: domande di teoria a risposta chiusa (scelta della risposta corretta tra quattro possibili alternative), domanda aperta e esercizi numerici. Tutte le sezioni sono mirate a verificare che lo studente abbia appreso le conoscenze teoriche e pratiche fornite nell’insegnamento, con particolare riferimento alla comprensione del meccanismo di corrosione, gli aspetti termodinamici e cinetici, le forme di corrosione e le tecniche di protezione in diversi ambienti. L’apprendimento sarà verificato ad ampio spettro, dalla conoscenza dei principi delle tecniche di indagine all’interpretazione ingegneristica delle misure sperimentali. In particolare, gli esercizi numerici hanno l'obiettivo di valutare la capacità dello studente di comprendere e interpretare misure sperimentali di corrosione e protezione, analoghe a quelle effettuate durante le attività laboratoriali.
Durante la prova orale (facoltativa) sarà valutata la comprensione e la capacità di rielaborazione delle conoscenze fornite allo studente durante insegnamento.
Data la natura laboratoriale dell'insegnamento, è fortemente raccomandata la presenza ad almeno il 75% delle attività didattiche di laboratorio.

a cura del docente, Slides delle lezioni dell'insegnamento
Note: Materiale fornito su canale Beep dell'insegnamento
a cura del docente, Schede di laboratorio
Note: Schede fornite settimanalmente dal docente con creazione in itinere di un quaderno di laboratorio
P. Pedeferri, Corrosion Science and Engineering, Editore: Springer International Publishing, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 9783319976242
Note: Disponibile anche come e-book. Libro in lingua inglese
P. Pedeferri, Corrosione e protezione dei materiali metallici Vol. 1-2, Editore: Polipress, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 9788873980612
Note: Libro in lingua italiana
D. A. Jones, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Editore: Pearson Higher Ed USA, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 9781292042558

Organic coatings are everywhere: they protect infrastructure, vehicles, industrial components, furniture, and consumer products, while also providing colour, gloss, texture, and functionality. Designing a coating, however, is not only a matter of choosing a polymer. It requires balancing formulation chemistry, sustainability constraints, application technology, curing conditions, substrate interactions, and final performance. The organic coatings industry is also undergoing a rapid transformation driven by sustainability requirements, stricter environmental regulations, and the need for high-performance protective and functional surfaces. In this context, innovative coating formulations must combine reduced environmental impact with reliable film performance, durability, processability, and aesthetic quality.
Laboratory of Advanced Organic Coatings is a laboratory-driven course in coatings science and surface engineering. It combines chemistry, physics, formulation principles, coating application technologies, curing mechanisms, characterization methods, and industrial problem-solving to understand how protective and functional organic films are designed, processed, and qualified.
Through an integrated sequence of lectures, laboratory sessions, and project - based activities, students will work progressively on coating systems, collect and interpret experimental data, identify defects and failure mechanisms, and make evidence-based technical decisions. Particular attention will be devoted to sustainable coating systems, including high-solid, waterborne, UV-curable, and solvent-free formulations, as well as to the relationship between formulation, processing conditions, film formation, and final properties, and to the replacement of substances of concern without compromising processability and performance.
Industrial seminars, company visits, and interactions with coating professionals will connect the scientific foundations of the course with current challenges in formulation development, surface protection, and sustainable coating manufacturing.

After completing the course, students will be able to:
explain how binders, pigments, fillers, solvents, reactive diluents, and additives determine coating processability and film performance (Dublin descriptor 1, DD1);
connect substrate preparation, formulation rheology, application method, curing conditions, and final coating properties (DD1);
select appropriate coating and curing technologies for specific substrates and industrial performance requirements (DD2);
design and carry out laboratory tests for wettability, rheology, UV-curing kinetics, film thickness, hardness, solvent resistance, colour stability, and adhesion (DD2);
diagnose coating defects and failure mechanisms by combining experimental observations with scientific and technical evidence (DD2);
critically assess sustainable reformulation strategies, considering both hazard reduction and preservation of the original technical function (DD2-DD3);
interpret non-ideal or inconsistent experimental data and propose suitable verification tests or corrective actions (DD2-DD3);
communicate laboratory results and formulation decisions in clear scientific and technical language, both in written laboratory reports and oral presentations (DD4).

Topic 1 – From ingredients to coating performance Binders, solvents, pigments, fillers, additives, regulatory and sustainability constraints.
Topic 2 – Coating chemistries and sustainable technologies Conventional, high-solid, waterborne, UV-curable, and powder coating systems.
Topic 3 – Film formation and curing Physical drying, chemical crosslinking, thermal and radiation curing.
Topic 4 – Formulation–process–property relationships Rheology, crosslink density, film defects, durability, and performance.
Topic 5 – Coating application technologies Spin, dip, bar, roll, and spray coating; process selection and scale-up considerations.
Topic 6 – Coating Characterization Wettability, hardness, solvent resistance, colour, adhesion, and weathering.
Laboratory activities Six connected laboratory sessions will guide students through a complete coating development and qualification workflow. Students will investigate and assess:
surface wettability and plasma activation;
rheological behaviour and processability;
UV-curing kinetics and cure schedule definition;
coating deposition and thickness control;
performance tests, including hardness, solvent resistance, and colour stability;
adhesion by pull-off tests.
The laboratory work will require students to collect data, complete worksheets/reports, interpret results, and justify technical choices based on experimental evidence. Selected experimental results may also be discussed in guided AI-assisted troubleshooting exercises, in which AI-generated hypotheses are critically assessed against experimental evidence and scientific principles.
Project activity Students will also complete a small-group industrial case study focused on the sustainable reformulation of an organic coating. The activity will require students to identify the function of formulation ingredients, assess substances of concern, propose technically realistic alternatives, and predict the effects of substitution. The work will be supported, whenever possible, by interaction with industrial experts and will culminate in a technical presentation and discussion.
Additional bibliographic material, technical documents, standards, scientific papers, and industrial case studies will be provided during the course.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Altro
The assessment is based on laboratory activities, group project work, in-class participation, and a final oral examination.
During the semester, students will carry out laboratory activities in small groups. Participation in at least 4 out of 6 laboratory sessions is mandatory to access the final examination. For each laboratory activity, students will submit a short worksheet or report including experimental data, observations, interpretation, and conclusions.
The laboratory reports will contribute to the final grade and will be evaluated based on completeness, data quality, interpretation of results, critical discussion, and clarity of technical communication.
Interactive activities will be carried out during lectures, including Wooclap quizzes. These activities will contribute to the final grade.
The project activity will be developed in small groups and will lead to a final presentation. The project will be evaluated based on the quality of the technical analysis, use of evidence, formulation of reasoning, feasibility of the proposed solutions, and clarity of communication.
The final evaluation includes:
discussion of the group project;
oral questions on the topics covered in lectures;
discussion of the laboratory activities/tests and their scientific background.
Students are expected to demonstrate the ability to connect theoretical concepts with experimental results and to communicate coating-related knowledge using appropriate scientific and technical language.

A. R. Marrion, The Chemistry and Physics of Coatings, Editore: RSC, Anno edizione: 2004
R. Schawalm,, UV Coatings, Basics, Recent developments and New Applications,, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2007 https://www.sciencedirect.com/book/monograph/9780444529794/uv-coatings
Note: To access electronic resources from locations outside the university, the Proxy service needs to be set up
Frank N. Jones, Mark E. Nichols, Socrates Peter Pappas, Organic Coatings: Science and Technology, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 9781119026891 https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/book/10.1002/9781119337201
Classroom presentations and other bibliographic materials will be available on Beep
Arthur Goldsmidt Hans-Joachim Streitberger, BASF Handbook on basics of coating technology,, Editore: Basf Coatings AG, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 3-86630-903-1
Note: One updated edition exists

The course combines lectures and practical laboratory sessions and aims to provide students with the fundamentals of bio-nanomaterials engineering through supramolecular design, with a focus on their use as functional materials and devices for advanced applications.
Different building blocks, ranging from biopolymers to metal nanoscale systems, will be introduced during the lectures and employed in the laboratory, to prepare functional bio- and nanomaterials including nanoparticles, nanoclusters, gels, films. The module will provide a research-oriented overview of the current state of the art in supramolecular and self-assembled systems, while also addressing the sustainability and circularity aspects of these materials. The course will cover the chemical principles underlying the design of bio-nanomaterials, highlighting the key role of self-assembly processes in the construction of the functional materials discussed during the lectures and prepared in the laboratory activities.
Insights into the characterization of the bio- and nanomaterials described in the course via scattering and microscopy techniques will also be provided.

After having successfully completed this course and the final examination the student will achieve:
Understanding of the role of non-covalent interactions and external stimuli in the formation of functional bio-nanomaterials (DdD1)
Knowing the role of supramolecular events in nature, materials science and nanotechnology (DdD1)
Comprehension of structure-function relationship for self-assembled bio-nanomaterials (DdD1)
Ability to identify suitable techniques for bio-nanomaterials characterization in relation to their size and composition (DdD2)
Ability to define the needed features of a bio-nanomaterial for a specific application (DdD2)

• Nanomaterials via supramolecolar design: peptide-based, lipid and polymeric nanoparticles and their applications in the biomedical field.
• Bio-nanointerface: biological barriers for nanomaterials and their interaction with living matter. Biorelevant fluids. Protein, lung and gut coronas.
• Metal nanostructures: nanoclusters, nanoparticles and their self-assembly. Chiral plasmonics. Biosensing, optical and catalytic applications.
• Bio-nanomaterials from sustainable sources: waste(s) and wood as sources of valuable building blocks. Circularity of nanomaterials.
• Cellulose: nanocrystals and nanofibrils and their applications.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam includes the evaluation of a research proposal prepared during the course (project activities), followed by an oral discussion about related topics presented during the lectures/laboratory activities.
The student must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the course topics, with related hypotheses, critical points, chemical and physical meaning in the context of bio-nanomaterials design.

The aim of the course is to provide the students with the fundamental knowledge in the field of low-temperature, technologically relevant plasmas. Particular emphasis is placed on their applications in the field of material engineering and nuclear engineering, such the synthesis of coatings and nanostructures, surface micro- and nano-strutturing, laser-plasma radiation sources and plasma-wall interaction for nuclear fusion research. The course is characterized by a modular structure and a learn-by-doing approach. Each module has curricular laboratory sessions in which the students will put in action their knowledge by means of experimental and/or computational activities. Moreover, a laboratory project will be assigned as the conclusive part of the course: the students, arranged in teams, will design and carry out an experimental campaign dealing with one of the topics presented during the course.

At the end of the course the student:

• Knows and understands the principles of plasma physics, with particular reference to low-temperature and technologically-relevant plasmas, and their applications in science and engineering (DdD1)
• Knows and understands the main properties of laboratory plasmas, with particular reference to the cases discussed during the course (DdD1)
• Is able to apply the acquired knowledge to understand, describe and model the behavior of physical systems in which low-temperature and technologically relevant plasmas are involved (DdD2)
• Is able to design, perform and interpret simple plasma physics experiment and is able to communicate the results in the form of a research paper (DdD2)

The course is organized into 5 modules plus a Project Laboratory.
1) Basic concepts
The course will start with a pre-assessment to gauge the students' previous knowledge and identify any knowledge gaps or misconceptions. Given the diverse background of the students, innovative didactic strategies will be employed, such as “flipped classroom” (with learning material provided by the teacher) and “peer teaching” in working groups. Topics that will be covered include: plasma definition, approaches to describe a plasma (kinetic, multi-fluid, single fluid), characteristic plasma parameters, Debye shielding and sheath-effect, transport of particles and electromagnetic waves in plasmas, optical emission and absorption in a plasma. Special attention is given to dimensional analysis as a powerful tool for grasping the physical foundations of the topics presented.
2) Plasma discharges
This module deals with the phenomenon of plasma discharges and their applications. Frontal lectures will be accompanied by experimental laboratory activities with a glow discharge apparatus. Topics include: collisional ionization, Townsend avalanche, Paschen’s law, DC glow discharge, and an overview of other discharge modes (arc discharge, Dielectric Barrier Discharge, AC discharges, wave-sustained discharge). Applications to medicine and space propulsion can also be discussed, according to students' interests.
3) Plasma-material interaction
This module covers the interactions of plasmas with surfaces, as well as the effects on plasma-exposed materials and the resulting applications. Experimental lab activities will be carried out at the Istituto di Scienza e Tecnologia dei Plasmi (ISTP-CNR Bicocca). Topics include: plasma-surface interactions, plasma sheaths, plasma induced physical processes and sputtering, plasma induced chemical processes, surface functionalization, plasma cleaning, plasma-material interaction in nuclear fusion machines.
4) Laser-generated plasmas
This module provides an overview on laser-plasma interaction in different regimes of laser intensity and relative applications. Frontal lectures will be accompanied by experimental and computational laboratory activities. Topics include: laser-plasma coupling, electromagnetic ionization mechanisms, laser-induced breakdown spectroscopy, laser cleaning, laser-based plasma diagnostics, radiation sources by laser-plasma interaction (electrons, hadrons, high-energy photons).
5) Plasma-based deposition
This module focuses on the deposition of thin films, coatings and nanostructures with controlled properties exploiting plasma-based techniques. Frontal lectures will be accompanied by experimental laboratory activities with Pulsed Laser Deposition and Magnetron Sputtering deposition.
Topics include: plasma assisted physical- and chemical-vapour deposition. Physical vapour deposition. Magnetron sputtering, unbalanced and closed-field sputtering, high-power impulse magnetron sputtering. Pulsed Laser Deposition (PLD): nanosecond- and femtosecond-PLD. Application of coating produced by Physical Vapour Depostion in nuclear fusion and particle acceleration.
6) Laboratory project
Students will be organized in working groups according to their interests and background. In the last part of the semester, each group will develop a project associated to the topics covered in one of the modulus from 2 to 5. The project should focus on a research question proposed by the teacher. Each group, under the teacher’s supervision, will develop a plan to address the research question by means of an experimental (or computational) approach, will carry out the required activities and will deliver a final report, that will be part of the evaluation process. Dedicated sessions of mentoring and review of the projects are foreseen.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
Continuous evaluation and self evaluation activities are carried out during the semester. In particular, short group assignments are associated to each curricular laboratory. Although homework assignments are optional, a good overall performance in these tasks positively affects the final grade.
The final evaluation consists in an oral examination to assess student’s overall knowledge of the course topics, their understanding of relevant physical phenomena, and their problem solving skills especially when facing novel/unfamiliar situations. The report about the group laboratory project (module 6) will be a topic of discussion during the oral examination, also to ascertain the individual contribution and the degree of autonomy of each group member. The ability to organize knowledge discursively, the proficiency in the use of specialized vocabulary, and the effectiveness of written and oral presentation are also evaluated.

Alexander Piel, An introduction to laboratory, space, and fusion plasmas, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-3319634258
R. Hippler, S. Pfau, M. Schmidt, K. H. Schoenbach, Low Temperature Plasma Physics, Editore: Wiley-VCH, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 3-527-28887-2
U.S. Inan, M. Golkowski, Principles of Plasma Physics for Engineers and Scientists, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-0-521-19372-6
Michael A. Lieberman, Allan J. Lichtenberg, Principles of Plasma Discharges and Materials Processing, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Anno edizione: 2005, ISBN: 9780471720010 DOI:10.1002/0471724254
M. Ohring, Materials Science of Thin Films, Editore: Academic Press, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 0-12-524975-6
Leon J. Radziemski, Lasers-Induced Plasmas and Applications, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 9781003066200
ZAVELANI-ROSSI, VISMARRA, High-Intensity Lasers for Nuclear and Physical Applications, Editore: Esculapio, ISBN: 9788893852463
Andrea Macchi, Appunti su Scariche di Plasma per Applicazioni Tecnologiche, Anno edizione: 2011
Note: Lecture notes in italian, provided by the teacher
Paolo Maria Ossi, Plasmi per superfici, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-8873980261
Note: Textbook in Italian

The course is focused on the Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) methodology.
The aim is twofold: to introduce students to the theoretical fundamentals of the methodology and then to apply them to evaluate the environmental sustainability of materials and industrial processes.
A significant portion of the course will be devoted to applying the LCA methodology to representative real-life cases, mainly taken from chemical, food, and materials industries.
The course is organised as a computer laboratory. The open-source software, OpenLCA, is the tool adopted.
Lectures will be held in classrooms with electrical connections at every desk, and students are required to bring their own laptop computer.

Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to:
explain the principles and methodological framework of Life Cycle Assessment (DdD1);
use OpenLCA software to perform Life Cycle Assessment studies (DdD2);
select appropriate environmental impact assessment methods and indicators for different assessment goals (DdD2);
apply the LCA methodology to simplified industrial case studies (DdD2);
interpret and critically discuss the results of Life Cycle Assessment studies (DdD2);
critically interpret and evaluate published LCA studies (DdD3).

Sustainability assessment: introductory concepts.
Fundamentals of Life Cycle Thinking (LCT) and Life Cycle Management (LCM)
Life Cycle Assessment (LCA): historical background, ISO standards, procedures, applications, data quality and data sources.
Eco-indicators: measurement methods, environmental and damage impact categories, impact quantification; carbon footprint and climate change.
Materials End-of-Life: open and closed-loop recycling, re-use, waste-to-energy, waste-to-materials, waste-to-chemicals, waste management processes.
Use of the software OpenLCA

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The final assessment consists solely of a written examination, organised in two sections:
Part A: closed questions on theory fundamentals and one case study (half an hour)
Part B: numerical application of the LCA methodology to a simplified case study using the software OpenLCA (2 hours)
The final grade (maximum 33 points) is obtained by combining the scores of Part A (maximum 9 points) and Part B (maximum 24 points). Final grades are then converted to the Italian grading scale, with scores strictly higher than 31.5 awarded 30 cum Laude.
The test will last two and a half hours, with a short 15-minute interval between Part A and Part B.
Part A consists of multiple-choice questions and short-answer questions covering theoretical concepts and one simplified case study. During Part A, no electronic support or any other type of support is allowed.
In Part B, students will perform a simplified Life Cycle Assessment using OpenLCA and answer quantitative questions based on the obtained results. During Part B, students must use their own notebook computer. Printed notes, textbooks and other reference materials are permitted. Students may access online resources during Part B. Mobile phones are not allowed.
There is no limit to the number of examination sessions students may take, and there is no oral examination.
At the end of the course, students may take a voluntary mock examination under exam conditions. The simulation replicates the structure and timing of the official examination and offers an opportunity for self-assessment.
Students are required to bring their own notebook computer for the practical laboratory sessions and for Part B of the final examination.

Walter Klopffer and Birgit Grahl, Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) - A Guide to Best Practice, Editore: Wiley-VCH, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-3-527-32986-1
Note: Textbook available in the Polimi library as e-book
Michael Z. Hauschild Ralph K. Rosenbaum Stig Irving Olsen, Life Cycle Assessment Theory and Practice, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-3-319-56474-6 DOI 10.1007/978-3-319-56475-3
Reinout Heijungs - Sangwon Suh, The Computational Structure of Life Cycle Assessment, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 978-94-015-9900-9

The objective of the course is to develop skills in lightweight design, a special branch of optimum design. Students will gain competencies on design methods and modelling tools (also using the Finite Element Method) for structures and components to be designed to achieve minimum mass while satisfying performance requirements (usually stiffness and strength), with a special focus on design with composite materials.

By the end of the course, students will acquire theoretical and practical skills according to the following learning objectives.
In terms of acquired knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:
Define lightweight design problems and, in general, structural optimization problems
Identify the design constraints
Solve the lightweight design problem
Interpret and discuss the results
Concerning the ability to apply the acquired knowledge and understanding, students will be able to:
critically, independently and creatively solve lightweight design and, in general, structural optimization problems
apply the concepts of optimization to mechanical design
Through autonomous individual design activity, students will also acquire the skills to formulate a judgment, meaning to analyse the structure and to select autonomously the correct design requirements, on the basis of a limited set of input information. Furthermore, students will gain the ability to autonomously design lightweight and composite structures, also combining and applying concepts of other disciplines (e.g. solid mechanics, vibrations, mechanical behaviour of materials)
Finally, students will improve their communication skills by composing a report and presenting the project activity at the oral exam.

The course contents are delivered through lectures and exercise courses.
The course covers the following topics divided into modules as per the description below:
Module A Lightweight design: fundamentals (also offered separately as 062578 - LIGHTWEIGHT DESIGN OF MECHANICAL STRUCTURES - FUNDAMENTALS)
Topic A.1 Introduction, mutual relationships between types shapes, materials, manufacturing and joining techniques
Topic A.2 Optimization: introduction, criteria and algorithms; examples and exercises.
Topic A.3 Analysis and optimization of simple mechanical structures.
Topic A.4 Thin-walled structures: flexural and torsional behaviour
Topic A.5 Stability of equilibrium and buckling
Topic A.6 Finite Element Analysis based optimization (topology, shape, sizing)
Topic A.7 Materials selection
Topic A.8 Joining solutions for lightweight structures
Module B Composite structures (also offered separately as 062577 - LIGHTWEIGHT DESIGN OF MECHANICAL STRUCTURES - COMPOSITE STRUCTURES)
Topic B.1 Structures made of composite materials
B.1.1 Lamina theory
B.1.2 Classical Lamination Theory
B.1.3 Strength of composites
B.1.4 Modelling the elastic behaviour and failure of laminates using FEM
B.1.5 Optimization of composite laminates
Topic B.2 Sandwich panels: design, optimization and modelling
Topic B.3 Joining solutions for composite structures:
B3.1 Mechanical fasteners
B3.2 Adhesive bonding
Topic B.4 Special problems: delamination of composites, cohesive failure of adhesives
Topic B.4 Short fibre reinforced polymers, process simulation and structural analysis

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Students will pass the course according to different rules, depending on which and how many modules they attend.
Students attending only Module A (i.e. enrolled to 062578 - LIGHTWEIGHT DESIGN OF MECHANICAL STRUCTURES - FUNDAMENTALS)
To pass the course, students must complete an individual design activity and pass an oral exam.
By the date of the oral exam, students must submit one report on a structural optimization problem of their choice.
At the oral exam, they first must present and discuss the report. Then, questions will be asked about the theoretical aspects applied in the project or about other topics from the entire program of Module A.
With the project, it will be possible to test students’ ability to use the acquired knowledge to set up and solve structural optimization problems autonomously, also demonstrating the skill of identifying links with other disciplines and applying the corresponding concepts.
Via this exam, it will be possible to test students’:

• ability to communicate results in an effective and technically correct manner
• acquired knowledge of the principles of optimum design
• acquired knowledge of the principles of lightweight design
  The exam will be graded as follows
  final mark = 0.5 x mark of the discussion of the project + 0.5 x mark of the theoretical questions
  Students attending only Module B (i.e. enrolled to 062577 - LIGHTWEIGHT DESIGN OF MECHANICAL STRUCTURES - COMPOSITE STRUCTURES)
  To pass the course, students must complete an individual design activity and pass an oral exam.
  By the date of the oral exam, students must submit one report on a metal replacement project of their choice, i.e re-designing a metal structure as a composite structure.
  At the oral exam, they first must present and discuss the report. Then, questions will be asked about the theoretical aspects applied in the project or about other topics from the entire program of Module B.
  With the project, it will be possible to test students’ ability to use the acquired knowledge to set up and solve structural optimization problems autonomously, also demonstrating the skill of identifying links with other disciplines and applying the corresponding concepts.
  Via this exam, it will be possible to test students’:
• ability to communicate results in an effective and technically correct manner
• acquired knowledge of the principles of designing and modelling composite structures.
• acquired knowledge of the principles of composite structures design
  The exam will be graded as follows
  final mark = 0.5 x mark of the discussion of the project + 0.5 x mark of the theoretical questions
  Students attending both modules, A and B or enrolled to the 10 CFU course 059214 - LIGHTWEIGHT DESIGN OF MECHANICAL STRUCTURES
  To pass the course, students must complete an individual design activity and pass an oral exam.
  By the date of the oral exam, students must submit one report on a metal replacement project of their choice, i.e re-designing a metal structure as a composite structure, where also the concepts of optimum design of Module A must be applied.
  At the oral exam, they first must present and discuss the report. Then, questions will be asked about the theoretical aspects applied in the project or about other topics from the entire programs of Module A and B.
  With the project, it will be possible to test students’ ability to use the acquired knowledge to set up and solve structural optimization problems autonomously, also demonstrating the skill of identifying links with other disciplines and applying the corresponding concepts.
  Via this exam, it will be possible to test students’:
• ability to communicate results in an effective and technically correct manner
• acquired knowledge of the principles of optimum design
• acquired knowledge of the principles of lightweight design
• acquired knowledge of the principles of designing and modelling composite structures.
• acquired knowledge of the principles of composite structures design
  The exam will be graded as follows
  final mark = 0.5 x mark of the discussion of the project + 0.5 x mark of the theoretical questions

J. Arora, Introduction to Optimum Design, Editore: Elsevier http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/book/9780128008065
Note: ebook available through www.biblio.polimi.it
F L Matthews, G A O Davies, D Hitchings and C Soutis, Finite element modelling of composite materials and structures, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2000 http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/book/9781855734227
Note: Available as ebook through biblio.polimi.it
Gibson, RF, Principles of composite material mechanics, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 9781439850053
József Farkas; Farkas; Károly Jármai, Optimum Design of Steel Structures
Note: József Farkas; Farkas; Károly Jármai

Lithium-ion batteries (LIBs), first released to power camcorders, have revolutionized the society leading to cell phones market penetration in the 90’s (then laptops, smartphone connected werables etc…) and finally to the connected society we are living in today. Thanks to recent development in LIBs technology, EV cars with ranges above 500 kms are expected and battery production in the EU is expected to reach a 250 Billion€ market within the current decade. The paramount importance of LIBs in modern society was established by the 2019 Nobel Prize awarding in Chemistry to LIBs inventors. LIBs are leading the forthcoming energy transition but new energy storage technologies are quickly raising.
The course will bring students to the understanding and knowledge of the key electrochemical energy storage technologies able to drive the energy transition, focusing on the state of art as well as the new coming challenges. The first part of the course (module 1) is focused on LIBs technology: from the concept of insertion electrodes to the materials used to their designs and manufacturing process, including sustainability aspects of production. In the second part (module 2), safety and critical aspects related to battery materials supply chain and recycling are considered. Moreover, new generation lithium batteries, beyond Li-ion, are explored. In particular, non-Li chemistries such as Zn-based batteries, supercapacitors and technologies for long duration storage, e.g. redox flow batteries, are introduced and discussed within the framework of the energy transition and resilience.

In the framework of course and exam preparation and evaluation, students will:

• learn the working principles of LIBs and post-LIBs technologies (DdD1);
• understand the principle of battery design, for a specific target e.g. high energy or high power (DdD1);
• understand the challenges and opportunities in the forthcoming energy transition in relation to the development of LIBs and next-generation batteries (DdD1);
• critically analyze the energy technologies' strengths and weaknesses in relation to the various application fields (DdD2);
• be able to do an autonomous literature review and communicate the results of their activity with clarity and proper language (DdD2).

Li-ion batteries: the key feature of LIBs technologies.
History
Electrochemical working principles
Materials (active and inactive materials)
Safety
Post LIBs: working principles and materials
Li-metal batteries (LMBs)
Lithium-Sulfur batteries (LSBs)
Design rules for LMBs and LSBs
The European scenario and EU objectives:
Supply chain
Recycling
Beyond Li chemistries: working principles, materials and challenges for non-Li based chemistries.
Panorama of the non-Li batteries (Na-ion, K-ion, Zn-ion, etc.)
Supercapacitors
Long-duration energy storage (LDES)
Redox flow batteries
Design rules for LDES
The course will be inclusive of laboratory demonstration and activities related to LIBs materials, electrode preparation, battery assembly and testing.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Students are requested to prepare a.ppt presentation on a specific topic in the framework of the course. The topic must be approved by the teachers and presentation will be followed by Q&A session.

The main objective of the course is to provide the students with the necessary tools for the design and assessment of machine components, both under static and fatigue loading. The basics of mechanical design are illustrated in order to include capability to develop simplified structural models, basic theory of elasticity, design methods for static and fatigue loads (multiaxial and variable amplitude loading) and tools for assessing the influence of notches on static and fatigue strength.

Once the students has passed the exam, the students will:
possess the knowledge of the main tools (analytic approach) and methods for modelling structural behaviour of simple machine components/systems; (DdD1)
understand assumptions and limitations of the beforementioned tools and methods; (DdD1)
perform design and assessment of machine components/systems subjected to static and fatigue loading; (DdD2)
analyse and critically discuss the results. (DdD2)
Thanks to the practices that are focussed on case studies (basic optimization technique, bolted and welding joints, basic of gears, pressure vessels, power transmission shafts, static design of a prothesis) the students will improve the skills necessary for practical design applications. Moreover, the theoretical concepts and the case studies will provide together a more general capability to approach an engineering solution of simple problems related to structural design in several fields. These competences are therefore of benefit for a wide range of study courses.

The course is organized in lectures and tutorials. Theoretical concepts will be applied during application in order to show an engineering approach to the design and assessment of actual and relevant components.
Internal forces: definition of slender members, definition of internal forces and equations of equilibrium, frames;
Axial and bending problem in beams: hypotheses and basic assumptions for the Euler-Bernoulli beam; state of stress due to normal force and bending moment;
Shear in beams: relationship between bending moment and shear force; shear stress distribution in case of solid section; torsion in beam: distribution of torsional stresses for a circular solid beam;
State of stress: definition of equilibrium for deformable bodies; Cauchy tetrahedron; principal stresses and directions; stress invariants; hydrostatic stress tensor and stress deviator tensor; Mohr’s circles for plane stress; three-dimensional description of Mohr’s circles;
Material behaviour: tensile test devices and specimens; engineering stress-strain curve; true stress-strain curve; ductile and brittle failure mechanisms; ideal material models;
Influence of notch for ductile and brittle materials: phenomenological aspects; definition of Kt and Ks parameters.
Stress-strain relations: general expression of the elastic tensor; elastic tensor for isotropic materials; derivation of the generalised Hooke’s law; stress-strain relationships for plane stress and plane strain.
Failure criteria for isotropic materials: Galileo-Leibniz-Rankine-Navier criterion for brittle materials; Guest-Saint Venant-Tresca criterion for ductile materials; Huber-Hencky-von Mises criterion for ductile materials; general considerations about the definition of the safety factor;
Fatigue: fatigue phenomena; fatigue testing; definition of fatigue cycles; Wöhler diagram; finite and infinite life regime; relationship between fatigue limit and tensile strength; influence of mean stress with Haigh diagrams; notch effect on fatigue; influence of surface finishing; size effect and influence of stress gradient; damage accumulation with Miner-Palmgren rule; Gough-Pollard and Sines criteria for multi-axial loading condition.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The exam is based on a written test followed by a voluntary oral one. Written exam is compulsory and cover all the theoretical and applicative topics of the course. The written test will include the solution of numerical exercises, aimed at assessing the capability of application of the design tools to practical cases and questions aimed at assessing the students’ capability of application of the design tools to simple practical cases regarding machine components and systems and/or to test students’ knowledge and understanding of the theoretical topics included in the program. Oral exam is voluntary and possible only in case written exam has been positively passed; oral exam can modify the score of +- 3 points and have to be carried out in the same exam session of the written one. The oral test will prove also the capability of critically discuss the design tools and their limits and or applicability conditions. Practical exercises can be also requested during oral exam.

Lecture notes by the teacher (english) Beep
N. E. Dowling, Mechanical Behavior of Materials, Global Edition 5th Edition, Editore: Person, Anno edizione: 2019
AA. VV, Costruzione di Macchine, Editore: McGraw Hill
Note: (italian language)

The course presents the two most important manifestation of ordering phenomena in solids beyond the crystal lattice: magnetism and superconductivity. The two are crucial for the understanding of the transport properties of crystalline materials, and can be exploited in a multitude of applications. Magnetism and superconductivity are governed by microscopic interactions, ultimately among electrons, but the macroscopic phenomenology is the result of interatomic interactions and dimensionality. Bose-Einstein condensation (BEC) and superfluidity are also presented as they share with magnetism and superconductivity the property of being macroscopic quantum phenomena.
The objective of the course is thus to provide a broad knowledge and understanding of ordering phenomena in solids. Phenomenology, experimental methods and theoretical models are considered and confronted. More broadly the goal is to introduce the students to the real world of advanced condensed matter research, with special emphasis on phenomenology and experimental insight.

Lectures and seminars will allow students to:
Know the fundamental concepts of ordering phenomena
Recognize the different types of magnetic order
Know the general phenomenology of superconductivity, superfluidity and BEC
Determine which experimental methods can be used in the study of magnetism and superconductivity and, in general, of ordering phenomena in solids
Read and understand original research papers in the fields of magnetism and superconductivity
Present a brief seminar on basic concepts and advanced examples on modern magnetism and superconductivity
Therefore, after passing the exam, the student will be able to:
DD1 - Understand the principles of magnetism and order phenomena, know the terminology related to them, employ the basic models applicable to them
DD2 - Recognize analogue of magnetism and superconductivity in other contexts and apply models ant techniques in new contexts of physics and technology
DD4 - Communicate their own perception of physics phenomena in a formal presentation and elaborate on them

Magnetism of isolated magnetic moments
Phenomenology: recalling diamagnetism, paramagnetism.
Weiss model for ferromegnetism and antiferromagnetism
Atomic moments.
Hunds rules
Crystal field: origin of CF, quenching of orbital moments, Jahn-Teller effect.
Exchange interaction
Examples of simple 3d transition metal oxides (NiO, MnO, Fe3O4)
Goodenough Kanamori rules
Perovskites
Manganites and cuprates
Magnetic order and magnetic structures.
Order parameters
Heisenberg and Ising models
Magnetism in metals
Pauli paramagnetism
Landau diamagnetism
Stoner model
RKKY interaction, Kondo effect
Excitations in magnetic systems
Spin waves
Stoner excitations
Magnetism at low dimensionality
Spin chains and spin ladders
2 dimensional magnets
Thin films
Bose-Einstein Condensation (BEC) and Superfluidity:
Bose-Einstein statistics
BEC principles
BEC of ultra-cold atomic gas
Macroscopic wave function and quantum fluids
Superfluid HeII
Superfluid flow and vortices
Superconductivity:
Phenomenology: transport, susceptibility, thermodynamics
London equations
Josephson effect
Ginzburg-Landau model
BCS theory
Cuprate superconductors (also as an example of 2D antiferromagnets).
Experimental techniques.
Magnetic resonances, Mössbauer spectroscopy, muon spin rotation.
Elastic and inelastic scattering of neutrons and x-rays for magnetic structure and magnetic excitations.
Synchrotron radiation based techniques for magnetism: selected examples of X-ray spectroscopy.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of two parts held during a single interview, in English.
1) A seminar of 20-25 minutes, on a subject pre-assigned by the teacher. The student has to present the general concepts of the theme in a correct and complete way, providing some examples at the level of the lectures and of the text book. The student is also invited to look for original examples, applications, interconnections with other subjects, to demonstrate a higher level of understanding. A PowerPoint presentation is best suited for the seminar, but black/white board option is also possible.
2) Two or three questions on the core of the course as presented in the lectures. The student is requested to answer at the black/white board to show their understanding of the basic concepts and notions of the course. Theoretical and experimental aspects will be valued equally important.
A fully successful exam (27-30/30) will be deemed when a solid and broad mastering of the concepts of ordering phenomena in solids is demonstrated.
An average grade (22-26/30) will be the result of fairly complete understanding of individual themes but with limited interconnection among subjects.
A pass level (18-21/30) will correspond to a minimum knowledge of individual notions.

S. Blundell, Magnetismm in condensed matter, Editore: Oxford University Press, ISBN: 978-0198505914
James F. Annett, Superconductivity, Superfluids and Condensates, Editore: Oxford university Press, Anno edizione: 2013, ISBN: 978-0-19-860756-7
Harald Ibach, Hans Lüth, Solid-State Physics: An Introduction to Principles of Materials Science, Editore: Springer, ISBN: 978-3540938033

Il corso si articola in lezioni frontali, ed esercitazioni pratiche di laboratorio, con l’obiettivo di fornire agli studenti i fondamenti teorico-pratici dei materiali e delle tecnologie di stampa 3D quando utilizzati nell’ambito della salute.
Durante le lezioni frontali, dopo aver fornito le nozioni fondamentali relative alle tecnologie di stampa 3D, si affrontano i temi più specifici legati ai materiali dedicati alla formulazione dei bioinchiostri, e alla loro caratterizzazione, così come ad alcuni aspetti specifici legati alle applicazioni nell’ambito della salute, come ad esempio quelle in campo vascolare, e cardiovascolare.
La parte sperimentale è volta all’apprendimento guidato delle fasi di realizzazione di modellazione tridimensionale, all’impiego di stampanti 3D a fusione di filamento (FDM), alla formulazione dei bioinchiostri, alla loro caratterizzazione reologica, meccanica, termica e biologica, alla progettazione ed esecuzione dell’esperimento di stampa 3D, alla caratterizzazione delle parti stampate, alla analisi dei dati ottenuti.
Il corso è tenuto secondo una modalità INTERCLASSE, ed è a numero chiuso per un massimo di 40 studenti, di cui 20 iscritti al corso di Laurea Magistrale in Ingegneria dei Materiali e delle Nanotecnologie e 20 iscritti al corso di Laurea Magistrale in Ingegneria Biomedica.
Per quanto riguarda l'accesso al corso, per i soli studenti in Ingegneria dei Materiali e delle Nanotecnologie, si darà la precedenza a coloro che si iscrivono per primi, seguendo il giorno e l'ora di iscrizione.
Le lezioni, e le attività di laboratorio si svolgeranno congiuntamente per tutti gli studenti, divisi in gruppi eterogenei rispetto al corso di studi di provenienza.
I docenti e gli assistenti, che appartengono ai corsi di Studio In Ingegneria dei Materiali e delle Nanotecnologie, così come a quello di Ingnegneria Biomedica, si alterneranno consentendo lo svolgimento di lezioni, esercitazioni e attività laboratoriali in copresenza.

Lo studente
conosce in modo critico i fondamenti delle tecnologie di manifattura additiva (DdD1)
è in grado di formulare e risolvere problemi ingegneristici relativi alla progettazione dei bioinchiostri (DdD2)
possiede metodi e strumenti per affrontare problemi relativi alla applicazione clinica del 3D bioprinting (DdD2)

Contenuto delle lezioni
Introduzione alle tecnologie di manifattura additiva
Introduzione alla modellazione tridimensionale
Le tecnologie 3D Bioprinting
I bioinchiostri e la loro formulazione.
Applicazioni cliniche del 3D bioprinting
Applicazioni in ambito vascolare e cardiovascolare, e in oftalmologia
La sicurezza, gli aspetti etici e regolatori del 3D bioprinting
Attività di laboratorio
Stampa 3D e modellazione tridimensionale
Formulazione e caratterizzazione di bioinchiostri
Caratterizzazione termo-meccanica e biologica dei bioinchiostri
Stampa 3D dei bioinchiostri, con e senza cellule
Caratterizzazione termo-meccanica e biologica dei campioni stampati

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i condizionato (a scelta del docente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Modalità di esame
L’esame è scritto ed è diviso in due parti. La prima parte consiste nella redazione di una relazione di gruppo relativa alle attività dei laboratori. La seconda parte consiste in una prova scritta individuale costituita da 9 domande aperte e 12 domande chiuse a risposta multipla sugli argomenti illustrati a lezione.
Nella valutazione dell’esame, la determinazione del voto finale tiene conto dei seguenti elementi:
Capacità di analisi dei problemi
Correttezza formale e sostanziale delle procedure individuate per risolvere i problemi
Correttezza dei risultati ottenuti
Conoscenza e comprensione degli argomenti
Adeguatezza del linguaggio tecnico scientifico utilizzato
Autonomia di giudizio

The main goal of the course is to give the fundamentals of the materials used in electrical engineering applications; in particular, the course will focus on the three functional classes of materials classified in terms of their final applications: electronic conductors, electrical insulators and magnetic materials. Details on materials involved in some practical applications for common devices and alternative energy generators such as batteries, fuel cells, capacitors and piezoelectrics will be also provided.

When the student has successfully passed the exam, he has a good knowledge of the following topics (DdD1):
knows the fundamentals properties of the three main classes of electrical materials, i.e. electrical conductors, electrical insulators and magnetic materials;
knows to which traditional class of materials they belong to, i.e. polymers, ceramics, metals and composites;
knows the relations existing between microscopic (physical-chemical) features of a material and its macroscopic properties and functions;
knows the typical ranges of values of the qualifying electrical properties for each class of materials.
A consistent and continuous part of the course will be devoted to solve numerical and practical problems encountered in the application of electrical materials, then the student will be able to solve specific problems, and to select the optimal materials for any case (DdD2,3).
A project on a specific case study will be discussed with the teacher (DdD4,5).

1. Industrial and technological relevance of electrical materials and their classification.
2. Microstructure and bonding in electrical materials.
3. Dielectric materials: main properties, permittivity, electric dipoles, polarizability, mechanisms of polarization, behavior in AC and DC fields, applications and uses.
4. Polymers involved in insulators: differences among thermoplastic, thermosetting and elastomeric materials; glass transition, vulcanization, mechanical behavior.
5. Electrical conductivity in metals: physical properties, drift mobility and drift velocity, conductivity and resistivity trends as a function of temperature and applications. Semi-conductors: physical-chemical properties, main materials, applications.
6. Magnetic materials: magnetic dipoles, classification of magnetic materials, domain theory; soft and hard magnetic materials: types and applications.
7. Piezoelectric materials: definition of direct and indirect effect, ferroelectric domains, hysteresis loop, PZT phase diagram, KNN properties, piezo-composites.
8. Examples of materials for alternative energy generators and storage devices: fuel cells, accumulators, capacitors.
Practical classes’ activity: numerical exercises on all topics of the course will be performed. All exercises and tests will be solved during class activity.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Written exam (2 h) with numerical exercises and theoretical questions. The exam is not open-book, but the teacher will provide all the equations and constants necessary to solve the exercises.
Students who wish to improve their grade may request an additional oral examination. The maximum possible increase in the final grade is 3 points. Please note that the final grade may also be lowered if the performance during the oral examination is not considered satisfactory.

Kasap S.O., Principles of electronic materials and devices, Editore: McGraw Hill, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 0-07-112237-0
K.M. Gupta and N. Gupta, Advanced electrical and electronics materials, Editore: Scrivener Publishing and John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-1-118-99835-9

The course is aimed at providing the fundamental concepts of materials and technologies for the production of printed circuit boards, integrated circuits and microelectromechanical (MEMS) devices. For each microelectronic device, the basic principles, the involved materials and the industrial production processes are discussed. In the field of MEMS technology, surface micromachining and surface modification processes at the microscale will be presented.

Upon completion of the course, the student will (DdD1)
know and understand the relationship between materials selection and production process in microelectronics;
know the main components of a printed circuit board and its production processes;
know the main components of an integrated circuit and its production processes;
know the main components of a microelectromechanical system and its production processes.
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the students with adequate knowledge tools and critical approach for their future activity related to microelectronics and integration technology.

The main topics of the course are
Printed Circuit Board manufacture: base materials, copper foils, laminate fabrication, solder resist, multilayer PCB, passive and active components, PTH and SMT assembling methods, soldering and solder alloys, flexible printed circuits
Introduction to microfabrication and integrated circuits: semiconductor materials, thin films materials and processes, epitaxy, pattern generation and optical lithography, etching processes, thermal oxidation, diffusion and ion implantation, multi-level metallization, chemical-mechanical planarization
Integration: process integration, CMOS transistor fabrication, bipolar technology, 3D integration and TSV technology
Introduction to MEMS and silicon micromachining: microelectromechanical systems, surface and bulk micromachining, bonding and layer transfer, IC-MEMS integration

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will be an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner so that different parts of the course syllabus are involved.
The student must be also able to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topics, highlighting the assumptions, critical points and industrial processing.

Sami Franssila, Introduction to microfabrication, Editore: Wiley, ISBN: 978-0-470-74983-8

The course aims to:
describe material classes specifically developed for applications in the energy sector or materials applied in it due to specific properties.
describe the main forms of material damage characteristic of parts applied in the energy sector, the methods for evaluating material damage, and the main criteria for developing materials suitable for these forms of damage, even when concurrent.
focus on different features of the same engineering application, linking material selection to specific needs not only in terms of material performance but also in terms of process requirements, design requirements, service needs, costs etc.

At the end of the course, the student:
will be able to identify and describe the main characteristics of materials developed for the energy sector. (DdD1)
will be able to estimate the main forms of damage that can occur in a component serviced in the energy sector and propose possible solutions to minimize the damage (such as using a different material, modifying the geometry of the component, applying heat treatments or surface treatments, etc.) (DdD2)
will be able to critically analyze information on materials and their processes/performances obtained from different sources. (DdD2)

The course addresses the criteria for selecting appropriate materials in the energy sector. In energy plants and equipment, materials must meet stringent requirements imposed by harsh environments for a sufficiently long lifespan, while also minimizing costs associated with the product life cycle (including design, manufacturing, service, maintenance, and disposal/recycling).
Issues related to the properties and manufacturing of various components (such as turbines, tubes, pipes, tanks, cables, etc.) will be discussed, employing a concurrent engineering approach. This includes examining the specific requirements of materials for particular applications, the range of materials and processes available for these applications, and the implications of material choice on component reliability and operating conditions.
Many materials in the components examined are chosen for their structural properties, while others are selected for a combination of structural and functional properties (such as thermal, electrical, and tribological properties).
The course will propose different material classes and their processes concurrently with their relationships to typical component needs and the process technologies used for their construction. It will also explore typical degradation processes occurring during service.
Structured with a concurrent engineering approach, the course will focus on several reference components relevant to the field of energy engineering. Each topic will provide an opportunity to present specific material classes, component requirements, development of manufacturing cycles suitable for achieving a good combination of mechanical and functional properties, material degradation phenomena, and the transfer of material science concepts to standards for material selection or testing.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The exam comprises an oral discussion featuring several components:
A broad question based on one of the case studies covered in class.
A more focused question centered on a different case study.
A question related to standards, laboratory work, or exercises.
Overall, the exam aims to evaluate the student's comprehension, critical thinking skills, and practical application of course material across various contexts within the energy sector.

Lecture slides and recordings made available through the We-Beep channel
Scientific papers available in the university library system
W.D. Callister, D.G. Rethwisch, Scienza e ingegneria dei materiali, Editore: EDISES, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-88-7959-724-1
D. R. Askeland, P. P. Fulay, W. J. Wright, The Science and Engineering of Materials, Editore: Cengage Learning, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-0-495-29602-7

The course will describe the behavior of materials (with greater attention to metals) exposed to aggressive
environments, used in chemical plants, petrochemical industry. Both design phase and operation condition will
be considered. The main classes of materials are considered in relation to their use in real working condition.
The fundamental concepts related to the mechanisms of damage in operation, with reference to fracture
mechanics and degradation phenomena, are discussed. The course will give information useful in both the
design phase (material selection and use of prevention techniques), as well as in monitoring and inspection real
systems, with particular reference to NDT, i.e. non-destructive techniques. Finally, RBI will be briefly introduce
in order to define the risk matrix to obtain the priorities of intervention.

The course aim at:

• describing the mechanical principles that rule the behaviour of micro-actuators;
• describing the fundamental multi-physics interactions that rule the behaviour of micro-actuators;
• presenting the main micro-actuators as e.g. micro-ultrasonic transducers, micro-speakers and micro-mirrors;
• presenting the main methods for multi-physics modelling and simulation of micro-actuators;
• describing the main reliability problems in micro-actuators.
• describing the fundamentals of multi-physics modelling and simulation for micro-actuators.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:

• know which are the main applications and modern trends in the use of micro-actuators;
• know the fundamental physical principles that rule the behaviour of micro-actuators;
• know how to design simple micro-actuators as far as the non electronic part is concerned;
• know the main multi-physics modelling and simulation methods for micro-actuators;
• know the main reliability problems related to micro-actuators;
• critically discuss state of the art scientific works on micro-actuators.
  The student will be able to discuss the above acquired knowledges with a clear and appropriate language and will be able to reproduce the fundamental reasoning and proofs presented during the classes.

• General presentation of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (or Microsystems): recent developments and future perspectives
• General presentation of Micro-Actuators
• Fundamentals of mechanics and multi-physics problems for microsystems.
• Overview of the main actuating principles adopted in microsystems
• Electrostatic actuation
• Electro-thermo-mechanical actuation
• Piezoelectric actuation
• Description and design of meaningful micro-actuators: micro-pumps, micro-mirrors, micro-ultrasonic transducers (piezoelectric and capacitive), micro-speakers.
• Introduction to modelling and simulation of micro-actuators.
• Introduction to reliability of micro-actuators.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The examination includes the following parts.

• A personal work on a subject agreed with the Professor in which the student applies the knowledge acquired during the course and critically discusses a micro-actuator or a peculiar problem related to micro-actuators.
• Oral presentation of the previous work during the exam and question and answer session with the Professor.
• An oral exam in which the examiner check the student's preparation asking supplementary information on the Course's subjects.
  The student during the final oral exam must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hyoptheses, the critical points, the physical meaning and their consequences.

A. Corigliano, R. Ardito, C. Comi, A. Frangi, A. Ghisi, S. Mariani, Mechanics of Microsystems, Editore: Wiley, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 978-1-119-05383-5 https://www.wiley.com/en-gb/Mechanics+of+Microsystems-p-9781119053835
Course notes available on WeBeep for Polimi students https://webeep.polimi.it/
T.M. Adams, R.A. Layton, Introductory MEMS, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-1489984210
S. D. Senturia, Microsystem design, Editore: Kluwer Academic publishers, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 978-0792372462
S. E. Lyshevski, MEMS and NEMS. Systems, devices and Structures, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 9780849312625
J. G. Korvink, O. Paul eds., MEMS: A Practical Guide to Design, Analysis, and Applications, Editore: William Andrew Inc. and Springer-Verlag, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 3-540-21117-9
A. Frangi, N. Aluru, C. Cercignani, S. Mukherjee eds, Advances in multiphysics simulation and experimental testing of MEMS, Editore: Imperial College Press, Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-1-86094-863-3

Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Systems – MEMS - are a key enabling technology for the evolution of the Internet of Things in its different declinations such as Smart City, Home, Objects and Driving. Their outstanding performances demand a systematic approach to analyzing truly multiphysics devices.
The course aims to set the basic concepts of numerical techniques for multiphysics modeling, based on the Finite Element Method, and to prepare the students to tackle the design of innovative MEMS sensors and actuators.
The course will provide a mix of theoretical classes and numerical laboratory sessions. Both simple Matlab codes and the commercial software COMSOL Multiphysics will be employed to solve realistic problems.
Primary industrial partners will contribute to the course in the form of seminars and tutorials

At the end of the course, the student will master the fundamental principles of numerical methods with specific reference to the Finite Element Method and will be able to apply them to the design and analysis of microdevices

The main topics that will be illustrated in the course are:
Simplified simulation tools for MEMS accelerometers and gyroscopes
The FEM for heat diffusion and other scalar problems. Application: electro-thermal testing methods for identifying material properties of thin films
The FEM for linear solid mechanics and coupled thermoelasticity. Application: thermoelastic dissipation in vibrating MEMS resonators
The FEM for coupled electromechanics and piezo problems. Application: analysis of a MEMS accelerometer
Introduction to the FEM for nonlinear problems involving large transformations. Application: micromirrors for augmented reality

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of developing a numerical project in agreement with the instructor.

Attilio Frangi, Dispense del corso
Marc Bonnet, Attilio Frangi and Christian Rey, The finite element method in solid mechanics, Editore: McGraw-Hill Education, ISBN: 978-88-386-7446-4

Microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) have been one of the most revolutionary technologies in recent years.
The aim of the course is to provide basic and advanced knowledge of the MEMS sensors from a mechanical and multi-physics perspective and to allow students to tackle the mechanical design of MEMS sensors for specific applications.

After lectures and laboratories attendance and exam passing, the student:
will master the main sensing principles exploited in MEMS sensors and will understand their field of application (DdD1);
will master the equations governing the MEMS sensors micromechanics and will be able to describe them clearly and effectively (DdD1);
will be able to apply the above knowledge to design MEMS sensors like e.g. accelerometers, gyroscopes, magnetic sensors and acoustic sensors (DdD2);
will be able to independently design MEMS sensors through the conscious use of a multi-purpose finite element code (DdD2);
will be able to draw up a report on the obtained results, with clarity and language skills (DdD2).

1. General presentation of MicroElectroMechanical Systems (MEMS)
Recent developments and future perspectives
2. Basics of MEMS sensing principles
Capacitive, piezoelectric, piezoresistive and magnetic sensing
3. Basics of MEMS sensors micromechanics
Review of solid mechanics, r elative dynamics, r educed order modelling (1dof/2dof), basics of acoustics
4. Advanced topics on MEMS sensors micromechanics
Geometric nonlinearities, m aterial nonlinearities, d amping sources
5. MEMS sensors mechanical design

• Basics of MEMS mechanical design
• MEMS inertial sensors: accelerometers
  Available working principles, pre-stresses rejection
• MEMS inertial sensors: gyroscopes
  Available working principles, vibrations rejection, quadrature, nonlinearities
• Magnetic sensors
  Brief overview of available working principles
• Acoustic sensors
  Brief overview of available working principles
  The course will provide a mix of theoretical classes and MEMS sensors design-oriented team work sessions. A commercial software, licensed to PoliMi students, will be employed in the team work sessions to assist students in the MEMS sensors mechanical design process.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The evaluation is based on an oral discussion and a written report to be prepared during the semester.
The written report focuses on the case-studies analyzed during computer laboratories through a commercial software. The students (possibly in pairs) re-elaborate the topic covered during the course in a personal and autonomous way and draw up a technical report, structured as if it were addressed to an external client. The written report must clearly describe the examined problem and comment the obtained results in a complete and critical way.

V. Kempe, Inertial MEMS: principles and practice
C. Akar, A. Shkel, MEMS vibratory gyroscopes
A. Corigliano, R. Ardito, C. Comi, A. Frangi, A. Ghisi, S. Mariani, Mechanics of Microsystems

The course aims at providing students an overview of the knowledge to the design of experiments focused on the mechanical characterization at small scale (10 -3 - 10 -6 m) for materials and micro-devices.
In the first part of the course, the practical and theoretical concepts useful for the implementation of experiments aimed at the study of mechanics at small scale will be provided throughout examples of instrumentation and experiments adopted at the laboratory LAB 3M and LABMEMS&3D.
The second part of the course will focus on practical activities (design of experiment and experimental setup) aimed at providing students the possibility to apply the course topics by means “learning by doing” and “team working”.

Lectures, exercise sessions, and passing the examination will allow students to (DdD1):
analyze and understand the goals, assumptions and requirements associated to an experimental apparatus for mechanical and electromechanical measurements;
identify and define software solutions for the control of experimental equipment;
identify and define software solutions for results acquisition and elaboration.
More specifically, the laboratory project will allow students to (DdD2):
apply basic concepts of mechanics of solids and structurers to the design of experimental equipment;
make experience on the use of CAD software for the design of simple mechanical elements;
write a requirement specification document;
write a design specification document;
analyze software code written by others;
summarize and present the results achieved during the analysis and specification activities.

The topics of the lectures are divided in two submodules: experiments for micro-devices; experiments for materials and interfaces.
Lectures
Brief review of electrostatics and mechanics fundamentals applied to microsystems.
Brief review of commonly used microsystems of large diffusion, with emphasis on mechanical measurements in statics and dynamics (e.g. accelerometers, gyroscopes).
“On-chip” and “off-chip” measurements: capacitive sensing and actuation for laboratory testing in statics and dynamics.
Tests of shear mechanical strength at bonded interfaces.
Open issues in mechanical measurements at the small scale: limits of the homogeneous continuum approach, scale effects, nonlinearities induced by the electro-mechanical coupling.
Experimental methods to assess and measure interface strength: shear test to characterize bonding layers between silicon wafers; wire tensile test.
Practical topics for design:

• experimental setup with parts eventually dedicated to “in-situ” observation: actuators, force and displacements sensors, mechanical part dedicated to manipulate and to grip samples, digital imaging, electronics for data acquisition and control software;
• examples of design of experimental setup will be proposed by means of CAD software assembly;
• examples of software codes dedicated to data acquisition and control of instruments will be illustrated (Labview and Matlab code examples).
  Practical part
  Presentation of the facilities at the Laboratory of MEMS, Micromechanics and Field Measurements (LAB3M).
  The project activity developed by the students will be focused on a specific experiment definition with the theoretical topics for results interpretation and the design of the experimental apparatus.
  Typical topics of the projects (but the list is not exhaustive):
• mechanical behavior of materials and/or interfaces under compressive tests and in situ observation of displacements;
• standard techniques for MEMS measurements with existing machines at the Politecnico (e.g. capacitive measurements in statics and dynamics);
• design of new on-chip MEMS testing structures (e.g. microsystems for the evaluation of residual stresses).

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Oral discussion about the group project developed during the laboratory part of the course. Each student will present its contribution at the project and will answer to one ot more questions about the whole project. The presence at 50% or more of the laboratories is mandatory for the exam.

Sharpe, W. N. (Ed.) Springer Handbook of Experimental Solid Mechanics https://link.springer.com/referencework/10.1007/978-0-387-30877-7
Note: Access provided by Politecnico di Milano (authenticate with person ID)
A. Corigliano, R. Ardito, C. Comi, A. Frangi, A. Ghisi, S. Mariani, Mechanics of microsystems, Editore: John Wiley & Sons Ltd, Anno edizione: 2018, ISBN: 9781119053835

The course aims at describing the mechanical behaviour of the different classes of materials and at illustrating the inelastic constitutive models, with focus on plasticity, damage, viscoelasticity and viscoplasticity. Specific lectures will be focused on the the fiber-reinforced composite materials, on the structural glass and on the laminated timber. These lessons will be given in the form of collaborative classes, together with Sorbonne Université, Paris.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:
know the basic microscopic mechanisms responsible for the ductile, brittle and viscous behaviors shown at the meso-scale by the different classes of materials;
know and understand the fields of application of the plasticity theory, of the damage mechanics, of viscoelasticity and viscoplasticity;
know the current research trends in materials design with focus on fiber-reinforced materials, structural glass and structural timber;
be able to apply the above knowledge to a critical choice of the constitutive laws to be used in numerical analyses beyond the linear elastic limit and to a proper identification of materials parameters;
be able to describe and discuss the above topics with a clear and accurate language
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the student basic knowledge tools necessary for performing future activities aimed at the nonlinear analyses of structures, up to failure.

Introduction to the mechanics of materials. Class of materials, elastic and inelastic behavior.
Constitutive models and applications. Isotropic and anisotropic elasticity. Visco-elasticity with application to concrete and polymers. Elastoplasticity: micromechanical aspects and phenomenological models, application to metals. Drucker’s stability postulate. Viscoplasticity. Damage mechanics, application to concrete, ceramics and metals.
Statistical theory of the strength of materials.
Criteria for the optimal choice of materials. Material indexes.
Composites materials. Elastic and inelastic behavior of fiber-reinforced materials, theory of laminates.
Structural glued laminated timber (glulam) and structural glass. Mechanical properties and structural applications. (This topic is not treated in the 5CFU version of the course)
Introduction to metamaterials.
Introduction to the use of inelastic models in finite elements analyses.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Grading will be based on a written test with three open questions concerning the basic contents of the course.
The student must be able to clearly describe the inelastic behaviour of materials and to critically discuss the different constitutive models, with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the physical meaning and the mathematical formulation. The student should also be able to support the discussion with significant examples, showing the field of application of the models.
The outcomes of the written test will possibly be followed by an oral discussion. The oral discussion can be asked for by the professor or by the student.

J. Lemaitre, J.-L. Chaboche, Mechanics of solid materials, Editore: Cambridge Univ. Press, Anno edizione: 1990
T.H. Courtney, Mechanical behaviour of materials., Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2000
M. Jirasek, Z.P. Bazant, Inelastic analysis of structures, Editore: Wiley,, Anno edizione: 2002
C.T. Herakovich, Mechanics of fibrous composites, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1998
P.Davoli, A. Bernasconi, M. Filippini, S. Foletti, Comportamento meccanico dei materiali., Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2005
L. Corradi Dell'Acqua, Meccanica delle strutture - Vol 1, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 2010
U. Perego, A.Taliercio, Fundamentals of Structural Mechanics, Editore: Esculapio

Il corso ha l'obiettivo di introdurre i concetti di base dei diversi dispositivi microelettronici che permettono di acquisire informazioni dal mondo fisico che ci circonda ai livelli microscopico e nanoscopico. L'attenzione è centrata sui trasduttori MEMS (Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Systems) inerziali, sull'elettronica di pilotaggio/lettura correlata e sulle considerazioni a livello di sistema (ad esempio, il compromesso rumore-consumo-area, l'ottimizzazione delle prestazioni limitate/illimitate, la definizione delle specifiche per le diverse applicazioni...).
Il corso è insegnato con un equilibrio tra lezioni teoriche (con esempi numerici realistici), esercizi orientati al progetto e esercizi assistiti da software. Insegnando queste tecnologie, sensori e circuiti, il corso fornisce esempi concreti di sistemi di rilevamento elettronico applicati in diversi campi della società moderna e futura (Internet delle Cose, Guida Autonoma, Città Intelligente, Industria 4.0...).

Il corso mira a introdurre i concetti di base di diversi dispositivi microelettronici che permettono di acquisire informazioni dal mondo fisico che ci circonda ai livelli microscopico e nanoscopico. L'attenzione è focalizzata sui trasduttori MEMS (Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Systems) magnetici e acustici, sui sensori di immagine a pixel CMOS (complementary-metal-oxide-semiconductor) ottici, sull'elettronica di pilotaggio/lettura correlata e sulle considerazioni a livello di sistema (ad esempio, il compromesso tra rumore, consumo e area, l'ottimizzazione delle prestazioni limitate/illimitate, la definizione delle specifiche per le diverse applicazioni...).
Il corso è insegnato con un mix equilibrato di lezioni teoriche (con esempi numerici realistici), esercizi orientati al progetto e esercizi assistiti da software. Insegnando queste tecnologie, sensori e circuiti, il corso fornisce esempi coerenti di sistemi di rilevamento elettronico applicati in diversi campi della società moderna e futura (Internet delle Cose, Guida Autonoma, Città Intelligente, Industria 4.0...).

The Aim of the course is threefold: (i) to introduce the student to the theoretical foundations and main applications of Photonic Crystals, Plasmonic Nanostructures and Metamaterials; (ii) to provide the student with a set of advanced tools and methods for the design of components and devices based on photonic metastructures; (iii) to give the student the theoretical basis for the understanding of highly innovative topics in modern Photonics.

• Knowledge and understanding (DD1)
  The student understands the physical basis of the optical phenomena taking place at the nanoscale.
  The student knows the guidelines for the modeling and design of metaoptics devices.
  The student is aware of the key functionalities implemented in metaphotonics.
• Apply knowledge and understanding (DD2)
  The student is able to retrieve the analytical solution of standard problems in dielectric periodic media, metal based (plasmonic) nanostructures, metamaterials and metasurfaces.
  The student is able to perform numerical analysis of prototypal metastructures, by resorting to a commercial tool for full-wave electromagnetic simulations.
• Making Judgements (DD3)
  The student is aware of the key functionalities and challenges in photonics at the nanoscale and in metamaterial optical structures.
  Given a specific optical functionality readily implemented in the market or under development, the student is able to identify the operating principles and evaluate the potential impact of metaphotonic technologies in the field.
• Lifelong learning skills (DD5)
  The student knows the theoretical foundations and the main applications of metaphotonics.
  The student is capable of understanding new trends in the high-tech market (from IT highways, to lab-on-chip and nanomedicine) dealing with advanced photonic structures.
  The student is capable of autonomously learn the operating principles of novel optical devices based on photonic nanomaterials.

1. Theoretical Foundations. Electromagnetism as an eigenvalue problem: electromagnetic harmonic modes, symmetries and classification of harmonic modes. Scaling properties of Maxwell's equations. Wave propagation in homogeneous and inhomogeneous media: angular spectrum representation, TE-TM decomposition. Evanescent waves and the diffraction limit.
2. Photonic Crystals. Generalities on periodic lattices. Bloch electromagnetic theorem. Photonic band structure. One-dimensional PCs: periodic layered media, band states and gap states, surface states and bulk defect states. Two-dimensional PCs: a polarization-indepenendent band-gap, point and line defects and application to PC cavities and waveguides. PC Interfaces: negative refraction and superprism effect.
3. Plasmonics. Optical properties of noble metals. Surface Plasmon Polaritons (SPPs): derivation of the SPPs dispersion equation, optical properties of SPPs, excitation and detection of SPPs, plasmon-polaritons in thin metallic films (SR/LR-SPPs). Introduction to plasmonic waveguides. Localized plasmons (LPs): quasistatic theory of localized plasmonic resonances in noble metal nanospheres, optical properties of metallic nanoparticles (resonant polarizability, absorption and scattering cross-sections, field-enhancement, resonance tuning). Introduction to plasmonic nanosensing (SPR and SERS).
4. Metamaterials and Metasurfaces. Negative electric permittivity media. Artificial magnetism and materials with negative magnetic permeability (stack of metal cylinders, split ring resonators). Negative refractive index materials (NRM) and the effects of a reversed wave-vector. Surface electromagnetic modes in NRMs and Pendry's Perfect Lens. Optical metasurfaces and generalized laws of reflection and refraction. Gradient metasurfaces.
Computational Laboratory. During the course, the student will be introduced to full-wave electromagnetic simulations with a commercial tool (Comsol Multiphysics). This training will enable the student to perform numerical analysis of key phenomena in Metaphotonics and to model 2D photonic crystals, plasmonic nanoantennas and simple metasurfaces.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The exam is written, and consists of open questions (typically 2 questions to be solved in 1 hour and 30-45 minutes), aimed at ascertaining:
the understanding of the physical basis of the electromagnetic phenomena at the nanoscale (DD1);
the knowledge of the definitions, theorems and general concepts dealing with nanostructured photonic media, including photonic crystals, plasmonic structures, metamaterials and metasurfaces, and the ability to model such systems (DD2);
the capability to discuss, both qualitatively and quantitatively, the performance of photonic metastructures as a function of their key parameters (DD3 and DD5).
The written exam may be followed by an oral exam upon request by the student, provided they have passed the wrtitten exam.
The teacher reserves the right to summon the student for a supplementary oral exam should it be necessary to verify the work done in the written exam.

Notes and handouts edited by the teacher https://webeep.polimi.it
L. Novotny, B. Hecht, Principles of Nano-Optics, Editore: Cambridge University Press, (II Ed.), Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 978-0-511-81353-5
J. D. Joannopoulos, S. G. Johnson, J. N. Winn, R. D. Meade, Photonic Crystals - Molding the Flow of Light, Editore: Princeton University Press, (II Ed.), Anno edizione: 2008, ISBN: 978-0-691-12456-8
W. Cai, V. Shalaev, Optical Metamaterials: Fundamentals and Applications, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-1-4419-1151-3

The course aims to describe fundamental issues in materials science research, with a specific focus on recent developments in metallic materials possessing unique functional and structural properties. The course will cover various topics related to emerging materials, including Shape Memory Alloys, Thermoelectric materials, Biodegradable metals, Alloys for Additive Manufacturing, and Composites. Students will have the opportunity to work collaboratively in small groups, focusing on a specific topic, to outline a proposal for research and innovation activities. The group activity primarily aims to enhance students' skills in preparing scientific and technical research projects and identifying original issues worthy of investigation.

By the end of the course, students will have acquired both theoretical knowledge and practical skills as outlined in the learning objectives. Specifically, students will:
Gain knowledge and understanding of the physical and metallurgical principles underlying the functional and mechanical properties of metallic materials discussed throughout the course (DdD1).
Acquire knowledge and understanding of methods for preparing a detailed description of a proposed study aimed at investigating a specific problem (DdD1).
Develop the ability to work effectively in a group setting and effectively outline a research proposal, utilizing materials provided by the teacher and conducting in-depth studies on a specific topic (DdD2).
Learn to gather scientific information, critically evaluate and identify relevant data, propose original research questions worthy of investigation, apply acquired knowledge from the course, and develop a comprehensive work plan for their activities (DdD3).
Develop effective communication skills to present their research proposals using appropriate language and tools (DdD4).

The course contents are delivered through lectures and a project laboratory (“laboratorio progettuale”).
The course covers the following topics divided in modules as per the description below:
Module 1
Topic 1.1 Course introduction and organization. Fundamental issues on research in materials science with specific focus on metallic alloys and recent development of metallic materials.
Topic 1.2 Metal matrix composites and nanocomposites: matrices and reinforcements, strengthening mechanisms, production processes and properties
Topic 1.3 Shape memory alloys (SMA): superelastic and shape memory effects, stress-strain-temperature relations, medical applications and actuators
Topic 1.4 Materials for additive manufacturing: processes, opportunities, metal powder characteristics, material requirements, properties and defects
Topic 1.5 Metamaterials, lattice structures, metallic foams and their processing
Topic 1.6 Superconductors: material properties, preparation methods and applications
Topic 1.7 Thermoelectric materials: Peltier effect, Seebeck effect, material production and applications
Topic 1.8 Biodegradable metals: comparison, limitations and developments of Fe-, Mg, and Zn-based alloys for medical implants and stents
Module 2
Topic 2.1 How to prepare an effective research proposal
Topic 2.2 Work group on detailed topics
Topic 2.3 Final presentations

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Students will pass the course after successfully take a combination of two different tests: oral exam and oral presentation of the project proposal.
Oral Exam
By the oral exam, it will be possible to test students’ acquired knowledge and understanding of the topics faced during the course. The application of acquired knowledge and ability to independently form judgements, ability to communicate learnt contents will be also evaluated.
All the topics that will be presented during the course will be object of exam, including metal matrix composites, shape memory alloys, materials for additive manufacturing, porous and lattice materials, superconductors, thermoelectric materials, biodegradable metals
Oral presentation of the project proposal
By the presentation, it will be possible to test students’ ability to work in a group, to outline an efficient research proposal, to collect scientific information, to critically identify useful data, to propose original issues worthy to be investigated, to apply the knowledge acquired during the course, to communicate the research proposal in an efficient manner by using an appropriate language and tools.
Final Grading
To pass the course, students must successfully pass two tests, namely:
1) present the project proposal and obtain a mark >=18
2) pass the oral exam with a mark >=18
The final mark will be the average a of the marks of the two tests.

Metamaterials and metastructures are artificial structures designed to have properties that cannot be found in natural materials, enabling interesting applications in different fields of engineering, such as mechanics, acoustics, optics and electromagnetics. This is obtained through a spatial repetition of so-called unit cells, designed to achieve specific unconventional behaviour at the macroscale.
The course aims at providing an up-to-date knowledge about mechanical metamaterials, with a particular focus on the design of metamaterials to manipulate wave propagation (and consequently noise and vibrations) in structures and fluids.
The course will provide both a theoretical background and a physical interpretation of the described phenomena, together with modeling expertise. The course will be further enhanced by hands-on laboratory experiences.

At the end of the course, the students are expected to be able to

• model and understand wave propagation phenomena in solid and fluid media (knowledge and understanding)
• design metamaterial-based solutions related to given wave propagation and vibration problem (applying knowledge and understanding)
• manage a simple project autonomously, including the development of the project itself (applying knowledge and understanding), the analysis and synthesis of the results (making judgements) and the presentation of the work both in written and oral way (communication skills)

The course will cover some of the recent advancements in the field of metamaterials, with particular focus on mechanical and acoustic applications. In detail, the course will cover the following topics:
1) Introduction to metamaterials: fundamental concepts and classification of metamaterials, including their unique mechanical and acoustic properties
2) Fundamentals of wave propagation in solids and fluids: fundamental theory of wave propagation and introduction of some key quantities
3) Wave propagation in periodic structures: application of the wave propagation theory to periodic structures. Modeling of 1D phononic crystals and extension to 2D-3D. Locally resonant metamaterials.
4) Semi-active and active metamaterials: introduction of piezoelectric materials and actuators for enhanced wave propagation control. Electro-mechanical coupling, active metamaterials and applications (non-reciprocal wave propagation, energy pumping, wave conversion)
5) Applications: some interesting applications will be covered during the course, including seismic metamaterials, cloaking devices, mechanical and acoustic lenses for wave focusing, waveguiding and enhanced energy absorption

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The final evaluation will be related to a course project, developed by the students in small groups during the course under the supervision of professors and assistants.
The exam consists in the evaluation of the project and in particular of the following elements:

• written report of the project, describing the work done and the results obtained by the students ( applying knowledge and understanding; making judgements )
• presentation of the project, plus questions and answers on the project work itself ( communication skills )
  The overall evaluation will depend on all these elements, taking into account all the steps of the project development and presentation (modelling, analysis of the results, report quality, presentation, answers to the teachers' questions)

The course provides a view of how computational approaches combined with digital tools can extend design boundaries by enabling the creation of complex multifunctional shapes that can be manufactured through digital fabrication technologies. Students will be trained on algorithm-based modelling methods for designing complex, multifunctional and parametric shapes. By the end of the course, they will develop the capability to envision and create complex and multifunctional shapes to propose innovative engineering solutions. They will thus learn and use the main modelling techniques, approaches, and environments that support their creation. They will also understand how to properly create digital models of these complex shapes to guarantee their manufacturability.

By the end of the course, the students will be able to:
Knowledge and understanding
Understand the potential of complex shapes for developing cutting-edge engineering applications;
Know the main modelling methods and tools for creating complex, multifunctional and parametric shapes;
Discuss how these modelling methods and tools can support the development of advanced and novel engineering solutions;
Understand how to properly develop the digital model for the targeted design requirements and guarantee its manufacturability, particularly with digital fabrication technologies.
Apply the acquired knowledge and understanding
Formalise a design problem in terms of its main design variables and requirements;
Develop parametric modelling workflows for creating complex and multifunctional shapes targeted for specific engineering applications;
Evaluate the feasibility and, specifically, the manufacturability of a solution;
Develop and present a solution related to the analysed design problem.
Further developed skills
Develop a computational thinking mindset concerning how to exploit the potential of computation in product design;
Develop the capability to envision complex shapes and how they could be exploited for multiple engineering applications;
Develop learning capabilities by autonomously exploring how to adapt the modelling workflow for the specific solution under investigation;
Develop communication and collaboration skills to develop and present the ideated solution.

Methods and tools for product design
Computational thinking
Models and tools for computational modelling and form-finding strategies
Digital fabrication strategies
Experimental strategies for mechanical testing of complex shapes

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam will be an oral presentation focusing on discussing a project. This project can be developed individually or as a group and should be agreed upon with the course lecturer. Before the project discussion, the students will be asked to submit the project materials, which include a technical report, a presentation, a demo, and any other materials relevant to highlighting and discussing the developed work and related outputs. Further details about the material to be submitted will be discussed during the course.
The evaluation will consider the following aspects: the correctness of the terminology used and of the technical aspects presented; the rigorousness and effectiveness of the process followed to develop the project; ability and level of autonomy in solving the challenges encountered in developing the project; completeness and quality of the project material; quality and clarity of the oral presentation of the project; originality of the project in particular in terms of the ability to propose a design problem and find the related solutions by also implementing strategies not directly already discussed during the course; level of understanding of the main state-of-the-art with respect to the project's filed.

Tedeschi, A., AAD_ Alghorithms-Aided Design. Parametric strategies using Grasshopper, Editore: Le Penseur Publisher, Anno edizione: 2020, ISBN: 978-88-95315-30-0
Norman, Donald A., Design for a better world: meaningful, sustainable, humanity centred / Don Norman, Editore: The MIT press, Anno edizione: 2023, ISBN: 9780262047951

This course aims at providing students with the basic knowledge of mechanics of materials allowing for the micro-structural architectures and the constituents' properties. So the main objectives of the course will be the mechanics of composite materials. A second part of the course will be focused on the mechanics of thin films, and mechanical characterization testing at small length scale.
The lectures will focus mainly on the mathematical modeling of the mechanical behavior of the materials as well as to the mechanical experimental characterization techniques. To this purpose a brief summary on solid mechanics will be provided at the beginning of the course.
Applications to specific material systems will be treated in the practical lectures.
Two short visits at the Laboratory of Biological Structure Mechanics of Politecnico di Milano are planned with illustration of practical cases of the nanoindentation technique and of the micro-tensile testing.

The students will learn the modeling approaches for the basic mechanical response of micro and nanocomposite materials on the basis of the mechanical properties of the constituents (DdD1). The student should be able to effectively describe theoretical and numerical approaches (DdD1). Furthermore, the student should be able to effectively discuss literature papers describing theoretical and numerical approaches to micromechanics of materials and thin layers systems (DdD1). The student may also show their level of comprehension of the subjects by showing their capability to implement simple micromechanics problems using numerical codes or MATLAB environment (DdD2).

Basic equation of continuum mechanics (a brief summary)
Mechanics of composite materials, homogenization of elastic properties:
Concept of inclusions and inhomogeneities
Concept of eigenstrain
Definition of effective elastic properties
Bounds on effective moduli
Brief introduction to non linear homogenization approaches.
Mechanics of thin films
Motivation for thin films mechanics
Mechanical issues in thin films
Residual stresses in 1D and 2D problems
Curvature induced by residual stresses
Stress state at the interfaces
Experimental techniques for the Study of Mechanical Properties of Thin Films;
Practical lectures:
Applications to specific material systems: ceramic/ceramic composites; metal/ceramic composites; biological tissues (with specific reference to the bone tissue);
Nanoindentation experimental technique; Micro-tensile testing (an in-situ testing).

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Each student will be called to make a critical review on literature papers focusing on a selected topic previously agreed with the lecturer. An oral presentation of such review with a deep discussion on the topic will constitute the oral exam.
As an alternative, the students may develop a simple project in which they implement a specific micromechanics problems using numerical codes or MATLAB environment.
The above mentioned examination modes will aim at:
1. showing his/her level of knowledge and comprehension of basic micromechanics.
2. showing his/her capability to apply basic micromechanics concepts to specific problems;
3. showing capability of critically review the works of others in the field of micromechanics;
4. showing his/her skill of communication.

By Jianmin Qu and Mohammed Cherkaoui, Fundamentals of micromechanics of solids, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-0-471-46451-8
William D. Nix, Mechanical Properties of Thin Films http://imechanica.org/files/353%20Class%20Notes%202005.pdf
Note: Lecture notes

This course aims at showing some techniques, based on electromagnetic radiation, for the evaluation of different properties of the materials through a practical approach. This means that the general theory behind the techniques is discussed; then the instrumentation, the sample preparation and the practical applications of the techniques are considered. An important goal is to provide the tools for the choice of the sutiable technique (in accordance to the target property) and for the interpretation of the IR spectra of materials and molecules. The course aims also at providing the knowledge of the optical properties of materials as function of their structure with also a practical activity related to the measurement of these properties in different samples.

At the end of the course and after the examination, the student should:
Know the optical properties of materials (dispersion, scattering, absorption) and their differences according to their structure, e.g. the optical behavior of conductive and dielectric materials;
Know the basic theory of the different characterization techniques starting from the simple models used to describe the material;
Know the structure and the main elements of the instrumentation peculiar of the different characterization techniques also considering the methods and issues related to the sample preparation;
Be able of choosing the suitable characterization techniques as function of the target property to be measured and the main features of the sample and apply these knowledge starting from the thesis work;
Be able to interpret an IR spectrum in terms of main chemical groups present in the molecule/material under study;
Be able to use simple instrumentation for the measurement of optical properties of materials (refractometer, spectrometer).

The course deals with principles and applications of widespread modern methods for material characterization. For each technique considered, the basic principles, the methods of interpretation will be shown, paying also attention to the instrumentation and sample preparation. The aim of the course is to provide tools and clarify what structural information can be obtained from the different techniques; what is the range of applicability and what are the possible options for measuring specific properties.
Table of contents (from this following list, 3-4 topics will be discussed and deepened according to the class composition and the students' learning activities).
INTRODUCTION TO SPECTROSCOPIC METHODS: Electromagnetic (EM) waves and propagation in vacuum. EM weaves-matter interaction: reflection, refraction, transmission and absorption. Energy levels in materials: quantized transitions. Elastic and inelastic scattering processes. Diffraction. Basic elements and properties of a spectroscopic instrumentation; design of a spectrograph.
OPTICAL PROPERTIES: refractive index in dielectric and conductive materials, techniques for its measurement.
ELECTRONIC SPECTROSCOPY: absorption, fluorescence, reflection electronic spectroscopy of atoms and molecules.
VIBRATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY: Normal modes of vibrations in molecules and crystals. Infrared and Raman spectroscopy.
X RAY SPECTROSCOPY: Laue approach. Reciprocal lattice, intensity analysis: Structure Factors and Electron Density.
SPIN SPECTROSCOPY: nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy, electronic spin resonance (ESR) spectroscopy.
MICROSCOPY: Optical microscopy, electronic microscopy, scanning probe microscopy (SPM).
THERMAL ANALYSIS OF MATERIALS: differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), thermal gravimetric analysis (TGA).
Laboratory activity:
For each technique discussed there will be a laboratory activity to practise with the instrumentation, sample preparation and data analysis.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination is an oral discussion covering the course topics, chosen by the examiner. Usually, there is a general question related to one key topic, then other more focused questions.
The student has to answer to the general questions contextualizing the topic, showing the key features with the help also of equations, models, schemes. Moreover, the discussion of details is welcome as well as the connections with other topics that are part of the program. The student has also to solve simple numerical exercises to support the discussion of the general topics. There is also an exercise related to the interpretation of the infrared spectra where the candidate has to assign the chemical structure to the corresponding spectrum.

The increasing computer power is nowadays essential to deal with the numerical solution of large dimensional problems, however a computational reduction is still determinant whenever interested in real-time simulations and/or repeated output evaluations for different values of some inputs of interest. In order to reduce this computational burden, we may rely on suitable reduced order models (ROMs), which are faster and cheaper to simulate, yet accurately represent the original high-fidelity (or full-order) system behavior. Within this class of techniques, parametric model reduction has emerged only in the last decade as a very active research area. Parametric ROMs target the broad class of problems for which the equations governing the system behavior depend on a set of parameters, such as in the case of parameterized PDEs. These parameters may represent, for instance, material properties, system geometry, boundary or initial conditions. The goal of parametric ROMs is thus to generate rapid but reliable models that characterize the system’s response over the whole parametric range. Such a strategy proves to be necessary in order to speedup design, control, optimization, and uncertainty quantification settings, usually requiring several repeated model evaluations.
This course surveys the state-of-the-art of parametric reduced order models, describing the most popular approaches related to physics-driven techniques (such as reduced basis methods and proper orthogonal decomposition) and data-driven techniques (such as non intrusive ROMs based on interpolation, surrogate models involving, e.g., neural networks, and model discovery techniques), providing also a comparative discussion that lend insights to potential advantages/disadvantages entailed by their application.

Besides the knowledge of theoretical results and numerical methods presented during lectures and Lab sessions, a critical comprehension of the class’ topics is expected by the students at the end of the class, justifying the followed procedures. Attending the course, students are expected to:
know and understand how to perform numerical simulation of problems of interest in mechanical engineering (e.g., heat and mass transfer, linear and nonlinear elasticity/elastodynamics, fluid dynamics) in many-query contexts (e.g., repeated simulations in multiple scenarios; control and optimization) or real-time contexts (e.g., predictive digital twins);
set, analyze and apply reduced order modeling techniques for differential problems built on top of classical numerical methods (e.g., finite element method), of both physics-driven and data-driven type;
exploit already acquired numerical methods in Engineering to set up physics-based ROMs (e.g., reduced basis methods);
exploit recent strategies in scientific machine learning for the efficient numerical simulation of physical systems through data-driven ROMs (including, e.g., simple neural networks);
adapt the proposed methodologies to more general problems of applied interest in Engineering;
interpret the results, assessing both accuracy and efficiency of simulation strategies, from both a numerical and a statistical point of view.

The course is organized in a series of lectures and practical lab sessions. Lectures will provide the theoretical background; practical Lab sessions will provide algorithms' implementation and examples of application of the considered methodologies by using basic (e.g., Matlab or Python) codes. After reviewing basic concepts in numerical methods for differential problems, the course will focus on the following topics:
Dimensionality reduction algorithms
Singular value decomposition, optimal low-rank approximations, proper orthogonal decomposition. Autoencoders.
Projection-based reduced order modeling techniques
The reduced basis method for (linear) parametrized partial differential equations: reduced space construction, (Petrov-)Galerkin projection, a posteriori error estimation. Affine parameter dependence.
Hyper-reduction techniques
Extension of the reduced basis method to nonlinear and/or nonaffinely parametrized problems. Empirical interpolation method.
Non-intrusive reduced order modeling techniques
POD with interpolation (e.g., Neural Networks, Gaussian Process) strategies. Autoencoders and basic ideas on deep-learning reduced order models for parametrized systems.
Data-driven dynamical systems
Dynamic mode decomposition. Sparse identification of nonlinear dynamics (SINDy). Neural ODEs. Model discovery techniques for the latent dynamics.
Physics-informed machine learning
SINDy Autoencoders: extension of SINDy to high-dimensional systems. Shallow recurrent decoder networks for reduced order models embedding sensor data. Learning nonlinear operators (e.g., deep operator networks).

Prova orale obbligatoria
The oral exam covers the content of both theoretical lectures and practical Lab sessions.
During the exam, students are required to present the detailed solution of two selected assignments (among a list of assignments proposed during the practical Lab sessions), commenting both the numerical results obtained and the computational procedures employed, and to answer to theoretical questions related with the topics of the course.
Assignments will require students to apply, adapt, or extend some of the methods presented during the course to selected practical case studies. The assignments will be evaluated during the oral examination and must be submitted to the examiners by the deadline communicated during the classes.
Theoretical questions will assess students' knowledge of the methodologies covered throughout the course. During the examination, students will first be required to sketch written answers to the theoretical questions, before presenting and discussing them with the examiners.
The course will be based on a selection of chapters of the following books, class notes, and some selected scientific papers provided:

A. Quarteroni, A. Manzoni, F. Negri, Reduced Basis Methods for Partial Differential Equations. An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2016
Steven L. Brunton, J. Nathan Kutz, Data-Driven Science and Engineering. Machine Learning, Dynamical Systems, and Control, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2022

The course aims to provide a general introduction to the computational methods which can be used to model the behaviour of molecular systems and materials. The lectures will introduce the theoretical concepts, first in qualitative terms and then in the form of equations and algorithms. The practical hand-on computational sessions will introduce the students to the usage of freely available programs for molecular simulation and visualization. The students will become aware of the meaning of "modelling", "simulation" and "computing", in a way which may be useful also in other, unrelated contexts.

The students will learn some theoretical principles underlying current molecular modelling methods. This will allow them to read an understand the scientific literature emplying these methods. (Dublin descriptor 1: Knowledge and insight).
They will learn how to use some common codes for the calculation and interpretation of the properties of molecules, liquids and materials, and specifically: VMD (visualization), ORCA (quantum chemistry), Tinker and LAMMPS (molecular dynamics and Monte Carlo). They will also learn some basics of scientific data analysis, using Python-based tools: Jupyter notebooks, numpy, scipy, matplotlib. (Dublin descriptor 2: Applying knowledge and insight).
They will be expected to gain some critical understanding of the methods, in order to choose the right method for a specific problem and assess the results of their calculations. (Dublin descriptor 3: Judgement).
The students will be expected to present the results of a computational project, both as a written report and during a subsequent oral discussion. (Dublin descriptor 4: Communication).

Introduction to molecular modelling: overview of problems and approaches.
Elements of molecular quantum mechanics: Schroedinger equation, Born-Oppenheimer approximation, electronic wavefunctions, independent-particle model, molecular orbital (MO) theory, basis sets. Molecular properties: the electron density and the molecular electrostatic potential. Electron correlation and the bond dissociation problem. Concepts from density functional theory (DFT): Hohenberg-Kohn theorem, Kohn-Sham scheme, exchange-correlation functionals. Semiempirical molecular orbital methods.
Empirical models: force fields for organic and biological molecules, shell model for ionic polarization, the embedded-atom model for metals, empirical "reactive" potentials for semiconductors and carbon-based systems. Coarse-grained models.
Exploring potential energy surfaces: stationary states, energy minimization and saddle point location methods. Conformations of large molecules.
Introduction to simulation methods: elements of statistical mechanics, ensembles and calculation of thermodynamic properties, boundary conditions, treatment of short- and long-range interactions.
Molecular dynamics (MD) simulations: integration algorithms, introduction of constraints. Choice of initial conditions. Controlling temperature and pressure in MD. Analysis of trajectories: pair distribution functions, analysis of molecular conformations, time correlation functions. Evaluation of transport properties. Non-equilibrium methods. Enhanced sampling for "rare" events.
Monte Carlo (MC) simulations: general principles (Markov processes, transition probabilities, detailed balance) and Metropolis Monte Carlo for the NVT ensemble. Generalization to other ensembles. Example: the Ising model.
Application examples:

• calculation of molecular energies, geometries, vibrational spectra, electron densities, interactions, etc.
• structure and properties of solids, liquids, soft materials, interfaces, etc.

Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The students will be evaluated on the basis of written reports on the practical modeling problems, followed by an oral examination covering the reports and the theoretical concepts underlying the empoyed methods. Projects can be carried out individually or in groups of two.
The final grade will be based on:

• understanding of the theoretical principles of the chosen computational model(s) (Dublin descriptor 1: knowledge and insight).
• capability to run the numerical simulation codes, extract and analyze the results from them (Dublin descriptor 2: Applying knowledge and insight).
• soundness of the computational method(s) for a specific problem, capability to interpret the results and identify possible problems or limitations (Dublin Descriptor 3: Judgement).
• presentation of the results, both in writing (report) and orally (final discussion) (Dublin Descriptor 4: Communication).

Frank Jensen, Introduction to computational chemistry (3rd. edition), Editore: JohnWiley & Sons, Ltd, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 9781118825990
M. P. Allen and D. J. Tildesley, Computer Simulation of Liquids, 2nd edition, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 9780198803201
Andrew R. Leach, Molecular Modelling: Principles and Applications (2nd ed.), Editore: Prentice Hall, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0582382106
Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, ATKINS' PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY, Editore: W. H. Freeman and Company, New York, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 0-7167-8759-8

This course aims to equip students with the essential engineering methods needed for the design, fabrication, and testing of MEMS (Micro-Electro-Mechanical Systems) capacitive sensors and actuators. The primary focus will be on practical, hands-on laboratory activities conducted at PoliFAB, the cleanroom facility of Politecnico di Milano. Through a combination of lectures, exercise sessions, and project laboratory work, students will gain a thorough understanding of MEMS fabrication technologies and the skills required to create and evaluate MEMS devices.

Lectures and Exercise Sessions will allow students to:
develop a comprehensive understanding of the current status and advancements in MEMS fabrication technology. (Dd1)
learn the detailed fabrication steps necessary to realize MEMS capacitive devices, including various lithographic and etching techniques.
acquire skills in different techniques to electrically characterize MEMS devices using laboratory equipment such as lock-in amplifiers.
Project Laboratory will allow students to:
design MEMS devices using both analytical and numerical tools, applying theoretical knowledge to practical design problems.
learn to create layouts for MEMS fabrication, ensuring alignment with the fabrication steps covered in lectures.
directly engage in the realization of MEMS devices within the cleanroom, utilizing various fabrication techniques such as photolithography, chemical etching, reactive ion etching, and vapor etching (depending on tools availability).
become proficient in using instruments like the lock-in amplifier to measure and analyze the amplitude and phase response of MEMS devices.
use software tools such as MATLAB and Python to fit experimental results and interpret the performance of MEMS devices.
By the end of the course, students will have mastered the fundamental engineering techniques required for the successful design, fabrication, and testing of MEMS capacitive sensors and actuators, preparing them for advanced research or professional practice in the field of MEMS technology.

1. MEMS Basics:
Overview of MEMS Technology: Introduction to MEMS technology, covering the fundamental principles and historical development.
MEMS Sensors and Actuators: overview of various types of MEMS sensors and actuators, including their working principles and applications.
2. Fabrication of MEMS Devices:
Tools and Processes: Comprehensive coverage of the necessary tools and processes used for the fabrication of MEMS devices at PoliFAB, including photolithography, etching techniques, and deposition methods.
Impact of Non-Idealities: Analysis of how fabrication non-idealities can affect the performance of the final MEMS device and strategies to mitigate these issues.
3. MEMS Design and Simulation:
Analytical Modeling: Development of analytical models to describe the main electromechanical parameters of MEMS devices.
Multiphysics Simulation: Use of Multiphysics software for the simulation of MEMS devices in order to validate the main electromecanical parameters.
Design Constraints: Exploration of the relationship between fabrication constraints and design limitations, emphasizing the importance of integrated design and fabrication considerations.
4. Characterization of MEMS Devices:
Lock-in Amplifier: Instruction on using lock-in amplifiers to extract the amplitude and phase response of MEMS devices.
Electromechanical Parameter Fitting: Techniques for fitting the main electromechanical parameters of MEMS devices from experimental data, enhancing the understanding of device behavior.
Students will learn these topics through a combination of traditional lectures, interactive exercise sessions, hands-on laboratory activities, and independent work using tools provided during laboratory sessions. The course emphasizes experiential learning, ensuring that theoretical knowledge is reinforced through practical application.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Project Report (Group Work):
Analytical and Numerical Simulation: Detailed simulation of the target MEMS device.
Fabrication Flow Report: Comprehensive report on the fabrication process of the device, highlighting potential sources of non-idealities and their impact.
Electrical Characterization and Analysis: Detailed electrical characterization of the device and analysis of the main electromechanical parameters.
Oral Exam:
Theoretical Knowledge: Examination on the theoretical aspects covered in the course.
Project Report Discussion: In-depth discussion of the project report, including questions about the analytical, fabrication, and characterization processes.

The course is focused on the extraordinary physical properties of graphene and related layered 2D materials (e.g., MoS 2, WSe 2, hBN) and their application in nanoelectronics. The main goal of the course is to provide a comprehensive understanding of the physics of the state-of-the-art 2D nanoelectronic devices and realistically evaluate possible applications of atomically thin materials in modern electronics, especially considering a recent transition of the semiconductor industry to ultra-thin transistor channels.

Knowledge and understanding
The students will learn about the main physical properties of graphene and related 2D materials and how they can be exploited to realize 2D nanoelectronic devices.
Apply knowledge and understanding
The students will be able to extract important parameters and figures of merit of field-effect transistors (FETs) based on graphene and related 2D materials, both in DC and at high-frequencies.
The students will be able to evaluate the performance of the FETs made of 2D and conventional semiconductor materials.
The students will be able to understand advantages and disadvantages of 2D FETs with respect to conventional Si transistor technology.
Making judgements
The students will have the ability to compare different transistor technologies in terms of their applications in nanoelectronics.
The students will have the ability to select appropriate applications in electronics for FETs based on graphene and related 2D materials.
Lifelong learning skills
The students will be prepared for the incoming transistion of the semiconductor industry to novel device architectures and low-dimensional materials.
The students will be capable to autonomously learn how to use novel 2D materials in the development of transistors and electronic circuits.
The students will be prepared to begin a masters' thesis project in a semiconductor research laboratory.

Introduction to graphene and related 2D materials
Allotropes and hybridization of carbon
Band structure and massless Dirac fermions in graphene
Origin of high carrier mobility in graphene
Comparison with carbon nanotubes
Atomically thin semiconducting and insulating 2D materials
Relativistic phenomena in graphene and related 2D materials
Methods for the synthesis of graphene and related 2D materials
Assembly of artificial 2D van der Waals heterostructures
Graphene field-effect transistors (FETs)
The importance of high carrier mobility in electronic devices and circuits
Physics of graphene devices
Comparison between graphene and conventional FETs
Ambipolarity of graphene FETs
Electrostatic doping in graphene electronic circuits
Importance of drain current saturation and voltage gain
Impact of contact resistance on the properties of graphene FETs
Scaling and short-channel effects
Impact of band gap opening in graphene on properties of graphene FETs
2D transition metal dichalcogenides (TMDCs)
Crystalline structure of 2D TMDCs (MoS 2 and WSe 2 )
Band structure of 2D TMDCs
Electronic properties of 2D TMDCs
FETs based on 2D TMDCs
Short-channel effects and ballistic transport in 2D MoS 2 FETs
Small-signal model of FETs based on graphene and related 2D materials
Low-frequency AC small signal model of 2D FETs (hybrid-pi model)
Transconductance g m and output conductance g d
Definition of voltage and current gains
Intrinsic voltage gain g m / g d and intrinsic current gain h 21
Extrinsic high-frequency model of 2D FETs
Phasors in electronic circuits
Two-port networks
Parameter models ( h and Y ) of two-port networks
High-frequency figures of merit of FETs based on graphene and related 2D materials
Intrinsic and extrinsic cutoff frequency f T of 2D FETs
Comparison of 2D and conventional FETs in terms of f T
Power gain
Intrinsic and extrinsic maximum frequency of oscillation f max of 2D FETs
Comparison of 2D and conventional FETs in terms of f max
Scattering parameters of high-frequency (e.g., 5G) networks
Nanoelectronic circuits based on graphene and related 2D materials
Moore’s law
Static and dynamic power dissipation
Digital and analogue 2D electronic circuits: amplifiers, mixers, frequency multipliers, logic gates
Flexible electronics based on graphene and related 2D materials
Nanofabrication of 2D nanoelectronic devices and circuits

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The students will be evaluated by written examination according to the calendar of the course.
The students will be expected to discuss the physical phenomena underlying applications of graphene and related 2D materials in electronics, solve very basic (i.e., single-transistor) electronic circuits with 2D FETs, extract transistor parameters and determine corresponding figures of merit.

Luis E. F. Foa Torres, Stephan Roche, Jean-Christophe Charlier, Introduction to Graphene-Based Nanomaterials - From Electronic Structure to Quantum Transport, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 9781107030831
Juin J. Liou, Frank Schwierz, Hei Wong, Nanometer CMOS, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 9814241083

The aim of this course is to present the fundamentals of micro and nanomagnetism necessary to understand the recent developments in the field of spintronics, thanks to a mix of lectures, exercices, informatic and experimental laboratories. In particular, a platform for micromagnetic simulation (OOMMF/MUMAX) will be presented, in order to provide the students with the essential tools for designing and analysing magnetic nano-devices. Experiments dealing with the characterization of magnetic materials and spintronic devices will be also carried pout with the participation of students. Finally, the lectures of the last part of the course are intended to review the recent advances in the field.

Knowledge and understanding
Upon passing the exam, the student:

• knows the principles of micromagnetism
• knows the basic analytical and computational approaches to calculate the micromagnetic configuration of a system
• knows the foundations of spintronics
• understands the structure and behaviour of conventional spintronic devices
• understands a scientific paper dealing with nanomagnetism and spintronics
  Applying knowledge and understanding
  Upon passing the exam, the student:
• is able to solve analytical problems connected to magnetism and spintronics
• is able to use a micromagnetic software (OOMMF) for the computation of static and dynamic micromagnetic configurations
• is able to design the basic structure of a spintronic device
  Making judgements, Communication, Lifelong learning skills
  Students who decide to prepare a project on micromagnetic simulation, as alternative to the written test:
• are able to model a real micromagnetic problem, identifying the relevant parameters and factors to be taken into account
• are able to solve a realistic problem and draw a general conclusion on the optimization work carried out via simulations
• are able to present their work in a report mimicking a scientific paper
• are able to communicate their work during the oral examination

Nanomagentism is a modern discipline devoted to the study of magnetism in nanoscale objects. The "nano-world" opens unforeseen possibilities to develop new devices and paradigms exploiting the spin and orbital angular momentum of electrons and other quasi-particles (e.g. domain walls, magnons) propagating in engineered magnetic structures. Spintronics, in particular, is a branch of nanoelectronics aiming at developing new electronic devices taking advantage of the spin degree of freedom in addition to the charge of carriers.
The program will consist of lectures and exercises devoted to these topics:
Micro and NANO magnetism
Demagnetizing field, magnetostatic energy. Landau magnetic free energy and its contributions (exchange, anisotropies, magnetostrictions). Domain walls. Micromagnetic simulations (OOMMF). Coherent magnetization reversal (Stoner Wohlfart model) and reversal via propagation of domain walls. Magnetic nanoparticles. Domain wall conduits. Magnetic coupling in multilayers (Néel coupling, Exchange bias, Bilinear coupling)
Classical-Spintronics
Two currents model and spin dependent scattering. Giant magnetoresistance in CIP and CPP configurations. Spin accumulation and Valet-Fert model. Tunneling magnetoresistance and magnetic tunneling junctions. Non volatile magnetic memories (MRAMs) and magnetic sensors. Spin transfer torque. Magneto-electric coupling. Spin injection, manipulation and detection in semiconductors.
Spinorbitronics
Rashba based devices and Spin-FET. Spin currents. Direct and inverse spin Hall effect. Antiferromagnet spintronics.
LABORATORY ACTIVITIES
Laboratory instruction in specific techniques of magnetic characterization of materials and devices will be provided, at the laboratory of Nanomagnetism located within the facility Polifab. Informatic laboratories connected to the usage of the micromagnetic platforms OOMMF/MUMAX are also carried out woth the help of a tutor who will also assist students in the preparation of a project which can replace the written test.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The examimation is made of two parts: (i) a written test (1 hour) with some exercises, (ii) an oral examination. The written test can be replaced with a project on the micromagnetic simulation and investigation of selected magnetic structures.

S. Blundell, Magnetism in Condensed Matter, Editore: Oxford Master Series in Physics, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 978-0-19-850591-4
Note: Good textbook on the fundamentals of magnetism and micromagnetisms
Amikam Aharoni, Introduction to the Theory of Ferromagnetism, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 0198508093
Note: Reference text for micromagnetism
Supriyo Bandyopadhyay, Marc Cahay, Introduction to SPINTRONICS, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 9781482255591
Note: Reference text for Spintronics
J. M. D. Coey, Magnetism and Magnetic Materials, Editore: Cambridge, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 9780521816144
Note: Handbook of magnetism

The course aims at describing the physical principles of energy conversion processes, with particular focus on the photovoltaic and the thermoelectric energy conversion effects, and the properties of materials of interest for such applications, with particular attention to new nanostructured materials and systems. Specific lectures will be focused on the principles and nanomaterials-related aspects of other direct energy conversion technologies.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:

• know the physical principles needed for a microscopic description of electrical and heat transport phenomena in materials, with particular focus on semiconductors in non-equilibrium conditions and under illumination, and the physical principles underlying the photovoltaic effect, the thermoelectric effects and other energy conversion effects/devices (e.g. photocatalysis, fuel cells); (DdD1)
• know the working principles, the materials-related aspects and the architecture of the most important classes of photovoltaic and thermoelectric devices, including those employing nanomaterials and nanostructures; (DdD1)
• know the current research trends in the application of nanotechnologies and nanomaterials for the development of novel energy conversion devices; (DdD1)
• be able to apply the above knowledge to a critical description and discussion of the devices and the related materials properties, limitations and developments, with a quantitative approach, and to communicate this knowledge in an effective way. (DdD2)

• Introduction to direct energy conversion technologies
• Properties of solar radiation
• Introduction to irreversible thermodynamics for the description of transport phenomena; kinetic coefficients and Onsager theorem
• Review of semiconductor physics and properties
• Microscopic description of charge and heat transport in solids: Boltzmann equation; derivation of electrical conductivity for metals and semiconductors
• The photovoltaic effect; p-n junction under illumination, I-V characteristic of solar cells, definition of power conversion efficiency and quantum efficiency; limits for the efficiency (detailed balance limit, thermodynamic limit)
• Crystalline Si solar cells (1st generation)
• Thin film solar cells (2nd generation)
• Excitonic solar cells: organic (bulk heterojunction) and hybrid solar cells, dye-sensitized and perovskite solar cells
• New concepts for 3rd generation solar cells (tandem or multijunction cells, intermediate band cells, multiple exciton generation, hot carrier cells, up- and down-conversion, concentration)
• Nanostructured materials for 3rd generation solar cells (e.g. QD-based solar cells)
• Phenomenology of thermoelectric effects (Seebeck, Peltier, Thomson);
• Irreversible thermodynamics description of thermoelectric effects: relationship between thermoelectric coefficients and kinetic coefficients
• Efficiency and figure of merit of thermoelectric systems (refrigeration and power generation)
• Boltzmann equation: derivation of thermal conductivity and thermoelectric coefficients for metals and semiconductors
• Conventional and advanced thermoelectric materials; the phonon glass-electron crystal concept, the substructure approach; Bi2Te3 and related compounds, skutterudites, clathrates, complex oxides
• Nanostructured thermoelectric materials, examples (superlattices, nanowires, nanocrystalline or nanocomposite materials)
  During the course specific seminar lectures will be organized, to discuss recent developments in other energy conversion technologies involving nanomaterials (e.g. fuel cells, solar water splitting, batteries).
  See bibliography for suggested books (covering more than the programme of the course). Additional documents or lecture notes will be made available by the lecturer.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination is an oral discussion about the course topics, chosen by the examiner (typically one topic related to photovoltaic physics, materials and devices, and one topic related to thermoelectricity and thermoelectric materials and devices).
The student must be able to clearly describe and critically discuss the topics, with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the physical meaning, the mathematical approach (complete derivations are not strictly required, but of course their knowledge may contribute to the final mark; however understanding the physics underlying the mathematical approach is considered the fundamental aspect), the materials properties, the device architecture and properties. The student should also know the value or order of magnitude of the main important quantities involved in the discussion, and may be asked to apply the theoretical knowledge to specific examples, with a quantitative approach.

J. Nelson, The Physics of Solar Cells, Editore: Imperial College Press, Anno edizione: 2003
H.J. Goldsmid, Introduction to Thermoelectricity, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2009

Interatomic forces; fundamentals of inter and intramolecular interactions. Bulk properties and properties of aggregates. Self assembly of molecules toward nanostructures. Nanometric architectures,nanocrysrtals,nanotubes,clusters and nanocomposites. Amorphous metals and quasi-crystals; Confinement effects.. Chemical and Physical properties of nanomaterials: nanomaterials in biology, biochemistry and chemical catalysis; pattern recognition, biosensors, biodevices. Nanomaterials for electronics and for data storage. Nanomaterials for energy saving. Manipulation of atoms and molecules. Preparation of films of nanoaggregates (Langmuir -Blodgett films, vapor phase deposition, laser ablation etc ).

Nature Based Solutions or NBS refers to nature-inspired environmental management and intervention solutions. It is a relatively recent concept, used by the European Commission to identify strategies, actions, technologies and interventions, which provide environmental services and socio-economic benefits that can increase environmental resilience. Today there is great attention to these solutions and to the development and enhancement of innovative technological solutions based on the example of natural systems. Examples of NBS are the so-called "green infrastructures" used to control stormwater runoff in urban areas, constructed wetlands and the modern "vertical gardens". In the proposed course, the different types of NBS will be illustrated, the main design parameters will be indicated and the basics to quantify their ability to provide ecosystem services will be provided.
The course is held by two teachers:
Arianna Azzellino, main expertise: ecosystems quality, environmental risk, and impact assessment
Grazia Concilio, main expertise: urbanization challenges and policy making for sustainability transition

After taking the course,
D1. knowledge and understanding: a) the student knows the fundamental principles underlying nature-based solutions; b) knows and understands the environmental issues that NBS may help to solve; c) understands the principles of available NBS technologies; d) knows the data and tools needed to build the assessment scenario for designing NBS
D2. Applying knowledge and understanding: the student is able to apply the knowledge acquired to case studies
D3. Making judgements: a) the student is able to evaluate the feasibility and potential benefits of an NBS intervention in a specific context; b) is able to provide an evaluation of NBS, even if not strictly related to those evaluated in the course;
D4. Communication skills: the student is able to explain what he/she has learnt and the reasons for his/her own evaluations in a clear and convincing way
D5. Learning skills: the student has acquired the skills needed to pursue further study independently.

1. Principles of Nature-Based Solutions for enhancing resilience to climate change.
2. The concept of ecosystem services
3. Human activities interrelations with ecological systems and main tools and approaches for applying Nature-Based Solutions to reducing climate risks.
4. Green infrastructures as aviable complement to grey engineered protection structures for reducing impacts of disaster events.
5. Main design parameters of the different types of NBS and their ability to provide ecosystem services
6. Environmental factors of interest for designing NBS
7. Practical guided examples on how to apply Nature-Based Solutions for reducing risks of natural hazards by investing in restoration and protection. (The students will work in teams and will provide a preliminary evaluation of an NBS application scenario. GIS tools will be used)

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam consists of two evaluation parts: the first part is an individual test with open / closed questions to be answered on the topics covered during the course and accounts for 90% of the grade; the second part refers to a Lab proejct group that is not mandatory and accounts for 10% of the final grade.
The final examination aims to evaluate not only the students' knowledge of Nature-based Solutions (NbS), but also their ability to apply the concepts discussed during the course to simple real-world situations.
The assessment is based on the following criteria:
Understanding of the fundamental concepts related to Nature-based Solutions and ecosystem services.
Ability to identify and explain the ecosystem services provided by different Nature-based Solutions.
Capacity to interpret simple scenarios and apply the acquired knowledge to support decision-making.
Critical thinking, including the recognition of multifunctionality, synergies and potential trade-offs among alternative Nature-based Solutions.
Quality and clarity of reasoning, particularly when explaining assumptions and justifying answers.
Appropriate use of scientific terminology and effectiveness of communication.

course slides and handouts

The course provides students with the physical foundations required to understand, critically assess and select nuclear techniques for advanced materials characterization.
Emphasis is placed on understanding the physical principles governing each technique, the type of information that can be extracted, the achievable sensitivity and spatial resolution, and the strengths and limitations of each method. Particular attention is devoted to the comparison of complementary techniques and, where appropriate, to their relationship with widely used non-nuclear characterization methods, in order to highlight the specific information uniquely provided by nuclear techniques.
Complementary classes of techniques based on nuclear reactions, ion beams, neutrons, hyperfine interactions and positron annihilation are presented, highlighting the information provided by each method, their capabilities and their limitations in materials characterization.
An introductory review of the nuclear physics concepts required for the subsequent topics is included, making the course accessible to students from different educational backgrounds.
The final part of the course adopts an active learning approach based on Blended Learning, in which students critically analyse recent scientific papers illustrating advanced applications of the techniques discussed during the lectures.

The student
knows the physical principles underlying the main nuclear techniques for materials characterization and the type of information provided by each technique (DdD1);
knows the capabilities, limitations and complementarity of the different techniques, including their sensitivity, spatial or depth resolution, and typical fields of application (DdD1);
is able to select and critically compare the most appropriate technique, or combination of techniques, for a given materials characterization problem (DdD2);
is able to interpret the scientific literature employing nuclear techniques for materials characterization and discuss their applications using appropriate scientific terminology (DdD2).

Module 1 – Introduction to materials characterization and nuclear techniques
Role of materials characterization techniques in materials science
Information accessible through different characterization methods (elemental composition, depth profiling, crystal structure, local atomic environment, point defects)
Overview of nuclear techniques for materials characterization and their complementarity with other characterization methods
Module 2 – Physical foundations
Review of the physical concepts underlying the techniques presented in the course:
collisions
multipole expansion of electromagnetic fields and interaction of multipoles with electromagnetic fields
magnetic dipoles in magnetic fields
X-ray emission: continuous and characteristic X-ray spectra
interaction of X-rays and gamma rays with matter: scattering and absorption
For students without previous background in nuclear physics, the introductory lectures also provide the fundamental concepts of nuclear structure, radioactivity and nuclear reactions needed for the subsequent modules.
Module 3 — Photon-based techniques
Physical principles of X-ray emission
X-ray Fluorescence (XRF)
Particle-Induced X-ray Emission (PIXE)
Comparison between XRF and PIXE
Information provided, capabilities, limitations, detection limits and typical applications
Module 4 — Ion Beam Analysis techniques
Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry (RBS)
Elastic Recoil Detection Analysis (ERDA)
Nuclear Reaction Analysis (NRA)
Particle-Induced Gamma-ray Emission (PIGE)
Integration of complementary Ion Beam Analysis techniques
Information provided, capabilities, limitations, depth resolution and typical applications
Module 5 – Neutron-based techniques
Neutron Activation Analysis (NAA)
Neutron diffraction
Inelastic neutron scattering
Comparison with X-ray diffraction
Information provided, capabilities, limitations and typical applications in structural and dynamical characterization of materials
Module 6 – Nuclear spectroscopies and positron-based techniques
Hyperfine interactions
Mössbauer spectroscopy
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR)
Positron Annihilation Spectroscopy (PAS): positron lifetime spectroscopy; Doppler broadening spectroscopy.
Comparison of complementary techniques
Information provided, capabilities, limitations and typical applications for the characterization of local atomic environments, vacancy-type defects and free volume
Module 7 – Applications and case studies (Blended Learning and active learning)
Critical analysis and discussion of recent scientific papers
Student presentations
Selection and critical comparison of techniques for specific materials characterization problems
Integration of complementary characterization techniques

Prova orale obbligatoria
Assessment consists of an oral examination aimed at evaluating the student's understanding of the physical principles underlying the techniques presented in the course, their capabilities and limitations, and their applicability to specific materials characterization problems.
Students are expected to discuss and compare different nuclear techniques for materials characterization, justify the choice of the most appropriate experimental approach for a given investigation, and critically interpret examples drawn from the scientific literature.
Students participating in the Blended Learning activities through the presentation of a scientific paper will have this activity taken into account in the overall assessment.

H.R. Verma, Atomic and Nuclear Analytical Methods: XRF, Mössbauer, XPS, NAA and Ion-Beam Spectroscopic Techniques, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 3-540-30277-8
Note: Covers several nuclear techniques. - Available as E-book at Politecnico library
editor-in-chief: John C. Lindon, Encyclopedia of Spectroscopy and Spectrometry, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2000, ISBN: 978-0-12-226680-5
Note: Note: Available as E-book at Politecnico library

The course aims at providing the students with a critical understanding of the philosophical foundations of science and technology. But what is the relation between philosophy and science? On the one hand, the discoveries by scientists are often inspired by philosophical ideas. On the other hand, scientific achievements and technological advancements pose deep conceptual questions to philosophers. The connection between these disciplines is thus so tied that it becomes difficult to even draw a border between them. This course explores such a connection through the study of important episodes in the history of science. Outstanding issues of philosophy of science and technology, such as scientific progress, the method of science and the confirmation of theories and laws, will be addressed. Moreover, a particular focus will be devoted to philosophical questions concerning the nature of space as they emerge in the foundations of science, especially in relation to the famous debate between Leibniz and Newton.

The course aims at providing the students with a critical understanding of the philosophical foundations of science and technology.
But what is the relation between philosophy and science? On the one hand, the discoveries by scientists are often inspired by philosophical ideas. On the other hand, scientific achievements and technological advancements pose deep conceptual questions to philosophers. The connection between these disciplines is thus so tied that it becomes difficult to even draw a border between them. This course explores such a connection through the study of important episodes in the history of science. Outstanding issues of philosophy of science and technology, such as scientific progress, the method of science and the confirmation of theories and laws, will be addressed. Moreover, a particular focus will be devoted to philosophical questions concerning the nature of space as they emerge in the foundations of science, especially in relation to the famous debate between Leibniz and Newton. Finally, in the context of philosophy of technology, we will explore epistemic tools that are used to draw scientifically-informed inferences, such as computer simulations and thought experiments.
Here's below a list of the main topics:

• Method of science
• Demarcation between science and pseudo-science
• Confirmation
• Scientific Progress
• Philosophy of Space: Absolutism vs Relationism
• Scientific Reasoning
• Philosophy of Technology

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Altro
Final written exam based on general questions about the topics of the lectures: specifically, the students are assigned to write several essays, which have to be emailed directly to the instructors at the following address: [email protected]. There are also individual class presentations scheduled during the term

Alan Chalmers, What is This Thing Called Science?, Editore: Hackett Pub Co Inc
Nick Huggett, Space from Zeno to Einstein: Classic Readings With a Contemporary Commentary, Editore: Bradford Books

The course aims at providing the concepts required for the description and characterization of molecular materials. This is essential since most applications of molecular materials in nanotechnology are based upon the specific features that emerge “at the bottom”. The course introduces the fundamental principles underlying the experimental techniques commonly employed for the characterization of molecular materials and discusses how these methods provide insight into their physical and chemical properties. The course will progressively explore molecular materials across multiple length scales, from collective molecular assemblies to the properties and behavior of individual molecules. Throughout the course, the concepts introduced will be discussed in the context of selected classes of molecular materials, emphasizing their relevance for nanotechnology applications.

The student is expected to acquire the fundamental concepts underlying the physical properties of molecular materials, with particular emphasis on their interaction with light (DdD1). The student will develop a solid understanding of the principles of spectroscopic and electronic techniques most widely used for the characterization of molecular materials and will be able to interpret the information provided by these methods (DdD1–DdD2). Through the analysis of experimental data, the student will gain the skills required to characterize molecular materials and to relate spectroscopic observations to their structural and functional properties (DdD2).

The course will introduce the fundamental physical concepts governing the electronic and optical pro perties of molecular materials. These concepts will then be applied to the interpretation of the main experimental techniques used for the characterization of molecular materials. The final part of the course will discuss selected classes of molecular materials, illustrating how characterization methods can be used to understand their properties and assess their suitability for applications in nanotechnology.
The course will cover the following topics:

• Fundamentals of molecular materials
  Energy levels and optical transitions in molecular materials, light-matter interaction and associated absorption and emission processes, relation between molecular structure and optical response.
• Characterization techniques for molecular materials.
  Introduction to the technique, interpretation of experimental data, and correlation with the physical properties of molecular materials.
  Techniques: absorption and fluorescence spectroscopies, scanning probe microscopies, electron microscopies, super-resolution and single-molecule techniques.
• Molecular materials for nanotechnology.
  Correlation between characterization results, structure, and functional performance.
  Bibliografia
  Risorsa bibliografica facoltativa Peter Atkins, Julio de Paula, Physical Chemistry, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 9780198700722
  Note:
  Lecture notes and slides will be distributed during the course.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will consist of an oral discussion on the main topics covered during the course. The examiner will typically propose two major topics, which will be discussed in detail following the structure and concepts presented during the lectures. The student is expected to describe and discuss the selected subjects clearly. Particular attention will be given to the ability to interpret spectroscopic and microscopic data, to identify the most appropriate characterization approach for a given material or application, and to establish connections between material properties and their use in nanotechnology.
The main Dublin descriptors tested during the exam are: Knowledge and understanding, Applying knowledge and understanding, Making judgements, Learning skills.

The course Physics of Disordered Materials is a 5-CFU course. The present detailed program defines aims, educational outcomes and the syllabus of the course.
Physics of disordered materials aims at introducing the physics of structurally disordered condensed matter, with attention to irradiation effects. After introducing the concepts of order, disorder, and order parameters (long range), the basic mechanisms of structural modification upon irradiation of a crystal with energetic particles are addressed, referring to the elastic collision regime. The phenomenology of the glass transition, including the interplay between thermodynamics and kinetics is studied before offering a robust overview over the main techniques of experimental investigation of structural disorder. Attention is then focused to the structure of clusters, taken as the constitutive bricks of disordered materials, to the synthesis of nanocrystalline and nanoglassy materials, discussing a selection of their peculiar properties, to quasicrystals, studying their relation to crystals and the features of the quasicrystalline-amorphous state transition. The Anderson-Mott localization is introduced.

After attending the course and after a positive evaluation, it is expected that the students:
1. know and are able to describe the effect of energetic particle irradiation (elastic collision regime) on the disordering and the structural stability of a target (DdD1)
2. know and are able to describe the phenomenology of the glass transition for different classes of non-polymeric materials, considering the interplay between thermodynamic and kinetic aspects of the transition (DdD1)
3. know and are able to choose (in principle) among the main experimental techniques to study structural disorder, depending on the kind of information each of them provides, in pareticular concerning the investigation of short and medium range order in a structurally disordered material (DdD1)
4. know and are able to describe the basics of the physics of atomic clusters (inert gases and simple metals) and of quasicrystals in relation to their structure, as well as the essentials of transport in heavily disordered materials and the pertinent modeling (Anderson-Mott localization) (DdD1)

structural order; kinds of disorder; ordering rules; long range order parameters
phenomenology of the glass transition; thermodynamic and kinetic concepts; glass forming ability (GFA) criteria
physical mechanisms of structural modification upon energetic particle bombardment:
electrons: replacement collision sequence (RCS)
ions (elastic regime): linear versus dense collision cascade
microscopic analysis of the space-time evolution of a collision cascade
GFA in irradiated materials: interpretative and predictive criteria
experimental techniques for the analysis of structural disorder: (a), elements of scattering theory; scattering from structurally disordered materials; (b), X-ray absorption spectroscopies: EXAFS; XANES; (c), vibrational spectroscopies: IR absorption and Raman scattering
(a), short range order, chemical (CSRO), topological (TSRO); (b), medium range order (MRO); (c), atomic clusters; fullerene; fullerite; hollow diamonds
(*) nanocrystalline materials; structure and role of the interfaces; nanoglasses; synthesis of nanostructured materials via irradiation; nanostructured material response to irradiation
(*) quasicrystals: discovery, definition, aperiodic and quasi-periodic lattices; real quasicrystals; nano-quasicrystals; quasicrystal-amorphous and the reverse transition
(*) transport in heavily disordered materials: the Anderson-Mott localization; historical introduction; conducting vs localized electrons; the metal-insulator transition; localization of light: from ballistic to diffusive transport to Anderson localization; localization and enhanced transport in quasicrystals
Every year will be selected either section 6*, or section 7*, or section 8*.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Valutazione continua condizionata (a scelta del docente)
The evaluation consists in an oral examination that points at verifying the knowledge of the course topics, with particular reference to the ability in interpreting the physical bases of the different topics. The student will be able to demonstrate that he knows, has understood, and is able to describe, using the appropriate language and mathematical formalism, the course content. In particular the exam aims at verifying that the candidate:
1. knows and is able to discuss the effect of energetic particle irradiation (elastic collision regime) on the structural stability of a target, analysing the degree of structural order by using an appropriate order parameter
2. knows and is able to discuss the phenomenology of the glass transition for different classes of (non-polymeric) materials and the interplay between thermodynamic and kinetic aspects of the transition
3. knows and is able to conceptually select the most appropriate among the main experimental techniques introduced to study structural disorder. The choice will rest on the critical knowledge of the kind of information that each technique offers to analyse short and medium-range order in structurally disordered materials of different kind
4. knows and is able to discuss.
a. the basics of the physics of atomic clusters and the models for their structural evolution and stability
b. the basics of the physics of quasicystals and the models for their structural evolution and stability
c. the basics of transport in heavily disordered materials and its modeling

K.E. Sickafus, E.A. Kotomin, B.P. Uberuaga (Eds.), Radiation Effects in Solids, Editore: Springer, Dordrecht, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 1-4020-5294-4
K. Binder, W. Kob, Glassy materials and disordered solids, Editore: World Scientific, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-981-4350-17-4
P. M. Ossi, Disordered Materials - An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2024, ISBN: 978-3-662-68426-9

The course aims at presenting a detailed quanto-mechanical description of the behavior of electrons and phonons in nanoscale materials and devices. The occurrence of peculiar quantum phenomena is demonstrated by means of analytical models focusing on confinement effects and their correspondent characteristic length scales (to answer the question: ‘ why does it happen and under which conditions? ’). The discussion of the effects arising from electron and phonon confinement in low dimensional structures (2-D, 1-D and 0-D) is accompanied by seminal examples of real nanostructures, experimental techniques and possible applications in novel devices taken form the recent literature (to answer the question: ‘ how to observe it and/or how to use it? ’). The physical models used to describe the properties are critically discussed to outline the premises, the underlying assumptions and the related limitations (to answer the question: ‘ to what extent is it valid? ’).

At the end of the course the student
Knows the behaviour of electrons and phonons in nanostructures and confined systems and the how they can be experimentally measured (DdD1)
Knows how to use the tools of quantum mechanics to properly describe the change in the electronic and phononic properties by model systems and understands the limits of the adopted physical models (DdD1).
Is able to apply analytical models to critically discuss the exploitation of quantum behavior in novel devices and the related length scales (DdD2)
Is able to apply the models presented in the course to critically discuss the electronic and vibrational properties of carbon nanostructures outlining the differences with respect to conventional materials (DdD2).

Introduction and preliminary concepts: what's the critical length for a metal nanocrystal to become an insulator: the Kubo Gap
Transport in nanostructures: Fundamental length scales. Transport regimes, parallel and perpendicular transport. Resonant Tunneling diode (RTD). Ballistic transport in nanowires. Quantum Interefrence Transistor (QUIT), Single electron transistor (SET) and Coulomb Blockade.
Phonons in nanostructures: Surface phonons and localized vibrations in confined systems. Acoustic waves in low dimensional structures and phonon density of states (PDOS). Raman spectroscopy in solids: from crystals to nanostructures.
Electrons in nanostructures: Effective mass approximation and the envelope function. Electron states and DOS of semiconductor heterostructures, wires, dots and artificial structures. STM and STS to measure electronic properties in nanostructures.
Carbon nanostructures: fabrication and properteis of graphene, derivation of graphene bandstructure, Dirac’s cones and massless Dirac fermions; e lectrons and phonons in single wall nanotubes (the zone folding approximation), derivation of the metallicity condition and size dependent gap in semiconducting tubes; Raman of carbon: from graphite to graphene and nanotubes. 2-D materials beyond graphene. Carbon atomic wires.
Thematic Seminars: some seminars will be given on specific topics by researchers working in the field of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology.
Laboratory visits: laboratory visits are aimed at showing STM and Raman measurements of nanostructures including semiconductors, oxides and carbon-based systems (graphene, nanotubes, cluster-assembled carbon). Lab visits will be scheduled according to the number of particpants.

Prova orale obbligatoria
The examination will consist in an oral discussion (about 30-45 minutes) of the topics presented in the course. The examination will verify that the student:

• knows the topics with the related hypotheses, the critical points, the mathematical approach and the physical constrains and consequences. Understanding the physics underlying the mathematical approach is considered a fundamental aspect.
• knows the value or order of magnitude of the main important quantities used to describe nanostructures (universal constants, fundamental length scales, typical size and energy values).
• is able to apply the tools of quantum mechanics to describe and critically discuss the electron and phonon states in confined systems and particularly in carbon nanostructures
• is able to use analytical models to describe the working of a quantum device

V.V. Mitin, V.A. Kochelap, M.A. Strocscio, Quantum Heterostructures, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1999, ISBN: 0521636353
Note: Additional material is available in the course website on the BeeP portal
Vladimir V. Mitin, Viatcheslav A. Kochelap, Michael A. Stroscio, Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science, Nanotechnology, Engineering, and Applications, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2007, ISBN: 0521881722
Note: Additional material is available in the course website on the BeeP portal
H.-S. Philip Wong and Deji Akinwande, Carbon Nanotube and Graphene Device Physics, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-0521519052
Note: Additional material is available in the course website on the BeeP portal

FISICA DEI PLASMI I
L'insegnamento intende fornire le conoscenze essenziali della fisica della materia allo stato di plasma, con particolare attenzione ai plasmi fortemente ionizzati e ad alta temperatura. Elenco sintetico dei contenuti: Richiami di elettromagnetismo; Elementi di elettrodinamica dei mezzi continui; Caratteristiche fondamentali di un plasma; Teoria delle orbite; Modelli per la descrizione del plasma; Onde in un plasma I; Emissione di radiazione elettromagnetica in un plasma I; Fusione termonucleare controllata I.

The goal of this course is to achieve a deep comprehension on the principles of plastic deformation of metals, as well as the most common technological processing of metals (bulk and sheet). The fundamentals of plastic deformation are presented and the main plastic deformation processes in industry are discussed. Tools for the texture analysis of deformed metals and some theoretical tools to design deformation processes are provided.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:

• know and understand of the basis of the plastic deformation of metals (DdD1);
• know and understand the main industrial deformation processes for metal processing (bulk and sheet) (DdD1);
• understand and apply fundaments tools for designing deformation processes in metallic materials (DdD1 - DdD2).

The plasticity on the crystalline basis: dislocations theory and the mechanisms for metal strengthening. The theory of the recrystallization.
Measurements and interpretation of crystallographic textures (polar diagram, Inverse polar diagram, ODF, misorientation, etc.). The anisotropy and formability of the plastically deformed alloys (coefficient of anisotropy and Forming Limit Diagrams).
Theories and concepts of formability, formability diagrams and testing. The transformation textures and the relations with the final mechanical properties.
Main industrial technologies for the plastic deformation of the metals: rolling, extrusion, drawing and forging.
The most significant thermo-mechanical routes for the production of mild steels, aluminum alloys, brasses, etc.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Written test with some problems and questions. This test will verify if the students have got the theoretical knowledge and understanding about plastic deformation of metals, as well as the ability of apply these concepts for processing design.
The student must be able to demonstrate good knowledge and critically discuss the course topics.

D. Hull, D.J. Bacon, Introduction to Dislocations, Editore: Butterworth-Heinemann, Anno edizione: 2011
W.F. Hosford, R.M Caddell, Metal Forming: Mechanics and Metallurgy, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 2011
O. Engler, V. Randle, Introduction to Texture Analysis: Macrotexture, Microtexture, and Orientation Mapping, Editore: CRC Press, Anno edizione: 2009
R.W.K. Honeycombe, The Plastic Deformation of Metals, Editore: Edward Arnold, Anno edizione: 1984

To increase the transdisciplinary basic knowledge and understanding of the key facts regarding the pollution phenomena casused by plastic disposal, mostly in aquatic environments, locally and globally.
Main course contents: disposal/fate/recovery of plastic and bioplastic, standard to define bioplastic biodegradabiity, bacterial production of VFA, PHA and EPS, the environmental problems related to the often incorrect use of plastics, including micro and nanoplastic and possible solutions.

Knowledge and understanding
The student will gain an overall knowledge and understanding of of the fate/disposal and recovery route of plastic and bioplastics in the environment; of the environmental problems/impacts and solution approaches.
Application of knowledge and understanding
The student will have to apply the knowledge acquired to perform multidisciplinary projects/case studies and lab activities on actual and emerging problems. These activities will enhance the cultural level and capability of students to confront with the challenges and opportunities coming from plastic and bioplastic in the environment and in different economical sectors.
Autonomy of judgment
The student will carry out autonomous choices and interpretations with respect to case studies and lab activities supplied, being able to debate and explain the pros/cons/uncertainties of the solutions proposed or results obtained

1. Introduction to macroplastic pollution in aquatic environment, evolution, impacts, modelling, solutions
2. Biodegradation of plastics: fundamentals and standards. Fate of biodegradable plastics in the environment and in wastewater/biosolids tretament plant
3. Methods to recover and produce biopolymers from liquid and solid organic waste.
4. Microplastics: origin, fate, impacts, solutions

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
The written exam is composed by 2 questions and 2 calculation exercises. The candidate shall answer to 1 question and 1 exercise.
The evaluation/mark depends on:
question: breadth and accuracy of the content reported, level of argumentation and understanding of the question as a whole
exercise: correctness of the solution methods applied and the results obtained

One general objective of the course is the introduction of the students to the general topics of sustainability and circular economy, with particular reference to the cases of polymer industry.
Another more specific objective is the study of theoretical and practical aspects related to physical and chemical recycling technologies for end-of-life polymers and polymer-based composites.
A third objective of the course is the description of bioplastics, including their production, chemical microstucture, physical properties and biodegradation behaviour.

After attending the course and after the final examination, the student will:
know and understand the fundamentals of circular economy (DD1)
know the different types of available polymer recycling technologies, including logistical and regulatory implications (DD1)
know and understand the main physico-chemical principles related to polymer compounding (DD1)
know the main types of additives and industrial machinery to be used in polymer mechanical reprocessing, and how to design, select and optimize them on the basis of the desired set of material performances (DD1, DD2)
know the main types of available polymers from renewable sources as well as biodegradable polymers (DD1)
know and calculate Material Circularity Indicators (DD1, DD2)
know and apply the basics of process economics applied to plastic recycling (DD1, DD2)
be able to apply the above described knowledge aimed at the design and selection of optimal components and machinery for the production or recycling of a polymeric compound at industrial scale (DD2)
These learning outcomes are expected to provide the student with the needed knowledge tools necessary for successfully performing their future activities in an industrial environment, with particular reference to polymer recycling and compounding industry, their technological testing, and the evaluation of the associated environmental impacts

The main topics of the course are:
1) Fundamentals of circular economy and overview of the global market of plastics; circular economy metrics; national and EU regulations for end-of-life plastics
2) Polymer waste management: logistics and pretreatments, separation and sorting techniques, physical recycling versus chemical recycling, energy recovery
3) Review of physico-chemical principles applied to polymer technology; solubility thermodynamics for polymer-based binary mixtures; diffusivity, barrier properties in packaging materials, mechanisms of loss of additives; wettability, contact angle, hysteresis, determination of surface tension components, work of adhesion and Young-Duprè equation
4) Mechanical recycling and compounding: shredding, mixing, flow analysis; quality of mixtures, intensity and scale of segregation; liquid-liquid miscible mixing, liquid-liquid immiscible mixing, solid-liquid mixing; analysis of the twin-screw extrusion process, other mechanical mixers, design of mixing elements, examples of industrial compounding cycles
5) Polymer degradation behaviour: thermal degradation, photodegradation, oxidative degradation, hydrolysis; analytical techniques to monitor polymer degradation and durability; accelerated tests; selection of thermal and photochemical stabilizers; re action to fire and polymer combustion; fire retardant additives; testing and regulations.
6) Additives for polymer compounding and reformulation: plasticizers and fillers, nanofillers and nanocomposites, tribology and self-lubricating compounds; pigments, colour mixing and colour matching technologies, Kubelka-Munk equations
7) Other physical recycling technologies, dissolution methods; emerging application to multilayer food packaging films
8) Chemical recycling of thermoplastics and thermosets, pyrolysis and solvolysis processes, reactors, microwave heating. Chemical and thermochemical recycling of composites and rubbers. Vitrimers and reversible chemistries for polymer repair and easy recycling
9) Basics of process economics; capex and opex evaluation, profitability analysis, support to decisions
10) Biodegradation and bioplastics; polymeric materials from renewable resources, enzymatic degradation; biodegradation testing and regulations; specific cases of biopolyesters and polysaccharides (starch-based blends)

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The examination will be an oral discussion about one or more of the course topics, chosen by the examiner. The student can also propose to elaborate on a specific topic of the course, and to show the results of this study in form of a PPT presentation. The student must be also able to clearly describe and critically discuss the proposed topics, highlighting the hypotheses, assumptions, critical points, the physical meaning and its consequences, including the mathematical approach where needed. The student should also be able to apply the theoretical knowledge to solving specific problems or troubleshooting some situations typically met in a real industrial environment.

Lecture's notes
L. Mascia, The role of additives in plastics, Editore: Arnold, Anno edizione: 1974, ISBN: 0713133287
C. Rauwendaal, Polymer Mixing, Editore: Hanser, Anno edizione: 1998, ISBN: 1-56990-223-2
S.A. Ashter, Introduction to Bioplastics Engineering, Editore: Elsevier, Anno edizione: 2016

The course aims at illustrating the application of continuum mechanics and rheology to model thermoplastic polymer processing and apply them to the processing technologies most commonly adopted for this class of materials. Some of the models will be extended to food processing.

After attending the course and after the final exams the students will:

• know and understand how to apply the mass, momentum and energy conservation principles along with the proper constitutive equation to model simple flow cases; (DdD1)
• know and understand the different possible constitutive behaviors of polymeric solution and melts; (DdD1)
• be able to select the costitutive equation appropriate to each considered case; (DdD2)
• know and understand the extrusion process; (DdD1)
• be able to predict the effects of screw geometry, process conditions, and fluid behavior on the working point of an extruder; (DdD2)
• know and understand the post extrusion processes and their effects to final product performance; (DdD1)
• know and understand the injection molding process; (DdD1)
• be able to estimate the effects of mold geometry, process conditions, and fluid behavior on injection molding process and outcomes; (DdD2)
• be able to autonomously apply the previous knowledge to model complex cases and answer open ended questions. (DdD2)

Basics - An outline of continuum mechanics: concept of a continuum, stress, deformation and deformation rate tensors in a continuum, mass, momentum and energy conservation in solids and fluids; boundary conditions. This topic will be offered thorugh a split classroom approach
Simple model flows - Pressure and drag flows of newtonian and nonnewtonian flows thorugh channels with different geometry will be modelled, in order to i) learn how to practically apply continuum mechanics to fluids, and ii) build a library of building blocks for more complex models. Students will tackle the topic in a project laboratory to be carried out in small groups.
Rheology - Phenomenology and description of the newtonian, non-newtonian and viscoelastic behaviour. Simple model flows of newtonian and non-newtonian melts and solutions. Rheometry laboratory. After having understood the main aspects of complex fluids rheology, students will have to design and perform a rheological characterization of complex fluids.
Extrusion - Plasticating extruder: conveying and melting of the solid pellet. Metering extruder: modelling of the flow of a Newtonian and non-newtonian fluid in isothermal and adiabatic condition; discussion of the imposed approximation; optimal design. Die forming: modelling and design. Die swell; melt instabilities and fracture. The topic will be presented in ex-cathedra classes. A project will be proposed to apply the presented concepts.
Post extrusion forming - Fiber spinning, Film Blowing and the importance of extensional rheological response. Ex cathedra classes.
Injection molding - Description and analysis of injection moulding; isothermal newtonian and non-newtonian flow into a cavity; viscous heating in a runner; effects of pressure dependent viscosity; runner and cavity combination; viscous heating in a cavity flow; effect of heat transfer to the cavity walls; cooling of a cavity without flow; shrinkage during cooling and packing; thermal stresses during cooling. After ex-cathedra classes, a short project on inection molding of a simple geometry will be proposed to students in small groups.
As the lab activity require access to resources with limited availability, the number of students admitted to the class will be limited to 30. Students from U2B-Polymer Engineering will be given priority to the course, other applications will be accepted on first come/first served basis.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, individuale, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua obbligatoria
The examination will consist in the evaluation of the group works assigned during the semester and discussed during the course classes, and an individual oral discussion on the written assignments assigned each student during the course.
Both the group projects and the assignments will present a series of problems, some of which with multiple solutions or open solutions. They are aimed at testing:
i) the student's understanding of the course topics;
ii) her/his ability to critically and autonomously apply the acquired knowledge to cases not discussed in class;
iii) her/his ability to present them in a clearly understandable form.
The final oral colloquium will be devoted to the discussion of each student's report and, starting from the report, on the topics of the course.

Middleman, S., Fundamentals of polymer processing, Editore: McGraw-Hill, Anno edizione: 1977, ISBN: 0-07-041851-9
Macosko, C.W., Rheology: Principles, Measurements and Applications, Editore: Wiley-VCH, Anno edizione: 1994, ISBN: 978-0471185758
Tadmor Z., Gogos C., Principles of Polymer Processing, Editore: Wiley-Interscience; 2 edition, Anno edizione: 2006, ISBN: 978-0471387701
Rauwendaal, C., Polymer Extrusion, 4th edition, Editore: Hanser Publications, Anno edizione: 2001, ISBN: 978-1569903216

The goal of Materials Engineering, Recycling & Environmental Impact is to enable students to achieve a complete comprehension about the processes and plants aimed at the production of metal alloys (i.e. pig irons, steel grades, aluminium alloys, zinc, copper, nickel, titanium) and at studying the environmental impact of the process and the recycling techniques (even assisted by Artificial Intelligence) to select the scrap, to recover the wasted heat and exploit by-products and wasted residuals. The main topics are: Fundamentals of thermodynamics and kinetics involved in the production process of the main metallic materials, Production systems for the reduction of the ores, Techniques for recycling, Use of advanced techniques for scrap selection and checks, The control of air and water emissions and the correct management of the processes wastes and by products, Pyrolysis techniques for destroying the wasted materials, Design of the final products in order to avoid the leakage of dangerous metals and to allow the complete recycling of the materials and the recovery of the functional metals, Practical application of Life Cycle Assesment to define the environmental impact.

This teaching program aims to equip students with the knowledge of production planning and control principles, methods, and techniques in the context of nano and micro production systems, covering both the fundamentals and the latest trends.
Upon completion of the program, students are expected to develop a comprehensive understanding of the core concepts and theories of production planning and control processes, to acquire capabilities in fluently applying basic and advanced methods to manage and optimize the planning and control processes in nano and micro production systems, and to effectively communicate of the planning decisions.

By the end of the course, students will have mastered the content and practices as set out in the teaching objectives.
In particular, students will be able to:

• understand the basics and principles of production planning and control in nano and micro production systems (ILO1)
• identify and analyze the problems associated with production planning and control in the context of nano and micro production systems (ILO2.1)
• apply appropriate production planning and control method and technique to the focal production planning and control problem (ILO2.2)
• design solutions and take decisions for the focal production planning and control problem (ILO2.3)
• communicate concepts, strategies, and solutions effectively in the context of production planning and control in nano and micro production systems (ILO3)

Teaching activities are carried out by means of frontal lectures, exercise sessions and other formats, with interventions from the industry.
The topics covered in the course are divided into the following modules:
Module 1: Introduction to Production Systems

• Introduction to Production Systems: Definition and terminologies
  Module 2: Basics of Production Systems (10%)
• Classification of production systems, typologies and characteristics; Classification of assembly systems, typologies and characteristics
• Basics of Nano and Micro Production Systems: Overview of nano and micro production systems, manufacturing technologies, and processes
  Module 3: Basics of Production Planning and Control (10%)
• Key concepts and principles of production planning and control;
• Relevant costs for production planning and control cycle
  Module 4: The Production Planning and Control Cycle for Nano and Mirco Production Systems (60%)
• Demand planning and management; forecasting methods and techniques
• Long/mid-term planning: aggregate planning, capacity planning and resource allocation; master production schedule
• Material management and Inventory management: material requirements planning; Inventory management methods and techniques
• Short-term planning: production scheduling and sequencing, optimization algorithms
  Module 5: Basics of Performance Measurement (10%)
• Performance measurement concepts and terminologies, operating conditions and internal/external performance, performance measurement scorecards
• Performance measurement basics for productive factor, warehouse and services
  Module 6: Advanced Topics and Trends in Nano and Micro Production Systems (10%)
  Note: The syllabus may subject to change at the discretion of the instructor – any changes will be timely communicated to the students. Please refer to the course WeBeep channel.

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The assessment of learning outcome will take the form of a combination of group assignment and oral test.

• Oral test, covering all contents introduced and discussed in the lectures, designed to evaluate ability of the students in understanding (ILO 1) and applying (ILO2.2) appropriate principles, method and technique in the area of production planning and control for nano and micro systems and aims to evaluate the ability of the students in communicating and discussing concepts, strategies, and solutions in the context of production planning and control in nano and micro production systems (ILO3).
• Group assignment, developed on specific themes addressed in the lectures, is set to assess the ability of the students in identifying and analyzing the problems associated with production planning and control (ILO2.1) and consequently in drawing up appropriate solutions and decisions based on informed analysis (ILO2.3). Together with the oral test, it also evaluates ability of the students in presenting and justifying strategies and solutions of production planning and control in the context of nano and micro production systems (ILO3).
  Note: The assessment methods may subject to minor changes at the discretion of the instructor. Please refer to the information presented at the beginning of the course.

All lecture materials will be made available on WeBeep WeBeep Channel
Andrea Sianesi, Production systems management: Planning, scheduling, control, measurement and improvement, Editore: Mondadori, Anno edizione: 2021, ISBN: 9788861848924
Toly Chen, Production Planning and Control in Semiconductor Manufacturing: Big Data Analytics and Industry 4.0 Applications, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2022, ISBN: 9783031140655
F. Robert Jacobs, William Lee Berry, D. Clay Whybark, Thomas Vollmann, Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management, Editore: McGraw-Hill Education, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 9780071750318

The course provides an overview of the main processes used for the recovery and recycling of materials, metals, and selected non-metallic elements and chemical species from a wide range of secondary resources. These include residues from secondary metallurgy (e.g., electric arc furnace (EAF) dusts, brass production dusts, and metallurgical slags), end-of-life products (e.g., waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE), lead-acid batteries, and lithium batteries), and by-products generated by industrial production and processing (e.g., urban sewage sludge, electroplating and electrowinning sludges, spent pickling solutions, metal processing wastes, and fly ashes from thermoelectric power plants).
Particular emphasis is placed on the thermodynamic and kinetic aspects governing the principal hydrometallurgical processes. The course examines the physicochemical principles underlying resource recovery and recycling technologies and discusses their economic and environmental sustainability through the application of thermodynamic methods. In addition, practical engineering aspects, including process design, equipment selection, and industrial plant operation, are introduced to provide students with an understanding of the implementation of recycling technologies at industrial scale.
The course includes two to three visits to industrial plants, allowing students to observe recycling and extractive metallurgy processes in an industrial environment.

To understand the physical and chemical principles underlying the treatment / recovery processes (DdD1).
To be able to read process diagrams (DdD2).
To know to formulate and understand the balances of matter and energy (DdD2).

Materials sources
Mineral reserves and resources
Critical raw materials and geopolitical aspects
Reclamation and recycling
Classification of processes
Physical and physico-chemical processes
Hydrometallurgical processes
Biotechnological processes
Pyrometallurgical processes
Leaching of ores, concentrates and secondary materials
Principles of leaching
Practice of leaching
Separation, purification and enrichment processes for treatment pf pregnant leach and waste solutions
Ion-exchange processes utilizing solid resins
Adsorption processes using activated charcoal
Liquid-liquid extraction processes
Liquid membrane processes
Precipitation processes for metal separation and recovery from solution
Chemical precipitation processes
Reductive precipitation processes
Reclamation of metals from waste and effluents by precipitation processes
Electrolytic processes for the recovery and purification of metals
Electrowinning of metals
Electrorefining of metals
Case studies. Urban sewage sludges. Sludges and pickling solutions from surface treatment industry. Electric arc furnace dusts, metallurgical slags (Waelz). Flying ashes from thermal power stations. Electric and electronic components. Electrical batteries (lead and lithium batteries). Catalytic converters. Photovoltaic solar pane

Altro
Group presentations. Two presentations per group. Topics to be agreed with the teacher.

The course introduces students to the application of materials science and related technologies for the study, monitoring, and conservation of Cultural Heritage. It provides a multidisciplinary framework for understanding the value of Cultural Heritage and the fundamental principles of its preservation, with particular emphasis on the relationship between material properties, manufacturing techniques, deterioration processes, and conservation strategies.
Students will become familiar with the main categories of tangible cultural heritage, including architectural heritage and sculpture, mural and easel paintings, polychrome artworks, metal artifacts, paper-based objects such as drawings and manuscripts, and modern and contemporary artworks made from polymeric materials and design objects. The specific case studies examined each year may vary according to opportunities for site visits, museum activities, and direct observation of artworks.
The course presents the materials, technologies, and execution techniques that characterize different classes of artifacts, highlighting how their knowledge is essential for conservation and monitoring activities. Particular attention is devoted to the mechanisms of deterioration resulting from environmental exposure and atmospheric pollution, as well as to the principles of preventive conservation and the materials and methods used in conservation interventions. Examples and applications will focus especially on the conservation of architectural surfaces and other outdoor cultural heritage assets.

1 Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
After attending the course and after the final examination, the student:
knows the main concepts of Cultural Heritage, deterioration, safeguard and conservation, monitoring.
knows the main characteristics of different Cultural Heritage items such as historic buildings and sculptures, paintings and mural paintings, modern and contemporary artworks, bronzes; is able to read and classify artifacts according to material science profile;
is able to draft the main durability and conservation issues of the different Cultural Heritage items;
2 Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
After attending the course and after the final examination, the student:
is able to understand and draft a diagnostic and conservation work;
is able to summarize the results of a bibliographic research in the field of Heritage Science
3. Communication skills (DdD4)
The attending student will be able to present and communicate a selected and complex case study in Heritage Science.
These outcomes are expected to provide the student basic knowledge tools necessary for their involvement in the field of research in Heritage science, but at the same time it offers the opportunity to deepen the knowledge of some investigation techniques, in lab and onsite, and materials technologies.

Main topics:
What is Cultural Heritage: concept and legislation, What are the main international Entities for the preservation of Cultural Heritage
What are preservation and conservation, What is Heritage Science
Built Heritage: deterioration and conservation processes of stone materials and ceramics
Innovative materials and nanomaterials for the conservation
Mural Paintings: an introduction to material characteristics from pre-historic rock art to XXth century murals. Main deterioration and conservation problems. Street Art.
Painting on panel and canvas: painting materials and techniques over the ages. Pigments and binders and their deterioration.
Additional topics according to the case studies and visits
Metallic artifacts, bronzes: properties and deterioration problems, corrosion and conservation.
Street Art and contemporary muralism: properties and major deterioration problems.
Early polymeric materials used in objects and works of art. The challenges of conserving plastics in museum environmental conditions.
Paper, books and manuscripts: properties and deterioration phenomena.

Prova scritta facoltativa (a scelta dello studente), senza prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
For attending Students. The exam consists of a 20 min. oral presentation about a topic selected and agreed with the Teacher and based on a bibliographic research done by the Student in the current scientific literature available at https://www.biblio.polimi.it/; the colloquium will be completed by some questions about the general background on the same topic. The exam will be sufficient after a presentation characterized by sufficient clarity, synthesis and respect of assigned time. The Student should also demonstrate to be able to discuss similar arguments connected to those of the presentation and possess a general overview of the argument.
For not-attending Students. The exam consists of a written multiple choice test about the whole Program. The program is available on WeBeep, together with slides and other texts and documents, at the end of the semester. The test is composed by a number of multiple choice questions and 2 open questions. The Student should get a sufficient evaluation or higher (>18/30).

M. Matteini, R. Mazzeo, A. Moles, Chemistry for Restoration, Editore: Nardini Editore, Anno edizione: 2016, ISBN: 978-88-404-4450-5
Bastidas, D. M., & Cano, E. (Eds.), Advanced Characterization Techniques, Diagnostic Tools and Evaluation Methods in Heritage Science, Editore: Berlin: Springer., Anno edizione: 2018
Siegfried Siegesmund and Rolf Snethlage, Stone in Architecture: Properties, Durability, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2014
David A. Scott, Gerhard Eggert, Iron and Steel: Corrosion, Colorants, Conservation, Editore: Archetype Books, Anno edizione: 2009
David A. Scott, Copper and Bronze in Art: Corrosion, Colorants, Conservation, Editore: Getty Trust Publications: Getty Conservation Institute, Anno edizione: 2002
Yvonne Shashoua, Conservation of Plastics: Materials science, degradation and preservation, Editore: Butterworth-Heinemann, Anno edizione: 2008
Baglioni, Piero, Chelazzi, David, Giorgi, Rodorico, Nanotechnologies in the Conservation of Cultural Heritage A compendium of materials and techniques, Editore: Springer Netherlands, Anno edizione: 2015, ISBN: 978-94-017-9302-5

Il corso fornisce una visione completa della tecnologia MEMS, dai principi fondamentali alle applicazioni pratiche, introducendo gli studenti a future prospettive di carriera nel settore della microelettronica. Accelerometri, giroscopi e sensori di pressione fungeranno da casi di studio. Gli argomenti trattati riguardano: le principali tecniche di fabbricazione nell'ambito dei semiconduttori e dei MEMS in particolare (fotolitografia, deposizione, etching, HF vapor release, wafer bonding), i principi di base di progettazione e simulazione, l'integrazione con l'elettronica di controllo e il "packaging", le modalità di test per garantire le prestazioni e l'affidabilità di un dispositivo. Il programma del corso esplora lo sviluppo di un prodotto MEMS dalla prima fase di "ricerca e sviluppo" fino alla produzione e alla qualifica finale. Teoria e pratica si mescolano: esercitazioni di simulazione al computer e attività sperimentali nei laboratori Polifab integrano e supportano le lezioni frontali. Due visite agli impianti industriali di STMicroelectronics offrono agli studenti la possibilità di vedere dal vivo i concetti e le teorie apprese in classe.

The course provides a conceptual framework for understanding the Physics of low-dimensional semiconductor systems, where quantum confinement and strain effects are exploited for tailoring electronic and optical properties.
The physical properties of a variety of semiconducting materials, including compound semiconductors and heterostructures, will be analysed on the base of their electronic bandstructure outlining their potentiality in micro/opto-electronics, spintronics and quantum computing.
The effect of quantum confinement in 2-dimensional (quantum wells), 1-dimensional (quantum wires) 0-dimensional (quantum dots) heterostructures will be analyzed also in view of their application in intersubband photodetectors, optical modulators, quantum cascade lasers and split-gate quantum dots.
Strain effects on the bandstructure will be addressed with a focus on strained-Si technology and strain effects on lasing both in III-V and group IV semiconductors.

• Knowledge and understanding
  During the course students will learn the basic principle of tight-binding and k-dot-p bandstructure calculations,how to extract the main electronic and optical properties of Group IV, III-V and II-VI semiconductors from their bandstructure, understand the relevant effects of quantum confinement on the optical and electronic properties of semiconductors, understand the key elements of strain-engineering for bandstructure modification.
• Apply knowledge and understanding
  Numerical models implemented in Python and the analysis of the working principles of devices relying on semiconductor nanostructures will be used to apply in real case studies the fundamental physical properties of semiconductor nanostructures.
• Making Judgements
  The students will learn which physical properties (bandgaps, effective mass, optical bandgap, band-alignment, compressive or tensile strain) are more relevant for a given application such as high mobility transitors, lasers, quantum well infrared photodetectors, resonant tunnel diodes, quantum cascade lasers ans spin-qubits.
• Lifelong learning skills
  Students will gain a broad overview of the physical properties of semiconductor nanostructures and their application in microelectronics, photonics, spintronics and quantum computing.

Semiconductor bandstructures
Bandstructure of group IV and compound (III-V, II-VI) semiconductors. Tight binding model of the bandstructure: implementation in Python. The k-dot-p model: bandgap dependence of the effective mass. Symmetry of conduction (valence) band minima (maxima) and their effect on selection rules for optical absorption: optical spin orientation. The effective mass approximation and the effective mass tensor. Density of states effective mass and conductivity effective mass. Case study: cyclotron resonance measurements.
Semiconductors alloys
Semiconductor alloys: the virtual crystal approximation. Case studies using the tight-binding model implemented in Python. Case study: use of semiconductors alloys in multi-junction solar cells.
Quantum confinement in semiconductor heterostructures
Band‑offset in heterostructures, type I, II and III band‑alignment. Experimental determination of band‑offsets by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy. Theoretical calculation of the band offset using the Jaros model. Case study: Ge-on-Si photodetectors for telecom applications.
Quantum confinement effects in semiconductor heterostructures. The Schrödinger equation for the envelope function: energy levels and density of states in 2D (quantum wells), 1D (quantum wires) and 0D (quantum dots). Case studies: optical modulators based on the quantum confined Stark effect, the quantum cascade laser, split-gate quantum dots and spin qubits.
Strain engineering
Lattice mismatch in heterostructures. Elastic strain in cubic semiconductors. Deformation potentials for hydrostatic and uniaxial strain. Strained silicon technology and strain effects on lasing in III-V and group IV semiconductors. Case studies: reduction of the lasing threshold in strained QW lasers, lasers based on group IV elements.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Students will be evaluated by written and oral examination.
The written exam conists of two exercises which must be solved, also numerically, by the student in approximately one hour.
During the oral exam the student is expected to discuss the physical phenomena which give rise to certain optical/electronic properties. Emphasis is placed on the comprehension of fundamental physical phenomena, also in simplified systems.
The final mark will be composed taking in to account the results of the written and oral exams.

J. Singh, Electronic and optoelectronic properties of semiconductor structures, Editore: Cambridge, ISBN: 0-521-03574-0
J. H. Davies, The physics of low-dimensional semiconductors, Editore: Cambridge, ISBN: 978-0-521-48491-6

As modern technology moves ever further into the nanoscale, it becomes possible to realistically consider the development of quantum computing based on solid state technology. The course on Semiconductor Qubits will develop tools to understand charge transport in high mobility two-dimensional (2D) systems, such as semiconductor quantum wells and sheets of 2D materials, based on the behaviour of electrons in solids in electric and magnetic fields. By electrostatically confining the electrons into quantum dots, their quantum states can be manipulated and measured. The study of the rich physics seen in these systems at low temperatures and high magnetic fields allows us to design qubits and carry out quantum computations, on the way to the near-future development of quantum technology.

• Knowledge and understanding
  The students will learn about the main physical phenomena relevant to low-dimensional semiconductor structures and devices.
  The students will study the electronic properties of semiconductor materials, with particular emphasis on silicon, germanium, and the SiGe alloy system.
  The students will learn the formalism of single and multiple qubit state representation and manipulations.
• Apply knowledge and understanding
  The students will learn how to recognise relevant physical phenomena in terms of their manifestation in experimental results.
  The students will understand how to extract important parameters and figures of merit from experimental transport data.
  The students will understand how the physical realization of qubits in semiconductors relies on their electronic properties.
• Making judgements
  The students will understand how to design experiments which can measure relevant parameters and figures of merit.
  The students will understand the merits and drawbacks of different physical qubit systems.
  The students will understand how to design quantum circuits to carry out simple operations and algorithms.
• Lifelong learning skills
  The students will further develop some of the concepts introduced in the first part of the integrated course.
  The students will be prepared to begin a masters' thesis project in a research laboratory working on semiconductors and/or semiconductor-based qubits.
  The students will be introduced to the extremely relevant current topic of quantum computing.

Quantum transport:
2-dimensional carrier gases: high-mobility 2DCG in a semiconductor quantum well.
Linear transport theory and Boltzmann equation: scattering mechanisms and screening, quantum and transport relaxation lifetimes, electrical conductivity and Hall effect.
M agnetic fields at low temperature: Landau levels, Shubnikov-de Haas oscillations, and the quantum Hall effect. Weak localization and spin-orbit coupling.
Split gate quantum dots:
Electrostatically confined quantum dots: definition, quasi-bound energy levels.
Quantized conductance: Coloumb blockade, tunneling.
Coupled quantum dots: charge sensing, spin-to-charge conversion.
Qubits in a semiconductor quantum well: physical realization, properties.
Q ubits:
Qubit formalism: quantum mechanics of qubit states, single qubit operations.
Multiple qubit states: separable states, entanglement.
Physical qubits: qubits in different physical systems, qubit operations, entanglement.
Quantum computing:
Quantum circuits: programming a quantum computer.
Algorithms: Bernstein-Vazirani for interrogating a hidden function, quantum Fourier transform, Shor’s factoring algorithm, Grover’s search algorithm, Quantum phase estimation.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The student will be evaluated by written and oral examinations according to the calendar of the course.
The student will be expected to discuss the physical phenomena which give rise to certain results or experimental effects, and what information regarding the characterization of the sample or device under test can be extracted from the experimental results. Emphasis is placed on the comprehension of real experimental data rather than calculation of simplified systems or reproduction of text-book derivations.
Students will be expected to understand and discuss the physical implementation of qubits and quantum gate operations.
Students will be expected to understand and design simple quantum circuits, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of quantum computation, and discuss the operation of the more well-known algorithms.

J. H. Davies, The Physics of Low-Dimensional Semiconductors, Editore: Cambridge University Press, Anno edizione: 1998
Thomas Ihn, Semiconductor Nanostructures: Quantum States and Electronic Transport, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2010
Neil W. Ashcroft and N. David Mermin, Solid State Physics, Editore: Thomson Learning

The course SENSOR SYSTEMS will provide the basis for understanding how sensors work (light and image sensors, temperature sensors, magnetic field sensors, strain and force sensors, displacement, distance and proximity sensors, microphones) and for designing analog and digital front-end circuits. Through the course Students will become familiar with sensors and electronic components data-sheets and also with specific tools to program and debug ARM microcontrollers. During the hands-on labs, each student will practice with a microcontroller, using the main peripherals (GPIO, SPI, I2C, USART, PWM, ADC) and a sensor expansion board, for developing both the firmware and the proper hardware configuration, to test the conceived embedded system. The goal of the course is to enable master degree Students to select the best sensor for a specific application, develop an optimized front-end circuit and acquire the output signal with a microcontroller.
The course will include 24 hours of theoretical classes about sensors and front-end circuits and 26 hours of hands-on design laboratories. In particular, the NUCLEO board by STMicroelctronics, including a 32-bit STM32 microcontroller, will be used during the design laboratories.
3 CFUs will be delivered with Innovative Teaching modality as “Flipped Classroom”, in fact the Students will be asked to develop the projects before classes, in order to actively participate during the hands-on classes. Homework will be given through the course and their discussion will be objective of the exam. For the hands-on design laboratories the Students will organize in teams of 5 people that will collaborate to complete the assigned projects.

Knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor #1)
Students will learn:
the working principle of the most used sensors
the parameters of practical interest for many sensors
the architecture and programming of an ARM microcontroller
Applying knowledge and understanding (Dublin Descriptor #2)
Students will apply their knowledge in practical case studies:
design the front-end circuit for practical case studies
acquire sensors output and display results with an STM32 microcontroller
Making judgements (Dublin Descriptor #3)
Given a practical case study and thanks to the Innovative Teaching, Students will:
analyze the critical issues
select the best sensor to be used
compare different solutions for the sensor front-end
think the best way to validate the system
Communication (Dublin Descriptor #4)
Students will learn to:
explain complex theoretical concept regarding the sensors working principle
express and justify their project choices
present the outcomes of their work in an effective way
Lifelong learning skills (Dublin Descriptor #5)
Students will be enabled to
read and understand sensors and electronic components data-sheets
develop a realistic project using the existing sensors
analyze new problems and find the best sensor and circuital solution to solve them

Sensors and front-end circuits (24 hours theoretical classes)
Basics on sensors: definitions, classifications and characteristics.
Working principle and front-end circuits of the most employed sensors:
light and imaging (photodiode, CCD and CMOS sensor);
temperature (RTD, thermistors, thermocouple, thermal diode, IR thermometer);
magnetic field (Hall sensors, magneto-resistances);
strain and forces (strain gauges, piezoelectric sensor);
displacement, distance and proximity (capacitive, inductive, acoustic, optical, magnetic, touch sensors);
audio (dynamic and condenser microphones).
Microcontrollers for embedded sensors systems (4 hours theoretical classes 26 hours design laboratories)
Introduction on ARM-Cortex M cores, STM32F4 microcontroller by STMicroelectronics peripherals and Nucleo development board.
Basics on the main microcontrollers peripherals (GPIO, PWM, ADC, SPI, I2C, USART, etc.) and simple projects (pushbutton, blinking LED, sending strings to remote terminal, using communication interfaces, etc.).
Sensors expansion board: hardware description and details of the sensors included in the board.
Hands on activities to interface sensors (temperature, light, sound, rotation, accelerations) with the microcontroller using its peripherals and providing an output (sending data to pc or displaying on an LCD or generating a sound through a speaker). Low power mode will be introduced for power saving smart sensors.
The main developed projects will include:
readout of a keybord;
communicate with a PC;
readout of a temperature smart sensor with I2C interface;
measure light intensity through a Light Dependent Resistor;
detect sounds with a microphone;
readout of a rotary encoder;
acquisition of the x, y, z accelerations with a tri-axial accelerometer;
communicate between boards with optical communication.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, senza presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
Assessment will be based on:
10 weekly reports on the projects developed in teams (the reports will be graded on a sampling basis; at least two reports from each team will be assessed).
A written exam covering the entire course content (theory of sensors, microcontroller architecture, and programming for sensor readout). The written exam will include both multiple-choice and open-ended questions.
A short oral examination based on the 10 projects.
The reports and the oral examination together will account for 25% of the final grade, while the written exam will account for the remaining 75%.

Franco Zappa, Microcontrollers, Editore: Società Editrice Esculapio, Bologna, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 9788893850223
Franco Zappa, Electronic Systems, Editore: Società Editrice Esculapio, Bologna, Anno edizione: 2012, ISBN: 9788893850858 www.editrice-esculapio.com/zappa-electronic-systems/

The course provides a survey about the main groups of materials with special functional properties, classified as “smart materials” owing to their ability to fulfil special functions other than the load-bearing ability, in some instances by reacting to changes or stimuli coming from the environment. Aspects related to their structure, physical and mechanical properties, manufacturing routes, application-oriented design and case studies are covered. As introductory topics to the course, concepts about physical metallurgy of materials will be recalled and several non-conventional applications of ferrous and nonferrous metals and alloy exploiting some of their peculiar functional and structural properties will be reviewed.

After attending the course, the student will:

• have a wide knowledge about the scenario of metal-based and ceramic-based alloys that can be used as smart materials for the design of devices and components;
• have basic understanding about the phenomena leading to the achievement of specific properties.
• know how the properties of these materials can be modified and affected by the manufacturing processes;
• be able to critically select the proper material for any specific design application.

1. Recall about the principles of physical metallurgy and of the production and transformation process of materials, introducing the relations among manufacturing route, material structure and achievable properties.
2. Traditional and non-conventional applications of ferrous and nonferrous metals. Review about properties of special steels and cast irons, application-oriented selection of non-ferrous alloy considering their strength and physical properties (e.g Al, Mg, Ti, Cu, Ni alloys).
3. Concepts about composite materials and their applications in industrial fields (lightweight design, wear resistant tools, structural ceramic-matrix composites)
4. Principles and applications of shape-memory and superelastic alloys.
5. Design criteria and applications of materials for thermal storage.
6. Porous materials and lattice structures for lightweight design and other opportunities as smart materials.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, con prove in itinere
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
The exam of Smart Materials consists of a written test with 3/4 questions about selected topics, where the students will summarize what they have learnt during the course. A further contribution to the evaluation includes the preparation and presentation of a project work where students in team can propose a project idea about the application of a smart material to originally fulfil a special function for a practical application. The project work is not mandatory, those students who will present it successfully will gain and additional score for the final exam evaluation.

Slides about lectures will be made available through We-Beep channel
Reza Abbaschian, Robert E. Reed-Hill, Physical Metallurgy Principles, Editore: Cengage Learning Publisher, Anno edizione: 2009
Michael F. Ashby and David R. H. Jone, Engineering Materials 1 - An Introduction to their Properties and Applications, Editore: Butterworth Heinemann Publisher, Second Edition, Anno edizione: 2001
Michael F. Ashby and David R. H. Jone, Engineering Materials 2 - An Introduction to Microstructures, Processing and Design, Editore: Butterworth Heinemann Publisher, Second Edition, Anno edizione: 1999
A selection of the most updated scientific papers reviewing the state of the art about smart materials will be collected

The course is an introduction to the physics of soft materials, complex fluids, and biological systems, ranging from simple colloidal suspensions to polymer, spontaneous surfactant aggregates, gels, proteins and nucleic acids. Besides providing a bottom-up presentation of the properties of complex fluids, based on their microscopic structure and interactions, the course aims to highlighting the important role played by these materials in the consumer market and for nanotechnologies, focusing in particular on those applications that require an adequate knowledge of their flow and rheological properties.

Knowledge and Understanding (DdD1): Students will master the fundamental ideas of soft matter physics, gaining a comprehensive understanding of general concepts that enable the investigation of diverse materials using unified models and methods.
Applying Knowledge and Understanding (DdD2): Students will apply these general concepts to topics relevant to materials science, with a specific focus on recent advancements in disperse systems.
Making Judgments (DdD3): Students will effectively convey their acquired knowledge, demonstrating clarity and accuracy in synthesizing complex subjects related to soft matter.

1) General introduction to disperse systems and supramolecular systems. Elements of statistical thermodynamics. Dilute suspensions and osmotic pressure. Effective forces between dispersed particles: excluded volume, van der Waals and electrostatic interactions, depletion forces. Brownian motion.
2) Colloidal dispersions. Stability of a suspension of colloidal particles and colloidal aggregation. Colloidal crystals, glasses and hydro/aerogels. Patchy particles. Active colloids. Applications of nanofluids in nanotechnology.
3) Polymer solutions. Dilute solutions and polymer coils. Semi-dilute solutions, polymer meshes, and Flory-Huggins theory. Polymer gels. Polyelectrolytes.
4) Surfactant solutions and Emulsions. Classes of surfactant and their practical applications. Micellization and basic principles of detergency. Self-assembly of surfactant molecules: micelles, “living polymers”, inverted micelles, and vesicles. Emulsion stability. Micro and Nano Emulsion. Pickering Emulsions.
5) Experimental methods to investigate soft materials (i.e. Light Scattering, correlation spectroscopy, video microscopy, micro and macro-rheology (with lab presentation).

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation involves an oral examination designed to determine the extent to which students have achieved the course objectives. During the exam, the student is asked to discuss a topic covered in the course, assessing his/her ability to summarize and present an argument. Additionally, his/her mastery of acquired knowledge is evaluated by focusing on key physical concepts and applying them to real-world situations. For the overall evaluation, clarity of communication, scientific language proficiency, and ability to connect different topics are considered.
At the beginning of the exam, the student is asked whether he/she intends to provide details of the demonstrations carried out during the course. In case of a negative response, the maximum achievable grade is 27/30.

Roberto Piazza, Soft Matter: The Stuff That Dreams Are Made of, Editore: Springer Verlag, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 978-9400705845
Note: This is not a textbook, but rather a popoular science book written in a plain language and accessible to a large audience. Yet, it contains most of the physics we need
Coussot, Philippe, Rheophysics, Editore: Springer International Publishing, Anno edizione: 2014, ISBN: 978-3-319-38016-2
Note: This book presents a unified view of the physicochemical origin of the mechanical behaviour of soft materials.The mathematical formalism is reduced in order to focus on physical explanations.
R.G. Larson, The Structure and Rheology of Complex Fluids, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 1999, ISBN: 978-0-19-512197-1
Note: A bit technical, but a good starting point for appreciating the physics and dynamics of complex fluids.
R. A. L. Jones, Soft Condensed Matter, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2002, ISBN: 978-0198505891
Note: A slim and accessible introduction, although at a level which is not as advanced as the one of this course
T. A. Witten,, Structured Fluids, Editore: Oxford University Press, Anno edizione: 2010, ISBN: 978-0199583829
Note: A very good book, at a level a bit more advanced than the one of this course, and with a more theoretical lingo

Aim of the course is to provide the elements to address the technical aspects of the management and treatment of municipal solid waste, as well as of some specific waste streams:
Knowledge of the properties and characteristics of waste
Knowledge of EU and Italian legislation on waste
Knowledge of the different options for waste collection
Setting up of integrated waste management schemes and plans
Design of treatment, recovery and disposal plants, such as sorting facilities (MRF), Mechanical-biological treatment plant (MBT), composting and anaerobic digestion plants, energy recovery facilities and landfills
Assessment and control of the environmental impacts of waste treatment plants
Management of selected non-municipal waste streams

Lectures will allow students to:

• know the characteristics of waste and understand a laboratory report (Dublin descriptor: 1)
• understand and apply the proper legislation on waste (Dublin descriptor: 1)
• define an integrated waste management plan (Dublin descriptor: 2)
• understand and control the environmental impacts of waste management and treatment (Dublin descriptor: 1 and 2)
• critically assess different options of waste management (Dublin descriptor: 3)
  The exercises and the projects will allow students to:
• quantitatively define the properties of waste streams (Dublin descriptor: 2)
• preliminarily design a waste treatment plant (Dublin descriptor: 2 and 3)
  The practical activities will allow students to:
• deepen the knowledge of specific waste streams (Dublin descriptor: 1 and 2)
• engage in practical quantitative evaluations related to waste (Dublin descriptor: 4)
• improve their ability to work in group (Dublin descriptor: 4 and 5)

Overall framework: waste production and management in Italy, the EU and in the world
Waste characteristics: waste composition analysis, proximate and elemental analysis, calorific value, biogenic content. Solid Recovered Fuels - SRF
Legislation applicable to waste (in Italy and in the EU)
Waste prevention and re-use: general concepts, decoupling, examples of waste prevention activities
Integrated waste management: general concepts, waste management plans, waste collection strategies and schemes
Material recycling: overall framework, focus on the sorting and recycling of paper, plastic, glass, aluminium
Mechanical-Biological Treatments (MBT): process concepts, mass and energy balances, impacts on the environment
Biological processes (composting, anaerobic digestion): process concepts, mass and energy balances, impacts on the environment
Thermal treatments through combustion in dedicated plants: process concepts, mass and energy balances, impacts on the environment, assessment of biogenic vs. fossil CO2 emissions
Alternative thermal treatments: gasification and pyrolysis; co-combustion in cement kilns and power plants
Landfill disposal: design and operation, leachate and biogas characteristics and management, legislation, aftercare
Assessment and management of selected waste streams: Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Construction and Demolition waste, End of Live Vehicles, Li-ion batteries, Used Tyres
Introduction to the role of waste management in the circular economy framework
The course includes a series of exercises on the main topics of the teaching program.
A field visit to one or more waste treatment plants is part of the program, together with one or more seminars held by external professionals.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
During the semester
M2C students will have to carry out individually (or in couple) one project related to the preliminary design of a waste treatment plant. The project will be evaluated for its corectness, proper design choices, adequate technical language.
The other students will have to carry out a practical activity in small groups. It will be evaluated based on its comprehensiveness, also during its plenary presentation, which will include a peer-review session.
Both the project and the practical activities cannot be repeated during the year (one-shot)
At the calls
The same rules apply to all students: a written test with exercises and a theoretical question, followed by an oral exam on the whole program. (Rules might change in case of very crowded calls). Both written test and oral exam need to be sufficient (6/10) to achieve the final grade.
The final mark is based on the outcome of the written test, of the oral exam and of the projects or practical activity.

Thomas H. Christensen (Editor), Solid Waste Technology & Management, Volume 1 & 2, Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 2011, ISBN: 9781405175173
Slides, lecture notes on the key topics. All has to be to be complemented by the students notes. Beep

Main aim of this course is providing, by means of statistical and probabilistic methods, a rationale for the thermodynamic description and a bottom-up description of the structural and dynamic properties of materials. These concepts are then applied to the description of systems of specific interest in engineering applications, such as liquids, plasmas, disordered solids (glasses and gels) and magnetic materials, and to investigate physical problems of technological relevance such as phase transitions, superfluidity and superconductivity.

At the end of the course, students should
Know and master the fundamental ideas of statistical physics and the basic tools, such as statistical ensembles and partition functions, which allow to relate the microscopic world to the macroscopic realm of thermodynamics;
Manage to apply the former general concepts to topics in condensed matter and material science of interest for their specific course of studies.
Be capable of conveying the knowledge they have acquired with plainness but also with accuracy and the ability to synthetize the argument (even for an audience that may not be as learned in the field as their teacher).

1. Review of probability and statistics. Probability distributions of interest in physics. Statistical entropy. Brownian motion as a paradigm of stochastic processes in physics.
2. From the macroworld to the microworld. Review of thermodynamics. Physical description of classical and quantum many-particle systems. Phase space and Liouville theorem. Density of quantum microstates and its dependence on total energy.
3. Foundations of statistical mechanics. Boltzmann fundamental postulate. Microcanonical distribution and thermodynamics. Gibbs paradox and Maxwell-Boltzmann (MB) approximation.
4. Closed systems and canonical distribution. Partition function and free Energy. Average value and fluctuations of internal variables. Canonical distribution for independent particles and system of indistinguishable particles. Classical monatomic gas. Polyatomic gases. Einstein and Debye models for the specific heat of solids. Phonons in solids. Paramagnetism and diamagnetism. Bohr-van Leewen theorem.
5. Mean field theories. Van der Waals model of the liquid-gas transition. Ferromagnetism and Curie-Weiss theory. Plasmas in the Debye-Hückel approximation.
6. Open systems and gran-canonical distribution. Chemical potential. Langmuir adsorption isotherm. Inhomogeneous systems and local chemical potential. Colloidal dispersions. Quantum statistics. Weakly-degenerate gases. Fermi gas and Sommerfeld theory for electrons in metals. Degenerate Bose gas and Bose-Einstein (BE) condensation. Laser cooling and BE condensation in dilute gases confined by magneto-optical traps.
7. Highly correlated systems. Liquid structure. Density correlations and structure factor. Superfluidity in 4 He and Landau-Tisza phenomenological model. Superconductivity (hints).

Prova orale obbligatoria
The evaluation consists in an oral examination, structured so to ascertain whether and to what extent the goals of the course have been reached. Specifically, the student is first asked to give a concise introduction to one of the general subjects discussed in the course, so to check her/his skills in summarizing and framing an argument. Practical mastering of the acquired knowledge is then verified by asking the student to explicitly derive some of the main results related to that topic (namely, the student should be able to combine synthetic with analytic skills), focusing on a specific application of the discussed subject to the main subject of his/her studies. For the overall evaluation, a yardstick of the student’s performance, besides the clarity and effectiveness of the exposition, will also be the skill in using an appropriate scientific language and the readiness in finding connections between different topics. The final assessment will also take into account the degree of incremental knowledge acquired by student with respect to her/his starting level.

Roberto Piazza, Statistical Physics: A prelude and fugue for engineers, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2017, ISBN: 978-3-319-44536-6
Note: This is the official textbook of the course, which can be FREELY DOWNLOADED by all the students from
https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-319-44537-3
using their PoliMi credentials

Questo corso fornisce agli studenti competenze relative alle curve e alle superfici per il Computer-Aided Design. Pur concentrandosi sulle tecniche di modellazione per superfici, si discuterà del ruolo delle curve e delle superfici nel design computazionale, nella robotica e nella produzione manifatturiera. Il corso copre le basi matematiche delle curve e delle superfici parametriche, tra cui splines, Bézier e NURBS, e fornisce numerosi esempi delle loro applicazioni in ingegneria. Inoltre, verrà adottato un approccio fortemente applicativo, con sessioni pratiche con software CAD per modellare superfici sia tecniche che estetiche, attraverso casi studio reali nei settori Automotive, Navale e Product Design.Infine, il corso approfondirà le implicazioni della topologia delle superfici nell'analisi numerica e nella preparazione delle mesh.

This course aims to provide students with the engineering methodologies and tools necessary to select and evaluate surface modification treatments tailored to the operational requirements of mechanical components. The course covers the main surface modification and deposition techniques, including Thermal Spray, PVD, CVD, Laser Cladding, Carburizing, and Nitriding. It also addresses the primary surface-originated failure mechanisms such as wear, fatigue, contact fatigue, and thermal fatigue.

Knowledge and understanding (DdD1)
Students will acquire theoretical knowledge of surface engineering technologies and the mechanisms of surface-related damage in mechanical components.
Applying knowledge and understanding (DdD2)
Through laboratory activities, students will apply theoretical concepts to real-world case studies, designing and conducting experimental tests and interpreting the results.
Making judgements (DdD3)
Students will develop the ability to critically assess the suitability of surface treatments, analyze experimental data, and compare findings with scientific literature.
Communication skills (DdD4)
Students will prepare a technical report and deliver an oral presentation, effectively communicating their experimental work and results to peers and instructors.
Learning skills (DdD5)
The course fosters independent learning through literature review, experimental planning, and collaborative teamwork, preparing students for continuous professional development.

Overview of coating and surface modification techniques:

• Thermal Spray
• Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD)
• Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD)
• Laser Cladding
• Spin Coating
• Thermochemical diffusion treatments: Carburizing and Nitriding
  Surface damage mechanisms:
• Wear
• Fatigue
• Contact fatigue
• Thermal fatigue
  Laboratory activities:
• Pin-on-disk wear testing
• Scratch testing
• Micro-hardness measurements
• SEM and optical microanalysis
• Thermal cycling in laboratory furnaces
  Teaching Methods
  Theoretical lectures (1/3 of the course)
  Experimental laboratory sessions (2/3 of the course)
  Group work on industrial case studies
  Final technical report and oral presentation

Prova orale obbligatoria
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i obbligatorio, di gruppo, senza revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Assessment for this course is structured as follows:
Group Technical Report: Each group will analyze an assigned industrial case study. The report should include an overview of the case, a review of the relevant literature, a detailed description of the experimental setup and procedures, and a critical discussion of the results obtained.
Individual Oral Presentation: At the end of the course, every student will deliver a brief oral presentation summarizing the main findings and conclusions of their group’s project. The presentation will also allow students to demonstrate their understanding of the experimental work and their ability to discuss technical aspects in depth.

Due to the growing sensitivity and awareness of environmental issues, and increasingly stringent regulations, water treatment technologies are a rapidly growing area of engineering. This course aims at filling educational gaps on advanced water-related technologies, with particular focus on the application of advanced oxidation and reduction methods to pollution sensing and abatement. Many of the technologies presented are not available on an industrial scale and aim to address environmental problems that conventional technologies are unable to effectively tackle. The program includes plasma processes, sonolysis, ionizing processes, photochemical and photocatalytyic processes and all electrochemical technologies industrially applied for the detection and removal of pollutants. The course will provide a comprehensive coverage of the theory and practice. The value of the course will be enhanced by lessons given by industry representatives, both in the field of technologies manufacturing and water managing.
XXX
La crescente sensibilità e consapevolezza nei confronti delle problematiche ambientali, unitamente a normative sempre più stringenti, rendono le tecnologie per il trattamento delle acque uno dei settori dell'ingegneria in più rapida evoluzione.
L'insegnamento si propone di colmare le lacune formative nell'ambito delle tecnologie avanzate per il trattamento delle acque, con particolare attenzione all'applicazione dei processi avanzati di ossidazione e riduzione per il monitoraggio e l'abbattimento degli inquinanti. Molte delle tecnologie presentate non sono ancora disponibili su scala industriale e sono finalizzate ad affrontare problematiche ambientali che le tecnologie convenzionali non sono in grado di risolvere in modo efficace.
Il programma comprende i processi al plasma, la sonolisi, i processi basati su radiazioni ionizzanti, i processi fotochimici e fotocatalitici, nonché le principali tecnologie elettrochimiche impiegate a livello industriale per il rilevamento e la rimozione degli inquinanti.
L'insegnamento offre una trattazione completa sia degli aspetti teorici sia delle applicazioni pratiche. Il percorso formativo è inoltre arricchito da interventi di esperti provenienti dal settore industriale, attivi sia nella progettazione e produzione di tecnologie per il trattamento delle acque sia nella gestione delle risorse idriche.

The students are expected to acquire familiarity with modern engineering technologies for water remediation and pollution detection.
In particular, upon completion of the semester the student will be able to:
understand and describe the role of physico-chemical advanced technology in water remediation;
classify the unconventional methods applied to water analysis and water treatment;
autonomou sly recognize, compare and evaluate the various technologies considered during the semester relative to the target;
****
Gli studenti dovranno acquisire familiarità con moderne tecnologie per la decontaminazione delle acque.
In particolare, al termine del semestre gli studenti dovranno essere in grado di:
1. comprendere e descrivere il ruolo delle tecnologie fisico-chimiche non convenzionali nel settore del trattamento delle acque
2. classificare i metodi non convenzionali applicati all'anaisi ed al trattamento delle acque
3. riconoscere, confrontare e valutare in modo autonomo l'efficacia delle diverse tecnologie considerate durante il semestre in relazione allo specifico obiettivo nell'ambito del trattamento delle acque.

Introduction
(Cold) Plasma processes
Ionizing processes
Gamma-rays
Electron-beam
Microwaves
Sonolysis
Photochemical processes
Photocatalytic processes
Electrochemical technologies
Electrochemical oxidation
Electrochemical reduction
Electroflotation
Electrocoagulation
Electrodyalisis
Electrochemical disinfection
Electrochemical sensing of pollutants
Potentiometric sensors
Amperometric-coulometric detection of pollutants
Voltammetric detection of pollutants
Polarographic detection of pollutants
Amperometric gas sensors
Stripping analysis
Conductivity detectors
Photoassisted detection of pollutants
Innovative teaching: several lectures will be given by industry representatives.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Written exam consisting in 3-5 open questions, including 2 general questions and 1-3 specific questions. The student is expected to be able to describe the various technologies presented in the course using a suitable technical language, and to discriminate among different techniques selecting the most suitable one(s) with reference to a specific practical study case.
****
Esame scritto, 3-5 domande a risposta aperta delle quali 2 di carattere generale e 1-3 specifiche. Lo studente vorà essere in grado di descrivere le varie tecnologie presentate nel corso utilizzando un linguaggio tecnico appropriato, e di discriminare tra le diverse tecnologie selezionando quella/quelle più adatta/e a risolvere specifici problemi di inquinamento.

The course aims to introduce basic and advanced concepts necessary for understanding the structure-property correlations of polymeric materials and composites for engineering applications. The analysis is carried out starting from the linear behavior (liquid and solid state) and time dependent (viscoelasticity) and then passing to the durability examination intended as the beginning of irreversible phenomena that lead to the degradation of the structure and performance of materials. They include the yield, fracture and phenomena of change of the chemical structure (eg degradation by exposure to sunlight) and physics of materials.

The student:

• knows and understands the structure-property correlations of polymers and composites and their appropriate use in the design of processes and products for Materials Engineering and Nanotechnologies (DdD1);
• knows how to make choices related to the dimensioning of components and the use of materials in relation to the specific use of the product (DdD1-DdD2);
• autonomously carries out insights on topics related to the course to solve simple design problems (DdD2).
  The project-work also has the objective of stimulating the student's ability to develop autonomous knowledge of the subject, to address and critically discuss problems and situations also other than those faced during the lessons, and to make design choices. These abilities will be taken into account in the final evaluation.

INTRODUCTION
The engineering use of polymeric materials: processing and applications.
Rheological properties and solid state properties.
Limitations of the traditional concept of property (‘single point data’) and advanced (‘integral’) concept.
Constitutive relations and their role in engineering problems.
Intrinsic material properties
Examples of constitutive relations used in polymer rheology and mechanics.
RECALL of basic concepts and definitions in SOLID and FLUID MECHANICS
POLYMER RHEOLOGY
Rheological constitutive equations for polymers: classification. Non-Newtonian shear behaviour of polymeric fluids. Dynamic viscosity. Fluodynamics and the role of rheological costitutive equations in fluodynamical problems. Example: analysis of the flow in a pipe.
PROPERTY-to-STRUCTURE RELATIONSHIPS in POLYMER RHEOLOGY
Shear viscosity-to-structure relationships in polymers. Shear viscosity dependence on temperature and pressure.
POLYMER VISCOELASTICITY
Material's fading memory: ‘functional’ dependence of material's response on stimulus' past history. Behaviour of polymers under ‘simple’ histories of the mechanical stimulus: Energetical consequences of the viscoelastic behaviour.
The theory of linear viscoelasticity. I. Boltzmann’s superposition postulate. The theory of linear viscoelasticity. II. Analogue models.
THERMO- and PIEZO-VISCOELASTICITY
General temperature dependence of viscoelasticity. Linear theory of thermo-viscoelasticity: time-temperature ‘equivalence’. Master curves and shift factor. Arrhenius’ and Williams-Landel-Ferry’s shift factors.Piezo-viscoelasticity: time-pressure ‘equivalence’.
PROPERTY-to-STRUCTURE RELATIONSHIPS in POLYMER VISCOELASTICITY
Thermo-mechanical Spectrometry (time/rate/frequency or temperature scans)
VOLUMETRIC BEHAVIOUR OF POLYMERS
Equation of state (PVT) and deviation from equilibrium: time-dependence of volumetric transformations. Kinetical nature of the glass transition. Doolittle’s experiment and the the concept of ‘free volume’. Derivation of WLF’s shift factor from Doolittle’s equation. Volumetric or ‘dilatational’ viscoelasticity (PVT-t). Effect of ‘dilatational’ viscoelasticity on ‘distorsional’ viscoelasticity.- POLYMER AND COMPOSITES AGEING AND DEGRADATION: chemical and physical mechanisms and their consequences on structure and properties
YIELD AND FRACTURE OF POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES: mechanisms, theories and effects of time-dependent behaviour
PREDICTION OF LIFETIME: accelerated testing, theoretical modeling and case histories
PREVENTIVE MEASURES: additives, coatings, etc.

Prova scritta obbligatoria, senza prove in itinere
Prova orale condizionata (a scelta del docente)
Progetto/i - Elaborato/i facoltativo (a scelta dello studente), individuale, con revisioni periodiche, con presentazione/discussione finale
Valutazione continua facoltativa (a scelta dello studente)
The evaluation of the student is based on the following methods:

• participation in blended learning activities and learning verification tests
• final written test consisting of both open-ended questions and the resolution of design problems
  The final mark is established on the basis of passing the written test, while the assessment of the learning tests constitutes an increase of that grade in the range from 0 to +2. An elective design activity is also avauilable which can allow for an additional increment of the grade up to +4.

Course notes and other reading material https://beep.metid.polimi.it
H.A.Barnes, Handbook of Elementary Rheology, Editore: Wales Univ. Press, Anno edizione: 2000, ISBN: 0-9538032-0-1
S.Middleman, The Flow of High Polymers, Editore: Interscience, Anno edizione: 1968
D.J.William, Polymer Science and Engineering, Editore: Prentice-Hall, Anno edizione: 1971
N.G. McCrum, C.P. Buckley and C.B. Bucknall, Principles of Polymer Engineering, Editore: Oxford Univ Press, Anno edizione: 1997
H.F.Brinson and L.C.Brinson, Polymer Engineering Science and Viscoelasticity. An Introduction, Editore: Springer, Anno edizione: 2008
C.W.Macosko, Rheology. Principles, Measurements and Applications, Editore: N.Y. VCH Publ., Anno edizione: 1994
J.D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers (2nd Edition), Editore: John Wiley & Sons, Anno edizione: 1969